Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Project : Shershah Engineering College

at
Sasaram (Rohtas)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CIVIL WORKS

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
General Specifications for Civil Works

Note : All works shall be carried out in accordance as per latest BCD SOR or CPWD
Specifications with up to date correction slip wherever applicable unless and other wise
specified in this Tender

Preambles

1.

The work shall be carried out according to those specifications,

whether specification mentioned or not. No extra in any form will be paid
unless it is definitely stated as an item in the Schedule of Quantities,
wherever the specification are not given or ambiguous, the relevant Indian
Standard and further amendments will be considered as a final and binding to
Contractor.

2.

The work shall be carried out simultaneously with the Electrical,

Sanitary and other services and in co-operation with the Contractors for the
above services. The work shall be carried on till it is completed satisfactorily
along with the completion of essential portion of other services. The building
contractor shall keep the other contractors informed well in advance or the
proposed programme of the work and shall give adequate notice to enable
them to carry out their part of the work so that further co-operate with the
other contractors in respect at any facility required by them e.g. making holes
in shuttering for sanitary pipes, electric conduits, as hooks, etc. However,
nothing extra shall be admissible to him for such reasonable assistance and
facilities afforded to other contractors and the building contractor shall be
deemed to have taken these factors into consideration while quoting his rates.

3.

The work shall be related to the drawings which the contractor is

presumed to have studied. Nothing extra will be paid for any item on account
of its shape, size, location or other difficult circumstances, even. if the
schedule makes no distinction, as long as the item is shown in the drawings.

4.

The sources of materials stated in the specifications are those from

which materials are generally available. However, materials not conforming to
specifications shall be rejected even if they come from the stated sources.
The contractor should satisfy himself that sufficient quantity of materials of
acceptable specification is available from the stated or other sources and
should tender accordingly.

5.

"Schedule" shall mean the Schedule of items and rates.

"Approved, allowed, accepted shall mean approval of the Architects in
Writing.
"Required" means as instructed by Architects.

Vol.II / 1

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

6.

The requirements of specifications under (1) General and (2) Materials,

shall be fulfilled by the contractor without extra charge i.e. the item rates
quoted shall be deemed to have taken these specification into account.

7.

The term "Architects" used in the specifications or elsewhere would

also mean the "Consultants" .

Vol.II / 2

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

General Specifications :1.1.

The W.C. & Office Accommodation : The contractor Shall provide at his
own expense adequate accommodation for his workmen and keep the Same
in good order, in conformity with the bye-laws laid by the local bodies.
Similarly, the contractor shall also provide adequate office accommodation for
the Project Engineer of BCD including toilet facilities, fan light and furniture as
per sketch enclosed. This may be slightly modified to suit site conditions with
the approval of Architects. The structure shall be removed on the completion
of works at contractors own cost.
All materials shall belong to the contractor.
Accommodation details for the project Engineer- :
2 Nos. of Office Rooms, each having size of 4.25 x 3.75 m and 1 Rs. Toilet
1.5 x 1.25 m with A.C. Sheet Roof or Flat Roof.

ELECTRICAL FITTING
Light point

FOR EACH ROOM

- 1 (with fittings)

FURNITURE FOR EACH ROOM

1. Office Tables 1.5 m
x 90cm with drawers
each

Fan Point

- 1 (with fan)

2. Office chairs

Sanitary fittings

- 1 W.C. + 1 W.B.

3. Almirah 1.5m x 1.0 m

0.38m with 4 shelves
4. Soft wood board panel
fixed on wall 3.75 m
x 1.25m

1.2

Board : A Board of size approximately 2.5m x 2m shall be made and put up

at an approved place on the site. This Board shall be painted in approved
colours with the name of (i) the proposed construction and the Employers; (ii)
the building contractor; (iii) the Architects; and (i) any other specialist
Consultants, as directed and approved by the Architects. This
provided by the contractor at his own cost.

Vol.II / 3

shall be

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
1.3
Drawings, Instructions & measurements: All works shall be done according to
the Drawings and Instructions of Architects. All Drawings supplied will be kept
properly cloth backed by the contractor. Such Drawings and any other
instructions issued by the Architect will be kept properly on the site and will be
made available for scrutiny, discussions, study and execution of work etc. all
the time for reference.
These drawings, along with set of specifications all general and special
condition, copy of agreement and conditions of tender etc. neatly catalogued,
will be treated as master copy of site.
A site order book with hard bound cover duly paged on minimum two
hundred pages will be maintained and kept at site under the safe custody of
the contractor and this will be made available to the Architect or his
authorized agent when required. Instructions given by the Architects or his
agent, shall be entered in this book which will be strictly followed by the
contractor. Such instructions shall not be altered, modified and mutilated in
any form by any agency other than the Architects and this book shall never be
removed from the site without the permission of the Architects in writing. Loss
of site order book will be considered as serious lapse and the contractor shall
be singly responsible for such loss.
1.4

Clearing the site :

The site described and surrounding of the proposed

building shall be cleared of aIl obstructions, loose, stone and vegetation etc.
All holes or hollows whether originally existing or produced by removal of
loose stone, vegetation or plants etc. shall be carefully filled up with earth,
well rammed and levelled off as directed. Also the contractor shall dress the
site all round the building after completion maximum cutting or filling being
10". No extra shall be paid for this to the contract. The contractor shall also
keep the site always properly drained of all surface water, healthy and clean.
1.5

Tree : No tree shall be cut without permission. If any tree is to be out this
shall form an extra item. For the purpose of the specification a tree shall be

Voll.II /4

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
defined as a growth which is more than 10'-0" high and whose diameter of the
trunk at the base is not less than 10". If the tree be of any value or use the benefit
will accrue to the Employer.
1.6

Measuring materials: Materials requiring measuring shall be measured

separately in boxes of appropriate sizes before being mixed the measurement
will be by volume or by weight depending upon the quality of the concrete.
For controlled concrete all mixes will be definitely done by weight.

1.7

Temporary protection: The contractor shall keep all cuts, banks fill bench
marks, all important centre lines pilasters properly protected during the
execution of works.

1.8

Quality of work: Materials, tools and plants and workmanship shall be in

accordance with the requirement and of the approved type.

1.9

Leave clean: On completion all work must be cleaned down, rubbish removed
and the "Works and land cleared of and everything left in a clean and orderly
conditions.

1.10

Simple : Samples of each class of work required shall be submitted by the

contractor for approval of the Architects. Approved samples shall be
deposited at a place chosen by the Architects. The contractor will be required
to perform all works under this contract in accordance with these samples.

1.11

Provisional items: All provisional items in the schedule shall be carried out at
the discretion of the Architect and may or may not form part of the contract. In
case the provisional items are carried out by the contractor the rates shall be
settled as for extra items as stated in the conditions of contract. The Architect
may call upon the contractor to submit the rate analysis for any of all or the
items quoted by him in this tender. The Architect reserves the right to use the
details given in such rate analysis for the purpose of settlement of additional
extra items and modified items at any time during the execution of the works.

1.12

Storage : All materials will be safely properly stored.

Vol.II / 5

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

C.

SPECIFICATION FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK

1.

General:
(i)
Definitions :

(ii)

All R.C.C. :

(iil)

The Contractor :

(iv)
(v)

vi)

specified means specified in the specification in

any standards, codes, similar document
mentioned herein LS shall mean a standard
specification issued by the India Standard
Institute.
Approved shall mean approved in writing by the
Architects or the other authorised representative
or Engineer-in-Charge.
Work shall be carried out in strict accordance with
this specifications and IS specification and the
working drawings and other details of the
consulting engineers which shall be studied
thoroughly and any discrepancies in the
dimensions on the drawings or any points not
clear to the Contractor brought to the notice of the
Architects for clarification well in advance and
before proceeding with the work.
Shall allow for all wastages in all materials.
He shall also allow for tests of concrete materials
and if required produce manufacturers certificates
for cement and steel.
No concrete work shall be cast in the absence of
the clerk of work or the Architects' representative.
The
Contractor's
Engineer-in-Charge
shall
personally check that both the form of work and
reinforcement have been correctly placed and
fixed, and satisfy himself that all work preparatory
to the casting is completely ready, before
requesting the clerk of works or the Architect's
representative for final Inspection and approval
and for this purpose at least 24 hours notice shall
be given by the Contractor.

All exposed R.C. and P.C. work shall be curried out in strict accordance
With this specification and the additional
specifications for such work set-forth separately.

Vol.II / 6

Sen & Lall

2.
Materials :

Spec/Tender doc.

The materials used in the works shall be now and of the qualities and
kinds specified.
Materials delivered to the works shall be equal to the approved
samples which shall be deposited with the Engineer at least 35 days before
they are required for use in work.
Delivery shall be made sufficiently in advance of constructional
requirements to enable further samples to be selected and tested if so
desired by the Engineer. NO materials shall be due in the works until
approved.
Materials failing to comply with this specification shall be immediately
removed from the works at the Contractors cost.
A.

Cement :
(i)

The cement shall be medium setting port-land cement of approved

brand and manufacture end shall comply in all respects with the latest
IS 269 for medium setting cement.

(ii)

It shall be delivered on the site in package with an unbroken seal fixed

by the makers and plainly marked with the name of the brand and the
manufacture.

(iii)

It shall be stored in a dry place, in regular piles not exceeding ten bags
high and in such a manner that it will be efficiently protected from
moisture and contamination and that the consignment can be used up
in the order in which they are received, If necessary, cement shall be
screened at contractor's expense to remove any lumps. No cement
which has become damaged shall be used in the \work , but shall be
immediately removed from the work and replaced by the contractor at
his own expenses.

(iv)

If desired tests shall be made by taking samples of cement from stores

or also here from the works. The selection of samples and procedure
for testing shall comply with the appropriate IS Standard.
Vol. II / 7

Sen & Lall

B.
Aggregates :

Spec/Tender doc.

All aggregates shall conform to IS 383-1962. Aggregate shall, where

possible, be derived from a source that normally produces aggregate
satisfactory for concrete, and if requested by the Engineer the contractor shall
supply the evidence to this effect. If he is instructed to do so the Contractor
shall supply samples of the aggregates for the purpose of making preliminary
concrete test cubes as hereinafter specified.
General: Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring sand and gravel of
stone crushed or uncrushed, or a combination thereof. They shall be hard,
strong, dense durable clean and free from veins and adherent coatings.
Deleterious materials: Aggregates shall not contain any harmful materials,
such as iron, pyrites, coal, mica shale or similar laminated materials clay, etc.
in such quantity as to affect the strength or durability of the concrete, any
materials which might attain the reinforcement. Aggregates which are
chemically reactive with the alkalies of cement are harmful, as cracking of
concrete may take place.
Limits of deleterious materials : If: the Engineer so desires test of the
Aggregates shall be made, the samples selected by the Engineer being
delivered to a prescribed laboratory and tested in compliance with IS 2386.
Tile tests result of approved aggregate shall be as hereinafter specified,
relative and limiting quantities meaning percentage by weight unless the
context otherwise implies.
For heavily reinforced, concrete members as in the case of ribs of main
beam the nominal maximum size of the aggregate should usually be
restricted to 5 mm less than the minimum clear distance between the
reinforcement,. whichever is smaller where the reinforcement is widely
spaced as in solid slabs, limitations of size of the aggregate may not be so
important and the nominal maximum size may sometimes be as greater than
the minimum cover when porus aggregate are used.
For reinforced concrete work, aggregates , having a maximum size of
20 mm are generally considered satisfactory.
Vol. II / 8

Sen & Lall

Fine Aggregates :

Spec/Tender doc.
The fine aggregate shall be natural sand or sand derived by
crushing suitable gravel or stone and shall be tree from
coagulated lumps. Sand derived from a stone unsuitable for
coarse aggregate shall not be used as fine aggregate.

The grading of the aggregates, when determined as described in IS 2386 (Part I)

methods of tests for aggregates for concrete. Part I particles size and shape, shall
be described as fine aggregates, Grading Zones I, II, III and IV. Where the grading
falls outside the limits of any particular grading zones of sieves other than 600
micron IS sieve by a total amount not exceeding 5% it shall be regarded as falling
within that Grading Zone.
Table III Fine Aggregates
Clause 4.3
IS Sieve

Grading

Percentage passing for Grading

Grading

Grading

Designation

Zone I
Zone II
Zone III
Zone IV
10 mm
100
100
100
100
4.75 mm
90-100
90-100
90-100
90-100
2.36 mm
60-95
75-100
85-100
95-100
1.18 mm
30-70
55-99
60-79
90-100
600 micron
15-34
35-59
60-79
80-100
300 micron
5-20
8-30
12-40
15-50
150 micron
0-10
0-10
0-10
0-15
Coarse Aggregate : The coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone of crushed or
uncrushed gravel other materials having the characteristics specified later for coarse
aggregate shall not be used without approval.
The piece of aggregate shall be angular at except for concrete surface subject to
abrasion rounding in shape and shall have granular or crystalline or smooth (but not
glessy) non-powdery surface. Fibrable, flaky and laminated pieces, mica and shale
shall only be present in such quantities as to affect adversely the strength and
durability of the concrete ascertained by tests on concrete/as specified later.
The strength of the aggregate shall be such that the "Aggregate crushing value" as
specified IS 383 shall not exceed 45% or 30% for concrete surfaces subject to
abrasion.

Vol. II / 9
After twenty-four hour immersion in water a previously dried shall not have gained in
weight more than 5% and not more than 10% if it is to be used in plain concrete or
else where if described.
The grading shall be according to Table II of IS 383 -1970.

Sen & Lall

3.

Spec/Tender doc.

Reinforcement:

The reinforcement shall be (a) mild steel conforming to IS 432-1966 and (b) ribbed
tor steel conforming to IS 1786-1979. The type of reinforcement used in such part of
the works shall be as described herein.
Reinforcement shall be free from pitting due to corrosion, and shall also be
free from loose rust, mill scale, paint oil grout adhering earth, ice or: other materials
that may in the opinion of the Engineer impair the bond between the concrete and
the reinforcement or that may in the opinion of the Engineer cause corrosion of the
reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete adhering lime wash or cement grout
shall be permitted.
(1)

Bar wire reinforcement:: Bar reinforcement described as "mild steel" shall be

plain round hot rolled steel bars.
With respect to manufacture, quality physical properties and related
requirements reinforcement of the foregoing descriptions shall comply with
appropriate parts of IS Standard Nos. 432-l966 and IS-1786-1966 for mild
steel and tor steel respectively.

(ii)

Certificates and Testes for reinforcement : For each consignment of bar

reinforcement used in the works the contractor shall if required , supply a
certificate giving the ultimate strength, yield stress and elongation, and the
result of the cold bend test for each type and each size of bar or wire, tests for
the purposes of obtaining the information or these certificates shall comply
with the procedure specified in the appropriate Indian Standard. For each
consignment of the twisted bars used in the works the contractor shall supply
the engineer with a further certificate warranting that all the bars in the
consignment be made from mild steel complying with Indian Standard
Specification.
If reinforcement be supplied for which the maker is test sheets or other
records be not available, or wherein the Engineer's opinion the material has
been subject to corrosion or other deleterious effects. The Engineer shall
select as many test pieces as he deems necessary and the Contractor shall
supply and deliver One test piece tree of cost and without reimbursement
shall pay the Cost of preparing and testing them.

(iii)

Dimensions of reinforcement : The size of a reinforcement bar or wire

described on the working drawings or designed shall be the minimum and the
rolling margin and other tolerances shall be wholly above this size. The length
of reinforcement bar shall be not less than the length on the drawing or
elsewhere and shall be not more than 50 mm in excess or that length.
Vol. II / 10

(iv)

Measurement at and rate for reinforcement :

For the purpose at ascending payment, due to contractor the basis at
measurement at bar and wire reinforcement used in the works shall be the

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
calculated by weight, which shall be computed from the sizes & length of the
bars and wires described on the working drawing or elsewhere. No allowance
in the weight shall be made for cutting to waste, ralling margin extra length or
other tolerances.
Nothing extra whatsoever shall he admissible on bars of any diameter
rolled in weights higher them the standards weights even if such steel may
have been procured through the employers and issued to the contractors or
purchases by the contractor directly from the market rate on actual weight
basis. The contractor is deemed to have taken this factor into considered and
quoted accordingly in the tender.
The contractor rates for unit weights of bars reinforcement shall be deemed to
include all allowance omitted in circulating the weight and for any other tolerances,
and for providing binding wire, space bars and cover blocks as specified hereinafter
for carriage and handle for bending, hooking cranking and for fixing and maintaining
in the correct position in the works. Standard hooks (9 times the dia. for each hook)
shall be added to the finished length to arrive at the length of the bar for cutting and
measurement. No hooks are required for ribbed Tor steel.
4.
Water :
Water for making concrete or mortar shall be clean and fresh and free from
acid, oil, pollution from industrial or farm yard wastes, or other organic or inorganic
matter in solution or suspension in amounts which in the opinion of: the Engineer will
impair the strength or durability of the concrete or mortar. Water shall be obtained
from a public supply where possible, it shall be taken from a public supply where
possible, it shall be taken from a spring well, river, lakes or similar source only if
approved.
Only approved water shall be used for washing out shuttering and for mixing
concrete.
If instructed, samples of water shall be submitted for analysis or making
concrete test. The samples shall be taken in such a manner as to ensure true
representation of the water. Two or more samples as instructed shall be collected in
which shall be winchest quarts or similar glass containers which shall be rinsed out
twice with the proposed water. The containers shall be filled by submerging them in
the water without disturbing any sediment in the stream bed or other source of
supply. The samples shall be labelled and despatched as instructed.
WORKMANSHIP :
5.
Quality : The workmanship shall be of the quality specified or described and
all persons employed in the works or elsewhere in connection with the works shall
be competent and skilled in their respective occupations.
6.
Preparation of around below permanent construction: Plain loan concrete in
foundations or site concrete shall be placed in direct contact with the bottom of the
excavation, the concrete being deposited in such a manner as not to be
mixed with the earth.
Vol. II / 11
7.

Bending reinforcement: Reinforcement bars shall be bent by approved means

producing as a gradual and even motion.
Bars shall comply with the dimensions described in the drawings,
Over-all dimensions of bent bars of internal dimension of bindings or the like

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
shall be within a tolerance of 6 mm. Any discrepancies or inaccuracies found
by the contractor in the drawings or other documents shall be immediately
reported to the Engineer, whose interpretation and requirements relating
thereto shall be accepted.
The internal radius of bend shall be not less them twice the size of the
bar unless described to the contrary on the bending lists or elsewhere or in
the following, Hooks and other end anchorage bends shall be bent to an
internal radius of twice the diameter of the bar. This internal radius of the
bends at corners of binders or stirrups or links shall be half the size of the bar
embraced by the binders, stirrup or link.
8.

Fixing Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed and by approved means maintained
in the position described. Bars intended to be in contact shall be securely
wired together at all such paints with No.16 gouge annealed soft-iron typing
wire. Binders, stirrups and links shall tightly embrace the bars with which they
are intended to be in, contact and shall be securely wired or, if approved, spot
welded thereto.
Reinforcement shall be lapped, joined or spliced only at the positions
described. Splices and the like found to be necessary elsewhere shall be
formed only if and as instructed.
Immediately before concreting, the reinforcement shall be checked for
position, clean lines, freedom from rust, or retarding liquid. Means shall be
taken to ensure that reinforcement remains correctly in position with required
cover during the placing and consolidating of the concrete.
Reinforcement projecting from work being concreted or already
concreted shall not be bend out of its correct position for any reason unless
approved: and shall be protected. from deformation or other damage.
Reinforcement left projecting for bending with future extensions shall be
thoroughly coated with cement grout wash or encased in concrete or
otherwise protected from corrosion as instructed.

9.

Cover of Concrete and spacing of Bars: Unless otherwise described the cover
of concrete over the reinforcement shall be as follows:
Internal Works : Horizontal, vertical , or inclined slabs, all bars 13mm or the
size of the bars or wires whichever is greater.
Beams: Main bars, 25 mm or the size of the main bars whichever is greater.
Binders and the like 13 mm minimum.
Columns: For a longitudinal bar in a column not less than 40 mm nor less
than the diameter of such rod. In case of columns of minimum dimension of
20 cm or under whose reinforcing bars do not exceed 13 mm, a cover of 25
mm may be used.
Vol. II / 12

10.

Construction of Shuttering:
i)

Centering and shuttering for all R.C.C. structural works, viz. R.C.C.
columns, Beam sides & Bottom shall be done neatly with 12 mm thick
marine plywood fixed to angle iron framing.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

ii)

For all other flat surfaces of RCC work including slabs, staircase,
flights, etc., steel shuttering (either newly fabricated or in good
condition) or marine plywood shall be used.

iii)

Shuttering for Pile Caps and .foundation and other concealed work
may be done with timber.

iv)

All joints, except as hereinafter specified shall be sufficiently tight to

prevent leakage of cement grout and to avoid the formation of fine or
other blemishes, and all faulty joints shall be chalked. Opening for
inspection of the inside of the beams, wall, columns and similar
shuttering and .for the escape of wash water shall be formed so that
they can be conveniently closed before commencing to place the
concrete.
.

v)

Connections shall be constructed to permit easy removal of the

shuttering and also retain the correct shape during consolidating of the
concrete by tamping, ramming, vibrating, other means. Bolts or clamps
shall be used in preference to wire ties, bolt holes in the concrete shall
be made good after removal of bolts. If wire ties be approved, the ends
shall be concealed and measures taken up prevent rust strains on the
concrete .face.

vi)
11.

12.

No shuttering shall be provided to concrete faces, where the slope

exceeds 1 in 2-1/2, such shutters shall be counter weighted or
otherwise anchored against floating:
Erection of Shuttering & Scaffolding: Shuttering shall be created true line and
braced and strutted to prevent deformation under the heightened pressure,
and other forces. The deflection shall not exceed 3 mm. Beams Soffits shall
be Erected with an upward camber of 6 mm for each 3 m of horizontal span. If
so instructed calculations and designs of the shuttering shall be submitted for
approval before construction.
The Scaffolding shall consist of steel tubular Scaffolding, props of
screw type of any reputed make, viz. ACROW or equivalent. For minor works,
wooden ballies can be used.
Column boxes, if erected to the full height of the columns, shall have
one side which shall be built up in sections as placing of concrete proceeds.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining
sufficiently strong scaffolding so as to withstand all loads, likely to cane upon
it. Also the safety and adequacy of centering and scaffolding shall be the sole
Vol. II / 13
responsibility of the contractor. If at any stage of work during or after
placing concrete in structure the form work sags or slugs or gives way the
concrete shall be removed and work redone at contractors risk and cost.
COATING FOR SHUTTERING

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
All faces of shuttering and moulds in contact with wet concrete shall be
treated with oil or/other approved coating to prevent adherence of concrete.
Such coaling shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, and not injurious to the
concrete, and shall not become flaky nor 'be removable by rain or wash water.
Liquids that retard the setting of cement shell only be applied to the shuttering
when described or instructed. Mould oils, retarding liquids, and similar
coatings shall be kept away from contact with the reinforcement.
Tolerances : Workmanship - for dimensions, levels, sizes, positions and
covers.
(1)

For layout positions or dimensions horizontal or vertical

(2)

Level of floors, beams and lintels surface intended to be

horizontal must not slope more than, in 10' 0

(3)

Fore-cover of concrete around reinforcement 1/8"

(4)

For sizes of beams or columns or wall thickness not less than

specified or not more than 1/2". In case lessor sections of
concrete members are acceptable payments shall be made only
for the actual section thus executed.

1.3

MEASUREMENT AND PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE MATERIALS

14.

The aggregate shall be measured by volume in a gauge box of correct and

approved site based on the weight of the materials or by other approved
accurate means. The gauge box or, other containers shall be filled with the
aggregate without compacting to a predetermined uniform depth, accurate
allowance being, made for building due to moisture content of the fine
aggregate.
The cement shall be measured by weight one or more complete bags
containing 50 kgs being used for a single batch of concrete and the size of
the mixer shall permit to be done.
PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE
Proportioning and work control :
The determination of proportions of cement, aggregates and water to
attain required strength shall be made by one of the following:
(a)

With preliminary test for concrete of "Controlled Quality".

(b)

Without preliminary that by adopting nominal concrete mixes for

"Ordinary Concrete".
Vol. II / 14

Strength requirement of concrete:

Where ordinary portland cement conforming to IS : 269-1958 or Portland
blast-furnace slag cement conforming to IS : 455-1962 is used, the compressive
strength requirements for various grades of concrete shall be as given in Table 2.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
where rapid hardening Portland Cement is used, the 28 day compressive strength
requirements specified in Table 2 shall be met at 7 days. Where other cements are
used, the Engineer-in-Charge" specify tile corresponding requirements preferably on
the basis of preliminary tests.
The strength requirements specified in Table 2 shall apply to both controlled
concrete and ordinary concrete. Preliminary tests need not, however, be made in the
case of ordinary concrete.
In order to get a relatively quicket idea of quality of concrete, optional works
tests on beams for modulus of rupture at 72 - 2 hours or at 7 days, or compressive
strength tests at 7 days may be carried out in addition to 28 days compressive
strength tests. In all cases, the 28 days compressive strength specified in Table 2
shall along be the criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete. If, however,
from tests carried out in a particular job over a reasonably long period, it has been
established to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that a suitable ratio
between the+28 days compressive strength and the modulus of rupture at 72 2
hours or 7 days or compressive strength at 7 days may be accepted, the Engineerin-Chief may suitably relax the frequency of 28 days compressive strength test
specified in Table 2, provided the expected strength values at the specified
early age are consistently met. For this purpose the values given in Table 1 may be
taken for general guidance in the case of concrete made without ordinary cement.

Vol. II / 15

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

TABLE - A
OPTIONAL WORKS TEST REQUIREMENT OF CONCRETE
(All values in Kgs/ cm2)
Grade
of
Compressive
Strength Modulus of rupture by beams test, Min
Concrete on 15-cm Cubes, Min
At 7 days
At 72 + 2 hr.
At 7 days
1
2
3
4
M
100
70
12
17
M
150
100
15
21
M
200
135
17
24
M
250
170
19
27
M
300
200
21
30
M
350
235
23
32
M
400
270
25
34
Note : 2 and 3 under Table 1 are also applicable to Table 2.
Concrete of Controlled Quality :
Concrete of controlled quality shall be used on all concrete works. These shall be in
grades M-100, M-150, M-200, M-250, M-300 and M-350.
The concrete mix shall be designed to have an average strength
corresponding to values specified for preliminary test given in Table-2 for strength
requirements of concrete.
The maximum total quantity of aggregate by weight per 50 Kg. of cement
shall not exceed 450 Kg. except where otherwise specifically permitted by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge
that supply of properly graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintained over
the period or work, the grading of aggregate should be controlled by obtaining the
coarse aggregate in different sizes and blending them in the right proportions when
required, the different sizes being stocked in separate stock piles. The materials
should be stock-piled for several hours preferably a day before use. The grading of
coarse and fine aggregate should be checked as frequently as possible, the
frequency for as given job being determined by the Engineer-in-Charge to ensure
that the contractor is maintaining the grading uniform with that of the samples used
in the preliminary tests.
In proportioning concrete, the quantity of both cement and aggregate should
be determined by weight. Where the weight of cement is determined by accepting
the maker's weigh per bag, a reasonable number of bags should be Weighed
separately to check the net weight. Where the cement is weighed on the site and not
in bags it should be weighed separately from aggregate . Water should be either
measured by volume in calibrated tanks or weighed. All measuring equipment
should be maintained in a clean serviceable condition and their accuracy periodically
checked.
Vol. II / 16
The water-cement ratio constant shall be maintained by the Contractor at its
correct value. To this end, determination of moisture contents in both fine and coarse
aggregates should be made as frequently as possible the frequency for a given job
being determined by the Engineer-in-Charge according to weather conditions. The

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
amount of the added water should be adjusted to compensate for any observed
variations in the moisture contents. For the determination of moisture content in the
aggregates, IS 2386 (Pert III) - 1968 Methods of Test for Aggregate for Concrete:
Part III specific gravity, density voids, absorption and bulking may be referred to. To
allow for the variation in weight of aggregate due to variation in their moisture
content, suitable adjustments in the weights of aggregates should also be made.
No substitution in materials used on the work or altercation in the established
proportions, except as permitted in the above clause shall be made without
additional tests to show that the quality and strength of concrete are satisfactory.
Strength requirements of concrete:
The compressive strength requirements for various grades of concrete shall
be as given in table below :

Vol. II / 17
TABLE 2
STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS OF CONCRETE
(All values in Kg/cm2 )

Sen & Lall

Grade of Concrete

1
M
100
M
150
M
200
M
250
M
300
M
350
M
400
Preliminary Test

Compressive strength of

Spec/Tender doc.
15-cm cubes at 28 days in

after mixing, conducted

accordance with

IS:516-1959
2
135
200
260
320
380
440
500

3
100
150
200
250
300
350
400

The contractor may be called upon to submit representative samples of

materials to be used for Concrete in order that they may be tested at recognized
laboratory and the suitability of materials established. These test are to be carried
out in accordance with IS 456-1978. All expenses in connection with the above
mentioned tests shall be borne by the Contractor ;

Vol. II / 18

During the progress of the work 15 cm cubes shall be made as stated in TABLE 3 below and tested in accordance with 436-1996.
The Contractor shall keep a record of all such tests identifying them with the portion of the work to which they relate. The maximum
total quantity of aggregate by weight per 50 Kg of cement shall not exceed 450 Kg. OR
The minimum cement consumption .

M-200
M-150
M-250
M-300

TABLE : 3

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR CONCRETE

(For all grades of concrete)

Minimum no. of Specimens

from each Batch (cubes)
7
days
compressive
strength test
as an optional
test if desired

28
days
compressive
strength test

1
5

2
5

Minimum
Frequency

3
For
each
Batch with a
minimum of
three
batches

Criteria
for
acceptance

4
Accept
if
average
compressive
strength of the
specimen
tested is not
less then the
compressive

strength
specified

in

Minimum No. of specification taken from the same

Days work
CUBES
BEAMS
7
days 28
days 722
7 days
compressive
compressive
hr.s test test as
strength test strength test.
an
an
as an optional
optional
optional
test, if desired
if
test,
if test,
desired
desired
5
6
7
8
3
3
3
3

Minimum Frequency
In terms
of
the
quantity
of
concrete

In terms
of period

9
For every
1000 cft
of
concrete
or
part
thereof

10
As such
intervals
as
the
Engineerin-charge
may
decided.

Vol.II / 19
However
in
the

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Table,
(for
optional tests
see
Table)
subject to the
condition that
only one out
of
five
consecutive
tests
may
give a value
less than the
specified
strength.

10

For
each
batch with a
minimum of
three
batches

Accept
if
average
compressive
strength
of
the
specimens
tested is not
less than the
compressive
strength
specified in
Table subject
to
the
condition that
the average

case
of
controlled
concrete
samples
shall
be
drawn on
each day,
for
the
first four
days
of
concreting
and there
after
atleast,
once
in
seven
days
of
concreting
.
5

For every
1000 cft.
Of
concrete
or
part
thereof.

As such
intervals
as
the
Engineerin-charge
may
decided.
However,
in
the
case
of
controlled
concrete
samples
shall
be
drawn ion

Vol.II / 20
compressive
strength shall
be more than

each day
for the first
four days

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

the specified
compressive
strength
in
Table
by
atleast
the
value of the
standard
deviation
of
the series of
tests.

of
concreting
and
thereafter
atleast
once
in
seven days
of
concreting.

Standard
Deviation =

d2
n-1
where d = individual deviation from the average; and
n = number of specimens tested.
Table : 3 (continued)
____________________________________________
Criteria for acceptance
____________________________________________
11
_____________________________________________
Accept if average strength of the specimen tested is not less than the
strength specified in Table (for optional tests see Table) subject to the
condition that only one out of three consecutive tests may give a value
less than at the specified strength but this shall not be less than 90 per
cent of the specified strength.
OR
Accept if average strength of the specimens tested is not less than the
strength specified in Table (for optional test see Table) subject to the
condition that one out of five consecutive tests may give a value less than
the specified strength.
Vol.II. / 21

All the cubes shall be taken and tested in the presence of the Engineer-in-Charge
Contractor shall install the testing machine at site and the testing machine shall be in
the custody of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall be responsible for
calibrating this machine once in two months. All expense in connection with above
shall be borne by the Contractor. When the strength of cubes taken during the
progress of the work in below the specified strength (table for strength requirements
of concrete). Such concrete shall be classified as lower grade concrete and the
following recovery shall be made from the Contractor, the works test cubes shall be
tested at recognized laboratories and the results so obtained shall be binding upon
the Contractor. All expenses incurred in the above tests shall be borne by the
contractor.
(1)

If the strength of cubes line below and between 100 and 90% of specified
strength the rate of concrete shall be reduced by 10%.

(2)

'

If the strength of cubes lies below and between and within 90 to 80% of
concrete strength the rate of the concrete shall be reduced by 25%.

(3)

If the strength lies below 80% the Contractor shall take out such concrete and
redo work at his risk and cost. The shuttering done for such concrete required
to be dismantled for shall not be measured.

ORDINARY CONCRETE:
Where it is considered not practicable to use controlled concrete, ordinary
concrete may be used for concrete of grades M-100, M-150, M-200 and M-250. The
proportions of materials for nominal concrete mixes for ordinary concrete shall be in
accordance with Table-III.
In proportioning concrete, the quantity of cement should be determined by
weight. The quantities of fine and coarse aggregates may be determined by volume,
but these should also preferably be determined by weight. In the latter case the
weight should be determined from the volume specified in Table-III and the weight
per Iitre of dry aggregate. If fine aggregate is moist and volume batching is adopted,
allowance shall be made for bulking in accordance with IS :2386 (Part III) 1963.
Vol.II / 22

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
TABLE - III
CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONS

Grade of Concrete

M
M
M

1
100
150
200

250

Note 1

ORDINARY CONCRETE
Total quantity of dry Proportion of fine
aggregates
by aggregate to coarse
volume per 50 Kg. Of aggregate
cement to be taken
as the sum of the
individual volumes of
fine
and
coarse
Aggregates Max.
2
3
300
Generally 1:2 for fine
220
Aggregate to coarse
160
Aggregate to volume
but
100
Subject to a upper
limit of 1:1 and in
lower limit of 1:3

Quantity
of
water per 50
Kg. Of cement
Max.

4
34
32
30
27

The proportions of the aggregates should be adjusted from upper limit

to lower limit progressively as the grading of the line aggregates
becomes finer and the maximum size of coarse aggregates becomes
larger.

Example :

For an average grading of fine aggregate (that is Zone II of IS : 3831963) the proportions shall be 1:1, 1:2 and 1:3 for maximum size of
aggregate 10mm, 20mm and 40mm respectively.

Note 2

It may be noted for general guidance that M-100, M-150, M-200 of

ordinary concrete correspond approximately to 1:3:6, 1:2:4, 1:1:3 and
1:1:2 nominal mixes of ordinary concrete currently used in the country.

The water-cement ratios shall be not more than those specified in Table III.
The cement of the mix specified in Table III for any nominal mix be increased
if the quantity of water in a mix has to be increased to overcome the difficulties of
placement and compaction, so that the water-cement ratio specified in Table III is not
exceeded.
Vol.II / 23

Sen & Lall

Note 1 :

Spec/Tender doc.
In the case of vibrated concrete the limit specified may be suitably
reduced to avoid aggregation.

Note 2 :

The quantity of water used in the concrete mix for reinforced concrete
mix for reinforced concrete work should be sufficient, but not more than
sufficient to produce a dense concrete of adequate workability for its
purpose, which will surround and properly grip all the reinforcement.
Workability of the concrete should be controlled by maintaining a water
cement ratio that is found to give a concrete which is just sufficiently
wet to be placed and compacted without difficulty with the means
available.

Workability of the concrete should be controlled by direct measurement of

water content, making allowance for any surface water in the fine and coarse
aggregate. The slump test in accordance with IS : 1199-1959 may be used as a
guide.
Allowance should be made for surface water present in the aggregate when
computing the water content. Surface water shall be determined by one of the field
methods described in IS : 2386 (Part III) 1963. In the absence of exact data, the
amount of surface water may be estimated from the values given in the Table IV.
TABLE - IV
SURFACE WATER CARRIED BY AVERAGE AGGREGATE
Aggregate
1
Very wet sand

Approximate quantity of surface water

2
1/m2
120

80
Moderately wet sand moist sand
40
* Coarser the aggregate, less the water it will carry.

Vol. II / 24
If ordinary concrete made in accordance with the proportions given for a
particular grade not yield the specified strength due to proper qualities of materials
not being available, such concrete shall be classified as belonging to the appropriate

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

lower grade. Ordinary concrete proportioned for a given grade in accordance with
Table III shall not, however, be placed in a higher grade on the ground that the test
strengths are higher than the minimum specified.
15.

CONSISTENCY OF CONCRETE:
Only sufficient water shall be added to the cement and aggregate during

mixing to produce a mixture of sufficient workability to enable it to be well

consolidated, to be worked into the corners of the shuttering and around the
reinforcement to give the specified surface finish and to have specified strength.
If difficulty be experienced in placing the concrete of specified mix and
approved consistency between and below the reinforcement bars in the bottom of
beams and similar units, the bar shall be embedded in contract of improved
workability by increasing the proportion of cement by an approved amount and using
aggregate of approved similar maximum size then specified for which nothing extra
shall be paid. Whenever it is not possible to concrete the full height of the columns
in one operation at least 1st ft. depth of the upper height of the column when
concrete at a later stage shall be concreted with a richer mix next higher to the mix
specified for member. This also applied to the top part of the column to be concreted
along with the roof beam or slab. However, nothing extra shall be admissible for this
and the contractor is deemed to have taken into account the excess cost involved in
the complying to this at the time of quoting his/their rates for the item.

Vol.II / 25
16.

MEASUREMENT OF CONSISTENCY :

The consistency shall be determined by making trial mixture with dried aggregates,
or when so instructed by laboratory made test cubes as hereinafter specified. The

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

consistency of the trial mixture of approved consistency shall be measured as

instructed. The slump of the approved trial mixture shall be measured and this slump
shall not be exceeded throughout all batches of concrete made from the same
materials mixed in the same proportions as the trial mixture and used in those parts
of the works as instructed. In no case, however, shall slump exceed 50 mm for
concrete in slabs, or exceed 25 mm tor concrete consolidated by mechanical
variation. The slump test shall be made on concrete actually being placed in the
works at the commencement of each period of concrete placing and at such other
times as instructed.
The apparatus for the slump test shall be a standard one. When the cone is
filed, it shall be raised vertically clear of the concrete and the measurement of the
slump shall be 300 mm minus the height of the slumped cone of concrete. Care shall
be taken to prevent vibration of the sample being tested.
Concrete Mixing :
As far as possible, controlled concrete should he used on all concrete works. The
cement and aggregate shall be thoroughly mixed together in the specified proportion
in a batch-type mechanical mixer, unless another type of mixer is approved. The
water shall be admitted to the drum of the mixer only when all the cement and
aggregate constituting one batch in the drum.
The concrete shall be mixed until the mixture is of uniform colour and in no
case for Iess than one minute. If the drum rotates at lowest speeds, the minimum
period shall he increased inversely proportional to that speed. The period of mixing
shall be measured from time to time when all the materials and water are in the
drum. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before materials for he
successding batch are fed into the drum. Materials spilled from the skip or other
container shall not be used. Neither partly set concrete should be mixed with the
additional of further water, nor shall excessively wet concrete stiffened by the
addition of cement or aggregate.
Vol.II / 26
17.

DISTRIBUTION OF CONCRETE :

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The concrete shall be distributed from the mixers to the position of placing in
the works by approved means that do not cause separation or otherwise
impair the quality of the concrete.
18.

PREPARATION FOR PLACING CONCRETE :

Before the concrete is placed the shuttering shall be turned up and any water
accumulated therein shall be removed. All saw dust, nails and debris shall be
washed out of otherwise removed from within the shuttering. The
reinforcement shall then be inspected for accuracy of fixing. Immediately
before placing the concrete the shuttering shall except in frosty weather, be
well wetted and inspection opening shall be closed.

19.

PLACING CONCRETE :
The interval between adding the water to the concrete and completion of the
concrete placing operation shall not exceed 25 minutes.
Except where otherwise for slabs and large sections of concrete shall
be placed in the shuttering by shovels or other approved implement sand
shall not be dropped from a height nor handed in a manner cause separation.
Accumulations of hardened concrete dropping on the reinforcement shall be
avoided. Concrete shall be placed directly in the permanent position and shall
not be worked along the shuttering to that position.
Each layer of concrete while being placed shall be consolidated by
approved methods of ramming, temping, or mechanical vibrations to form a
dense surface from honeycombing and tolerably free from water and air holes
or other blemishes. The concrete shall be tamped against the face of the
shuttering so as to produce a dense fair surfaces. The number and type of
mechanical vibrations, placing and consolidation of concrete shall be done in
such a manner as not to disturb concrete already placed, and reinforcement
projecting from concrete shall not be vibrated or jarred.

Vol.II / 27

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

For concreting reinforced concrete walls and other structure having least lateral
dimensions of 125 mm or under each layer of concrete while being placed shall be
properly consolidated by approved methods of mechanical vibrations produced by
internal or external mechanical vibrators.
Any water accumulating on the surface of the newly placed concrete shall be
removed by approved means and no further concrete shall be placed thereon until
such water be removed.
No unset concrete shall be brought into contact with unset concrete containing
cement of different type.
Unless otherwise approval or instructed , concrete shall be placed in single
operation to the full depth of slabs, beams and members similar thereto and shall be
placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 1 m deep in walls, columns and members
similar then to concrete shall be placed continuously until completion of the part of
the work between construction joint: as specified hereinafter or of a part of approved
extent. At the completion of a specified or approved part of a constructional joints of
a form and in the position hereinafter specified shall be made. If a temporary
cessation of concrete placing be unavoidable a construction joint shall likewise be
made.
20.

PLACING CONCRETE IN EXTREME WEATHER :

Work shall be done according to clause 20.01.6 of IS 456 of 1964.

21.

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS :
Construction joint shall be made in position hereinafter specified or elsewhere
as approved. Such joints shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may
be, except that in an inclined or curved member the joint shall he strictly at
right angles to the axis of the member. Construction joints shall he rebated to
an approved profile, and where described an approved metal tongue shall be
inserted in the joints. No extra shall be paid for this.

Vol.II / 28

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Construction joints shall be made horizontally at the top of the

foundations and horizontally 7 cm. below the lowest beam so fit at the head of
columns. Concrete in the ribs and slabs of small thickness and all beams
shall be placed in one operation, but for large beams concrete in the rib upto
a level 25 mm below the slab so fit shall be placed first. Concrete in haunches
or splays on beams or braces and concrete in the head of adjoining portion of
the columns shall be placed at the same time as that in the slab. Construction
joints in the length of a beam shall be avoided where practicable, but where
joints are unavoidable they shall be made as previously approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Construction joints in slabs shall be made parallel to the
main reinforcement they shall be made a place as previously approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Before placing new concrete against concrete already set, place of the
old concrete shall be cleaned and acum removed. The face shall be
roughened and any loose aggregate removed the reform. Immediately before
placing the new concrete the face of the old concrete shall be thoroughly
wetted and a coating of neat cement grout applied. The new concrete shall be
well rammed against the prepared face before the grout sets.
22.

CURING AND PROTECTION OF CONCRETE :

Newly placed concrete Shall be tested from rain and during hot, dry or windy
weather. Approved coverings shall be used to prevent premature drying out.
All exposed faces of concrete shall be kept moist by approved means for
fifteen days after placing or for three days if rapid hardening Portland cement
be used.
Concrete in foundation and other under-ground work shall be protected
from admixture with falling earth during and after placing. Concrete placed in
ground containing deleterious sets shall be kept free from contact with such
water during placing and for a period of three days thereafter. The ground
water around basements, underground tank, and similar construction shall be
kept down to an approved level by pumping, or the works shall be flooded or
other approved means taken to prevent floatation.
Slabs, stairs, and other work shall be protected from damage from
workmen, equipment, overloaded or any other cause.

Vol.II / 29
23.

REMOVAL OF SHUTTERING:

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Shuttering shall be removed by gradual casing without jarring and only in the
presence of a supervisor. Before removal of the shuttering the concrete shall
be examined and removal shall be proceed if the concrete has attained
sufficient strength to supports its own weight and any loading in excess of the
design load be anticipated approved props shall be provided after removal of
the shuttering. The contractor shall record on the drawings or elsewhere the
date on which each part of the work is concreted and the date on which
shuttering is removed.
Notwithstanding any limitations of other requirements of this
specification relating to the period elapsing between placing concrete and
removing shuttering, the assessment of such period and any damage of other
consequences arising there from shall be the contractors entire responsibility.
The period shall be increased by an approved number of days for the
hardening of the concrete is delayed due to low temperatures or other
causes. The periods shall likewise be increased for concrete mixtures with
high water content, .for heavy sections, and for high ratios of dead load to
total design load.. For beam or similar members the period shall be increased
by one day or every 6 m or span in excess of 6 m.
24.

STRIPPING TIME :
In no circumstances shall forms be struck until, the concrete reaches a
strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at
the time of striking.
The strength referred to shall be that of concrete using the same
cement and aggregate, with the same proportions and cured under conditions
of temperatures and moisture similar to those existing on the work. Where
possible, the form work should be left longer, as it would assist the curing.
In normal circumstances generally where temperatures are above 20o
C) and where ordinary cement issued, forms may be struck after expiry of
following periods.
(a)
Walls, columns and vertical
24 to 48 hrs as may be
sides of beams..
decided by the Engineerin-Chief.
(b)
Slabs (props left under)
3 days.
(c)
Beam so fits (props left under)
7 days.
(d)
Removing of props to slabs
(i) Spanning upto 4.5 m
10 days
(ii) Spanning over 4.5 m
14 days
(e)
Removal of props to beams
and arches
(i) Spanning up to 6 m
14 days
(ii) Spanning over 6 m
21 days

Vol.II / 30
25.

FINISHES:

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Honeycombed surface shall be made good immediately upon removal of the

shuttering and superficial water and air holes shall be filled. Unless instructed
to the contrary, the face of exposed concrete placed against shuttering, shall
after removal of the shuttering, be rubbed with corborundum stone with
cement grout lubricant or similar to remove fine and other irregularities. This,
however, is not a substitution for plaster, which may be required to be carried
out for purpose of finishing.

The surface of non-shutting faces of concrete work other than slabs

shall be smoothed with a wooden fleet (or if approved with a steel trowel) to
give a finish equal to that of rubbed down shuttered faces.
Concealed concrete faces shall be left from the shuttering except that
honeycombed surfaces shall be made good.
The top faces of slabs not intended to be surfaced shall be levelled
and floated to a smooth finish at the levels of falls shown in the drawings or
elsewhere. The floating shall not be executed to the extent of brining excess
fine material to the surface.
Ribbed surfaces of slabs shall, where instructed, be formed at the time
of temping and levelling. Indentations in slab or stair surface shall be formed
by approved implements giving the depth and patterns instructed.
The top face of slabs intended to be covered with screen, granolithic or
similar surfacing shall be left with speld finish.
The soffits of slabs and faces of walls intended to be rendered shall be
roughened by approved means to form a key.
Concrete surfaces to take finished other than these specifically
referred to herein shall be prepared to an approved manner so suit the finish
as instructed.

Vol.II / 31
26.

TESTS OF STRUCTURE :

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The Engineer shall instruct that a loading test be made on the works or any
part thereof if in his opinion such a test be deemed necessary for one of the
following reasons:
(a)

The site-made concrete tests cubes failing to attain the specified

strength.

(b)

Over loading, during construction of the work or part thereof.

(c)

The shuttering being prematurely removed.

(d)

Concrete improperly cured.

(e)

Any other circumstances attributable to alleged negligence on the part

of the contractor which in the opinion of the Engineer may result in the
opinion of the works or part thereof being less than the expected
strength.

(f)

Any reason other than the foregoing.

If the loading test be instructed to be made solely or in part for the reason (a)

the test shall he made at the contractor's own cost.

If .the test be instructed to be made for one or more at the reasons.

(b)

inclusive the contractor shall be reimbursed for the to cost of the test if
the result thereof be satisfactory

(c)

if the test instructed to be mode for the reason.

(d)

the contractor shall make the rest and shall be reimbursed for the all
cost relating thereof irrespective of the result of the test.
For the purpose of a loading test on floors, roofs and similar structures

and their supports a test load shall be equivalent to 1 time the superimposed load for which the works or part thereof to be tested has been
designed. The test load shall not be applied within 84 days (or 28 days if rapid
hardening Portland cement be used) of the completing of placing at the
concrete in the part of the works to be tested, and the latter shall not be
supported during the test by shuttering or other non-permanent support.
Means shall be taken to ensure that in the event of a failure under the test,
temporary support of the loaded member shall be immediately available. The
test shall proceed strictly as instructed.
Vol.II / 32

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
For the loading test on floors, roofs or similar, structure the result shall

be deemed satisfactory if upon removal of the test load and residual

deflection does not exceed one quarter of the maximum deflection after 24
hours loading. If the residual deflection exceeds, this amount the test loading
shall be repeated, and the result shall be deemed to be satisfactory if the
residual deflection after removal of the second test load does not exceed onequarter of the maximum deflection accruing during the second test.
If the result of the loading test be not satisfactory the Engineer shall
instruct that part of the works concerned shall be taken down or removed and
reconstructed to comply with this specification, or such other remedial
measures shall be taken as to make the works secure. If the test be
instructed to be made for one or more of the reasons (a) to (c) inclusive as
herein be force specified the contractor shall take down or remove and
reconstruct the defective worker shall take the remedial measure instructed
all at his own cost.
26.

VIBRATION:
(i)

Appearance: The concrete that is to be compacted by vibration should

appear anything from earth dry to slightly glistening. The mix should
have the appearance of lacking in fines.

(ii)

Placing : Segregation is likely to take place then the concrete is tipped

into the form work and this should be avoided. The concrete mix
should not contain surplus water and which will develop segregation
under influence of vibrator compaction. The distribution of new
concrete should be uniform for the whole section and the surface kept
horizontal the whole time thus ensuring that the movement of a
concrete is downward only. Vibrators should not be used as a
sprending or distributing agent.

(iii)

Vibrator shall be of rotary out of balance immersion type or the electromagnetic type and operate at a frequency of not less than 4,000 cycles
per minute. The vibration shall be of such a power in put as to produce
an accelerating of 4f to 10f/sec 2

in the mass of the compacted

concrete. The vibrators shall be designed for continuous operation.

Vol.II / 33

Sen & Lall

(iv)

Spec/Tender doc.
Disposition of vibrator: Internal vibrators shall be disposed within the
mix, when placed, so as to maintain the whole of the concrete under
treatment in adequate stage of agitation such that description and
effective compaction may be attained at a rate commensurate with the
supply of concrete from the mixers. Insertion of vibrators at about 18"
centre to centre is considered sufficient. .

(v)

Period of vibration: Vibration shall continue during the whole period

occupied by placing the concrete the vibrators being adjusted so that
the centre of vibrators being adjusted so that the centre vibration
approximates to centre of the mass being compacted at the time of
placing the concrete to should not be over vibrated the period of
insertion of internal vibrator should not be about 15 seconds at any one
points.

(vi)

Compactness: The concrete shall be judged to be compacted when

the mortar fills the Spaces between coarse aggregate so as to form a
glistening and even surface except for slight irregularities where the
coarse aggregate breaks this smooth surface. When the conditions
has been attained, the vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly.

(vii)

The vibrator must not be placed against the steel or the shuttering the
minimum distance being 3. The compressor must be placed in such a
position that shuttering, reinforcement and recently laid concrete are
subjected to the minimum amount of vibration.

27.

MEASUREMENT :
(i)

Reinforcement :

As given in clause 3. (vi). However, if specifically

stated in the schedule, reinforcement may be
included in the concrete item.

(ii)

Concrete :

Concrete in different members shall be measured

as specified in para 41 of general specification
inclusive of all shuttering protection work and
curing complete.
Vol.II / 34

Sen & Lall

Notes:

Spec/Tender doc.
If the contractor possesses the necessary facilities, he should be

allowed to use to designed mix with quality control.

28.

INSERTS :
No cutting or patching of structural concrete shall be allowed. The contractor

shall accurately form or leave holes of dimensions required. Inserts of any kind like
fan hooks, sleaves, pipes, bolts are to be accurately placed in position before
concreting. No extra payment will be made for positioning of inserts.

Vol.II / 35

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
MATERIALS

Sen & Lall

2.

Spec/Tender doc.

Specification For Materials

2.1

Water : All arrangement to obtain and distribute water at site and sheds
shall be made by the contractor in an approved manner at his own cost.
Water shall be from authority pipes or through tubeweIl. The Employer
does not guarantee the supply of water. Water used will be subjected to tests
and will be allowed to be used only when it will be free from impurities and fit
enough for purposes of construction.

2.2

(i)

Lime :

Lime shall be from lime stone from approved sources and

burnt properly and shall conform to IS 712-1956. Class B Lime, if permitted,

shall be used in mortar for brick work and lime concrete and class C lime shall
be used in plastering and white washing. In case of quick lime, this shall be
slaked at site as described below If instructed by the Architect lime samples
shall be got tested from time to time by the Contractor as described in IS :
712 and all costs for such tests shall be borne by the contractor.
(ii)

Slaking : Initial slaking of lime shall be done on masonry platform. The

fresh lime (quick lime) shall be spread on the platform in layers of 9" (22.
5cm) while doing this under burnt lumps of stone shall be segregated. The
water shall be gradually sprinkled on the layers till the lumps are reduced to
the powder. The slaked lime shall be screened through 1/8" screens and the
residue which does not pass through the screen shall be rejected. Slaked
lime thus obtained shall not be used for at least 3 days.
(iii)

Lime Putty : Slaked lime shall be dumped into a masonry lined tank

having sufficient water and shall be stirred vigorously by using bamboo sticks
and heavier matter allowed to settle. The lime in a state of suspension shall
then be allowed to flow to another tank at a lower level and kept standing for
some time in water a t least 3" (7.5 cms). After this watering porayes the
paste thus obtained will be used as lime putty.
Vol.II / 36

Sen & Lall

2.3

Spec/Tender doc.

Earth: For filling shall be free from all rubbish organic or vegetable growth
including roots, weeds, etc. All cods shall be first broken down and only
approved type of earth shall be used.

2.4

Fine Aggregate : Sand shall conform to IS : 383 and relevant portion of IS :

515. It shall pass through a I.S. Sieve 4.75 mm (3/16 B. S) test sieve , leaving
a residue not more than 5% . It shall be from natural source crushed stone
screenings, if allowed, chemically inert, clean, sharp, hard, durable, well
graded and free from dust, clay, shale, large pebbles, salt, organic matter,
loam, mica or other deleterious matter. The sum of percentages of all
deleterious materials in sand shall not exceed 5% by weight. It shall be
washed if directed to reduce the percentage of deleterious substance to
acceptable limits. Sand shall hot contain any trace of salt and it shall be
tested and sand containing any trace of salt shall be rejected.
The fine aggregate for concrete shall be graded within limits as
specified in IS : 383 and the Fineness Modulus may range between 2.60 to
3.20. The fineness modules of fine aggregate for plaster work may range
between 1.8 to 2.6.

2.5

Portland Cement : Cement shall comply with the I.S.. : 269 or I.S. 455
standard. Specification and shall be of Indian or other make to be approved
by the Architects. When in bags, they 'shall be raised 12" (30 cm) above the
ground and stacked in rows of 10 bags high, 0.6 m clear from the wall. Stocks
of cement in bags, received at different periods, shall be stacked such that
such stocks can be identified easily. Cement shall be used in works in the
order of receipt. The Contractor shall maintain at site a Register of cement
receipt and consumption register which would indicate all information
regarding

the receipt issued and consumption details. Cement from loose

bags torn, bags, swept off cement shall not be used in work. If required by the
Architects, the Contractor shall get the cement tested at his own cost at an
approved place.
Vol.II / 37

Sen & Lall

2.6

Spec/Tender doc.

Stone : Stone for rubble masonry shall be of the best of its kind, strong,
angular from flanks and quality approved by the Architects. No earthy or
discoloured, weathered or water work stone shall be used.
Stones for stone masonry shall be of the specified size. It shall be
hard, sound durable free from decay and weathering.

2.7

Surkhi : Surkihi shall be made from well burnt bats. It shall be ground to pass
through 1/8" screen.

2.8

Mortars
(a)

Cement mortar: Cement mortar shall be in

proportion

specified

for

each type of work in the schedule. It shall be composed of portland cement

and sand. The ingredients shall be accurately gauged by measure and care
shall be taken not to add more water than what is required. No mortar that
has begun to set shall be used. River sand of approved specification shall be
used unless otherwise specified.
If hand mixing is allowed, then it shall be done in brick tanks. The
gauged materials shall be put in the tank and mixed dry. Water will then be
added and the whole mixed again until it is homogeneous and of uniform
colour. Not more than one bag of cement shall be mixed at one time and
which can be consumed within half an hour of its mixing.
(b)

Lime Surkhi Mortar : Lime and surkhi shall be as specified. It shall be

composed of improved lime putty and surkhi proportion of 1 lime to 12 surkhi

by measure and shall be well and mixed together on a platform and water
added to make it homogeneous.
2.9

Aggregate : (See also specification for R.C.C. Works).

(i)

Aggregate shall be broken from hard over burnt brick bats or stone to
size as specified under individual item of work. In general, 40 mm
maximum gauge aggregate shall be used for R.C.C. work properly
graded. Stone chips will be of approved quality.
Vol.II / 38

Sen & Lall

(ii)

Spec/Tender doc.

Grading of aggregate - 40 mm gauge: The grading shall be such that

not more than 53% shall exceed 40 mm and not less than 25% smaller
than 20 mm. No piece shall in any case be larger than 45 mm. It shall
be screened free from dust or other foreign materials.
20 mm nominal gauge :

It shall be as given in R.C.C. specification. If

proper gauge of aggregate is not being obtained, seiving may be

insisted upon in which case the contractor shall supply the necessary
seive and labour at his own the cost.
2.10

Bricks : Bricks shall be kiln burnt best quality locally available arid sand
moulded approved quality, free from grit and other deleterious salts, well burnt
copper coloured, sound hard square with mallet they shall be of uniform size.
No brick after 24 hours immersion in water shall absorb more than 15% of its
weight. Bricks used shall be best available local bricks and shall conform to
latest specification of Indian Standard No. 1077-1970. Minimum strength of
bricks shall conform class designation 100 A.

2.11

Scaffolding: Scaffolding shall consist of Steel Scaffolding and Steel plates /

only Steel and Ply boards Shuttering boards .All the scaffolding members
before installation shall be checked for their strength and stiffness and tied up
properly. Planks shall be fixed and tied together. In case of finishing work,
such as, plastering, painting and distempering no part of the scaffolding
should touch the structure. Where ladders are used, gunny bags shall be tied
up at the ends to prevent any damage to work by sliding up tipping. Use of
single or double scaffolding shall be as per E/I.C. decision. No extra for use of
any particular type of scaffolding shall be allowed.

Vol.II / 39

Sen & Lall

2.12

Spec/Tender doc.

Timber : Timber shall be well seasoned and of the best quality heart wood of
specified species. Timber shall be considered" as well seasoned, if its
moisture content does not exceed the following limits:
i)

Timber for frames - 14%

ii)

"Timber for planking, shutters etc 12%

The moisture content of timber shall be determined according to

method described in paragraph 4 of IS : 287 for maximum permissible

moisture content of timber used. for different purposes in different climatic
zones.
A.

1st Class Indian Teak Wood

1st Class Indian Teak wood means C.P. and Bulsar teak of good quality and
well seasoned. It shall have uniform colour, reasonable straight grains and
shall be free from large, loose, dead knots, cracks, shakes, warp, twists,
bends, sapwood or defects of any kind. No individual hard and sound knot
shall be more than 2.5 cm in diameter and aggregate area of all. knots shall
not exceed 1% of the area of piece. There shall not be less than 5 growth
rings per 2.5 cm width.

B.

2nd Class Indian Teak Wood

Shall be similar to 1st class teak wood except that knot upto 4 cm diameter
and aggregate area of all knots upto 1.5% of the area of the piece shall be
allowed. There shall not be less than 4 growth rings per 2.5 cm width.

C.

Hard Wood
The timber selected shall comply with the requirements of I.S. 1003. The
timber shall be chemically treated under vacuum and high pressure as per
I.S. : 401 and kiln seasoned as per I.S. 1141. The moisture content shall be
within 8 to 14%.

Vol.II / 40

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

2.13. Wrought Iron-work: All wrought iron-work shall be of best kind and of the size
and shapes ordered. The iron-work shall be free from blisters and cracks and
shall be coated with a shop coat of anti-corrosive paint (as per detailed
specification). No iron-work of interior workmanship or quality shall be allowed
to used.
2.14

Mild Steel/Tor Steel / Tistrong : shall comply with the Indian Standard
Specification for constructional work. The surface shall be free from rust. All
steel shall be of Tata's or other approved Indian Manufacturer. Untested steel
shall not be used unless otherwise specified. The contractor will have to
produce test certificate for all steel brought to the site. If desired by the
Architects, samples taken out from the steel brought to the site will be tested
in the approved laboratory at the contractor cost. Mild steel conforming to I.S.:
432 - 1966 and Tor-steel conforming to I.S. 1786-1979.

2.15

Glass : Sheet or plate glass be approved Indian make (Hindustan Pilkington)

equivalent of the thickness as stated in the schedule of items and rates and
shall be visually clear when viewed from any direction. It shall be free from
bubbles, waves, specks, and other imperfections.

2.16

Steel Windows : Steel windows shall conform to the Indian Standard

Specification No.-IS : 1038 read in conjunction with IS:. 1080 and. 1081. They
may be side, top or centre hung, vertical or horizontally pivoted or fixed, and
of composite sizes as detailed on the drawings, jointed together side by side
or on top of one another by fabricated mullions (vertical coupling members)
as may be required and as specified by the Architects.
The size of the section shall be such as to be adequate for the specific
type shown on the drawings. The Contractor must include in his rate for
additional strengthening members for large sizes of windows and wherever
necessary. All sizes shown on the drawings are over all heights and widths of
the outside frames of steel windows. The sizes indicated on the drawings
shall not vary plus or minus 1.5 mm. Weather bar shall be used wherever
necessary. Steel windows shall be painted with a coat of approved steel
primer.
Vol.II / 41

Sen & Lall

(ii)

Spec/Tender doc.

Fabrication: Frames shall be square and flat orany other approved section.
Both the fixed and the opening frames shall be constructed of adequate
sections of specific type out to proper lengths, mitered and corners electrically
flash welded to a true right angle. Sub-dividing bars, where necessary, shall
be tightened and revetted to the frames.

(iii)

Side hung shutters: These may be left or right handed, as shown on the
drawing. Each shutter shall have two projecting steel hinges 67 mm wide with
brass pins seated and welded into slots cut in the frames Friction hinges if
specified shall conform to the working principles described in Indian Standard
Specification referred to above. Each shutter shall be provided with one brass
or pressed steel standard handle each with bolts mounted in steel plate
welded to the opening frame. The handle shall have two point nose which
shall engage a brass/steel striking plate provided on the fixed frame. Each
shutter shall have one steel peg stay arm 300 mm long and weighing not less
than 235 gms. (without cleat) having holes for keeping the shutters open in
three different positions. The peg and the locking bracket shall be welded to
the fixed frame and shutter respectively.

(iv)

Top hung shutters: Each shutter shall have two plain steel hinges with brass
pins, revetted or welded into the slot cut in the frame. The peg stay shall be
similar as per side hung shutters but 450 mm. long weighing not less than
340 grams, without cleat. The locking bracket shall be fixed to the frame.

2.17

Oil Paints plastic emulsion and primers: Those shall be only ready mixed
sealed tins of approved makes as specified.

2.18

Distemper and primers: These shall be either water bound or oil bound as
stated in the Schedule of items and rates. These shall be in powder form in
sealed drums and packages of approved manufacturers.

2.19

Cement paints: These shall be of approved make in sealed tins or packages

as specified.
Vol.II / 42

Sen & Lall

2.20

Spec/Tender doc.

Asbestos sheets and pipes: These shall be as manufactured by the Asbestos

Cement Co. The thickness and diameters shall be as stated in the schedule
and should be as per IS : 1626 - 1960.

2.21

G.I Pipes and fittings: All G.I. Pipes and fittings shall be of standard makes
according to IS : Code (IS: 1239-79) and IS: 1929-64 subject to the approval
of Architects, free from flews and the interior cleaned smooth. The weight of
all G.I. pipe when used in the Project should strictly conform to IS: 1239-1979.
and no other weight shall be accepted.

2.22

Special Materials: If materials of a particular or and a specified in the

Schedule of Quantities these shall be produced accordingly from the
particular manufacturer. These shall include materials, such as, bitumen and
bituminous compounds water proofing compounds, hardening, finishing
materials of approved makes. The responsibility for these materials lies with
the Contractor and he should avail himself of necessary guarantees from the
manufacturers. Such, guarantees as may be required by the employer shall
be obtained, by the contractor and given to the employer.

Vol. II / 43

Sen & Lall

3.

Spec/Tender doc.

Specification for Items of work

Notes: All materials used shall be as per specification of Materials herein
before.

EXCAVATION AND EARTH WORK

3.2

(i)

The foundation trenches or pits shall be true dimension shown on the

drawing and to depth at which in the opinion of the Architects a stratum of

good hard soil is not with.
All Excavated materials, which on inspection is Considered by the
Architect to be suitable for use in filling in plinth or under floor etc. the
Architect may instruct and call upon the contractor to stack, such, approved
materials, physically separated from the rest of the excavated materials No
extra shall be allowed for such operations.
The excavations shall be carefully got out to the level shapes and
dimensions as shown or figured on the drawings or as directed by the
Architects to receive the concrete works. Should any of the excavation be
taken down below the proper levels, the Contractor shall fill such, excavation
at his own expense with concrete well rammed in position until it is brought up
to the proper level.
If the trenches are made broader or longer than directed, the extra
breadth and length shall be filled in after the foundations are built with earth
rammed hard by the Contractor at his own cost. The Contractor shall at his
own expense and without extra charge, make provision for all shoving or
extra excavation in slope, pumping, dredline or bailing out water, and the
trenches shall be kept free from water while foundation work is in progress.
The Contractor shall, also at his own cost, remove such portions of boulders
or rocks or any other hard material if found while excavating. Nothing extra
shall be admissible for pumping and/or bailing out water. The Contractor will
also make arrangement of the disposal of bailed out water. The Contractor
will also make arrangement of the disposal of bailed out water unless
otherwise taken separately in the schedule.
Vol.II /44

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
The trenches or pits shall be inspected by the Architects before the

concrete is laid therein, when the trench levels shall be recorded. The filling of
pits or trenches shall be done in not more than 15 cms layers. Each layer
shall be flooded with water and rammed hard before adding to the next layer.
Such filling shall be brought up to the original ground without extra charges,
and shall form part of the item of excavation.
(ii)

Timbering of Trenches: When the trenches are to be taken deep the

sides of the trenches shall be protected by erecting timber shorting and

strutting. The timbering shall be closed or opened depending on the nature
and soil of work. Nothing extra on this account shall be admissible unless
otherwise taken separately in the schedule.
(iii)

Trimming and Leveling: The bottom of all excavations should be

trimmed and levelled in accordance with the drawings. Bottoms of the

trenches shall be rammed and watered before concrete is deposited.
(a)

Classification of Soil : All soils shall be taken as ordinary soil unless

hard rock or an old masonry or concrete or block kanker or running
sand which required special treatment for the purpose of excavation
are met with, when an additional item shall be formed. Ordinary
pebbles or kanker shall be taken under ordinary soil for which nothing
extra shall be paid.
Measurement: Shall be the product of the exact length and width of the
lowest step of the footings according to the drawing or the Architects
instructions, and the depth measured vertically. Where the ground is
not levelled, average depth shall be taken.

(b)

Disposal of Earth: All excavated materials certified as surplus and not

useful, unless otherwise specified, shall be removed by the Contractor
confirming to local civil regulations from the site in an approved
manner and at locations to be arranged by him. No payment shall be
Vol. II / 45

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
made for such disposal if done within 60 meters of the place of
excavation. For disposal beyond 60 meters lead, payment shall be
made as per item of schedule. The removal of surplus earth only be
carried out by the Contractor, when the specific instruction of the
owner/Architect will be made available in this regard.
Measurement : Quantity disposed off under this item shall be arrived at
by calculation, i.e. total quantity involved in excavation for foundation
less quantity filled in trenches around foundations, less quantity filled
under floors any other disposal done within 60 metres under
specifications 35(b).

(c)

Filling below Floors with earth or sand : This shall be done with good
excavated earth or sand in 150 MM layers, each layer being watered
and thoroughly rammed. If extra earth/sand is required for filling and
has to be brought from outside the site, it shall form an extra item as
stated in schedule. It shall include purchase of earth, its cartages from
outside (not within the site) screening, if necessary, and filling etc. The
sand or earth to be used for filling shall be got approved by the
Architect. Extra payment shall be made for leads more than 300 M.
Measurement : For earth brought from outside measurement shall be
taken of the consolidated earth.

Vol.II / 46

Sen & Lall

3.2

Spec/Tender doc.

Cement Concrete (Plain in Reinforced

(See also R.C.C. Specification)
(i)

Mixing : All proportions for ordinary cement concrete shall be by

volume except cement which shall be proportioned by weight
unless otherwise specified. .Mixing shall be done in mechanical
mixer as per specifications of reinforced concrete work.
However, in a special case, hand mixing may be adopted.
Several materials shall be accurately gauged in boxes and
thoroughly mixed on a water-tight platform of adequate size by
being turned over atleast thrice dry till the colour is

(ii)

uniform and then twice wet. Water shall be added gradually and
no more than necessary to sufficiently wet the materials. Only
that much concrete shall be mixed which can be used within half
an hour.
In case hand-mixing is allowed the Contractor shall put 10%

more cement than specified without extra charges. Controlled concrete

will be mixed by weigh
(ii)

Protection: All plain and reinforced cement concrete be adequately

protected. Newly placed concrete shall be protected by approved
means from sun dust, storm and/hot spells. Concrete placed below the
ground shall be protected from failing earth during and after placing.
Concrete placed in ground having deleterious salts shall be kept free
from contact at least for three days or as otherwise instructed.
Approved means shall also be taken to protect immature concrete from
damage by debris, excessive loading, vibration, abrasion, flotation due
to sub-soil water and other influences that may impair the strength and
durability of the concrete. This shall apply to all items of cement
concrete, such as, foundation, sub-grade, flooring damp proofing and
all other items of R.C.C. & P.C.C. and cinder concrete. No extra charge
shall be allowed for this.
Vol.II/47

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.2.1 PLAIN CONCRETE:

Cement Concrete in foundations and under floors
(i)

Aggregate: Shall be of broken stone metal as specified under the

schedule of maximum size of 10 mm graded to 20 mm gauge.

(ii)

Proportion: 1 parts cement :

5 part river coarse sand : 10 parts

aggregate (unless otherwise mentioned under the item of schedule).

(iii)

Mixing : As per specification No.3.2 para (i).

(iv)

Laying : Concrete shall be laid on horizontal layers of not more than

150 mm thick and gently rammed covered with gunny baga which shall
be kept constantly wet. Other work on concrete shall not start until after
three days of laying the concrete.
Measurement : In cubic metre of exact length 'breadth and depth as

ordered by the Architects or as shown on the drawings. This shall be

exclusive of any centering or shuttering required to complete the item. The
above specification will also be followed for cement concrete under floors.
3.2.2.

DAMP PROOF COURSE :

This shall consist of 40 mm thick damp proof course at plinth level with
(1:2::4) cement concrete with graded hard stone chips from 13 mm to 6 mm
mixed with Accoprof or approved water proofing compound in proportion of 1
Kg. of compound to 1 bag of cement. No longitudinal joints shall be permitted
in concrete casting. This shall be left for 5 days of curing before further
brickwork shall be allowed to proceed.

3.2.3

CEMENT CONCRETE WITH BRICK JHAMA CHIPS:

Brick Jhama chips shall be of new bricks, hard, well burnt and broken
to sizes varying from 40 mm (75%) graded to 20 mm (25%) gauge. Coarse
sand shall be approved. Concrete shall be mixed in mixer. Concrete shall be
laid in layer of maximum 150 mm thickness and well consolidated with
rammer before next layer is laid. In case of any honey combing cement
mortar slurry of. (1:2) proportion shall be grouted without any extra cost.
Measurement shall be in cubic metre. The rate shall include any centering or
shuttering, if necessary.
Vol.II/48

Sen & Lall

3.2.4

Spec/Tender doc.
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE :
(i)

All work shall be done in accordance with the detailed

specifications attached. The compaction of concrete shall be by
mechanical vibration.

(ii)

All work shall be protected as per specification No. 3.2

(iii)

Without any extra charge.

Measurement : In calculating the contents of any R.C.C. members for

measurement purposes, the dimensions adopted shall be the concrete
members exclusive of any finish even if the finish is specified in the schedule
as part of the item. It shall also exclude for all centering, scaffolding and form
work required.
(a)

R.C.C. Footings and strip foundation : In cum. of work done according

to the drawing. Unless otherwise specified in the schedule nothing
extra shall be admissible for any particular shape of the footings. This
shall also include combined footings.

(b) Columns : These shall be measured in cu.m. of work done according to

the drawings from top of footing to the top of roof slab in case of
ground floor and from top of slab to the top of slab for all other floors.
Unless otherwise specified nothing extra shall be admissible, for any
odd size and for any special section and shape of column i.e. square,
rectangular, octagonal, round, elliptical, oblong, etc. and laid at any
angle as may be shown on drawings. This shall also include stiffeners.
(c) Plinth or Tie Beam : Measurement shall be between R.C.C. columns or
stiffeners in cum of work done according to design.
(d)

Beams : Measurement shall be between R.C.C. column in cu. m. of

work done the depth shall be taken from the bottom of he stem to the
top of the slab or chajja if any.

Vol.II/49

Sen & Lall

(e)

Spec/Tender doc.
Slabs: These shall be measured in cubic metre of work done as per
design. These shall be measured from beam to beam or beam to wall
including bearings part of wall. Unless otherwise specified nothing
extra shall be admissible for slabs laid to slopes. Canopy slabs or
those of any shape of section, any cantilevered part or any projections
shall or big beyond bearing beam, such or raised slabs, providing
holes and openings (position and size as per requirements) and
grooves.

(f)

Lintels: All lintels spanning over independent openings unrelated to the

main R.C.C. Structure shall be measured under lintels, in cum. work
done according to design, width of the lintel shall be taken according to
wall thickness specified (see specification No.3.3) unless set back of
projected from wall bearing over the openings shall be the depth of the
lintel or 15 cm. whichever is higher. Bearing in excess of this shall not
be allowed.

(g)

Chajja, louvers, drops: Unless otherwise stated in schedule this shall

be measured in m2 of work done as per design exclusive of any
finishing even if finishing are included in the item. For chajja only the
projecting portions shall be measured and shall be inclusive of forming
drip mould. If stated in the scheduler these shall be plastered or any
other treatment may be given as specified and cement washed,
distempered, cement painted or painted with any other paint and the
rate shall inclusive of these works. Unless otherwise specified no extra
shall be admissible for any shape in plan thin sections, or if laid in
slopes or curves as may be the case. Expansion and construction
joints 6 mm thick shall be made approximately 2 m to 3.5 m centres
where temperature reinforcement shall be discontinued. Nothing extra
will be paid for fixing such units if not cast in site. .

Vol.II / 50

Sen & Lall

(h)

Spec/Tender doc.
Sills, copings, mullions, facia moulds :

Unless otherwise stated in

schedule these shall be measured in M 2 of the concrete work done as

per drawings, exclusive of finishings, for sills and coping all projections
upto 100 mm .beyond the wall on either side shall be - made without
any extra charge and this shall be inclusive of forming any pattern of
drip mould. Expansion joints 6 mm thick shall be left every 3 M to 3.5
M centers where temperature reinforcement shall be discontinued. If
stated in the schedule, these shall be finished in plaster and/or
distempered or painted in any approved point as specified without any
extra charge.
(i)

Staircase and steps : These shall be measured in cu.m. according to

design, the sloping slab portion being measured separately where it
occurs under respective schedule items. Unless otherwise specified
nothing extra shall be admissible for steps laid in any shape or not
straight on plain.

(j)

Cantilevered Gutters (slab and side wall) : This shall be measured in

cum other specifications as per (e).

(k)

Machine/ Equipment Foundations in Cement Concrete (1:2:4) : Same

as (a) & (c). The rate shall be inclusive of providing required holes,
pockets (sizes and depths as required) and grounding the same after
the Machine/ Equipments are erected with 1:1/1 :3 cement concrete to
the required level and finishing the same as per surrounding.

3.2.5

TREATMENT OF RUSTED, STEEL: All steel whether purchased by

the Contractor will not have any loose scale or rust. It shall be cleaned
with Hessian rug and sand rubbed vigorously on the surface and coat
of cement wash given immediately. This should be done before laying
the placing of all steel particularly in the rainy season. Nothing extra
shall be allowed for this.
Vol.II / 51

Sen & Lall

3.3

Spec/Tender doc.

BRICK MASONRY :
(A)

Brick and Tile Works : Bricks shall conform to specification No. 2.10.
Every brick (or tile) thoroughly soaked in water before using till the
bubbles cease to come up. Arrangement made for through soaking of
the bricks shall be approved by the Architects. No broken bricks (or
tiles) shall be used except to sleepers. The courses shall be truly
horizontal and said strictly in plumb, joints shall be broken vertically
and they shall not exceed 13 mm in thickness. The brick (or tile) work
shall not be raised by more than 14 single course per day for work
done in predominantly cement mortar, or 8 courses per day where
work is done in predominantly lime, mortar. Table shall be formed at
every 14th or 8th course respectively and kept full of water. The bricks
(or tiles) shall be laid in English bond. The joints shall be racked out for
plastering or painting as the work proceeds. If the Architects instruct,
the brick work will be done in Flemish bond without extra cost. The
work shall be well watered for a month.

Bonding: When bonding the brick work must be set back in every course. No
vertical two thing shall be allowed.
Mortar : Mix as stated in item of schedule, to be mixed and used as per
Specification No.2.8. The works shall be well watered for a fortnight. The rate
for Brick shall be inclusive of all necessary scaffolding, watering, cutting of
bricks soaking of bricks in water raking out joints and working all height.

Vol.II / 52

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Measurement : The measurement of work shall be the produce of length,

height and thickness. All thickness of brick shall be the multiples of half bricks.
Deductions for doors, windows and other openings including lintel bands etc.
shall be made to arrive at the actual total quantity of work, but nothing shall
be paid extra for forming such openings. However, no deduction shall be
made for areas less than 0.05 m bearing of lintels, beams, girders and
holdfasts blocks but nothing extra shall be, paid for embedding these.
Similarly, no deductions shall be made for chimney flues left in the walls but
nothing extra shall be paid for rendering the flue opening as specified. Brickwork as covering to R.C.C. structures and in thickness nearest to half brick
unit.
Unless otherwise specified nothing extra shall be admissible for cutting in
brick work to R.C.C. structure wall in any shape other than straight or any
cutting necessary for shaping the wall to the structural design.
(b)

Half brick and brick on edge walls : Shall be laid as for brick work and

reinforced with the one 6 mm bar or 25 mm wide 20 Gauge hoop iron every
fourth course or as specified in the schedule. Walls height more than two
courses or less than six courses shall have one row of reinforcement.
Continuous reinforcement shall be over lapped 30 cms at every joints.
Mortar : Shall be 1 cement : 4 course sand mixed as per specification No. 2.8
(b) unless otherwise stated in item of schedule. Nothing extra shall be paid for
making hollow walls spaced close to each other and joined at intervals by
bricks to provide stiffness.
Measurement :: In sq.m. of area of wall inclusive of the reinforcement.
Deductions shall be made as for brick work as stated above. Whether desired
by the Architects, reinforcement may be eliminated and the contractor will
have to give rebate for the same.
Vol.II / 53

Sen & Lall

(c)

Spec/Tender doc.
Exposed brick and tile work : This will be done as above but in addition

specially selected bricks (or tiles) shall be used for facing ensuring regular
and clean faces. No bricks or tiles which are broken chipped, wrink led or
which have irregular edges or corners shall be used. Depending on the
quality of bricks or tiles and if instructed by the Architects the exposed faces
and edges of every change. Wooden fillets 10 mm thick and 12 mm wide
shall be placed a t the edge of joints so that no mortar comes on the surface
of the bricks (or tiles) and a regular thickness of joints is maintained. The
surface will be

rubbed down with brushes, if necessary, and thoroughly

washed. No mortar shall be allowed to stick to the

surface which shall be

left clean to Architects satisfaction with all joints even and true to straight line.
Pointing : All joints, shall be recess pointed with cement mortar 1 cement: : 1
fine sand with a suitable small tool taking care that this does not stain the
edges of surface of the brick.
Mortar : Shall be 1 cement : 8 coarse sand or as specified in the item, mixed
as per specification no. 2.8 (b).
Measurement : As per brick including pointing.
(d)

Decorative Patterns : If a decorative pattern is required to be made, it

shall be done according to a drawings for which extra shall be paid in
Sq. M. of decorative area.

Vol.II /54

Sen & Lall

(e)

Spec/Tender doc.
Cavity walls: These shall be paid as per specifications (a) and (b) for
ordinary brick work but with a cavity between two walls. The thickness
of each wall shall be as stated in the schedule. The two shall be laid in
unison courses and bonded together with mild steel binders made from
10 mm dia, rode and shaped as per design but the minimum number of
binders shall be one in 10 Sq M. In case cavity wall comprises of one
or more half brick or brick on edge walls it shall be reinforced, as
stated under 3.3(b).

Measurement : Shall be taken separately for two walls under appropriate item
of brick work, unless otherwise specified in the schedule. Cavity shall not be
measured. Binders shall be paid separately in Sq. ft. unless otherwise
specified.
(f)

Brick tile laying : This shall be laid flat over specified sub-grade with a

bed of cement mortar 1: 3 (1 cement: 3 river sand). The joints shall then be
grouted with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 river sand) and flush pointed
with same mortar.
Measurement : In square metre of the net paved area inclusive of the bed
mortar and finishing.

Vol. II / 55

Sen & Lall

3.4

Spec/Tender doc.

Flooring Works :

3.4.1 (a)
(i)

CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING OR GRANOLITHIC FLOORING:

Preparation of sub-grade : The sub-grade shall be cleaned of all loose
earth, rubbish and other foreign matter. If necessary, the sub-grade
shall be cleaned with brushes and wated with gunny bag. Cleaned
sub-grade shall be welted with water thoroughly, but no water pool
shall be allowed. Necessary slope shall be given in the sub-grade,
itself.
If the sub-grade is of lime concrete it shall be allowed to set for
about seven days. If the sub-grade is of lean cement, concrete the
flooring shall be commenced after 48 hours.

Notes: Sub-grade shall be paid for separately.

(ii)

Preparation : 1 part cement: : 2 parts coarse sand : 4 parts of stone

aggregate by volume (12 mm maximum size) graded down or as
specified in the schedule) grading of aggregate shall be as per
reinforced concrete specification.

(iii)

Placing:

The floors shall be laid to specified thickness in panels of

uniform size not exceeding 2.5 m (one side not exceeding 1.25
different days. The edge of the panels shall be protected by wooden
battens.
(iv)

Mixing: As per specification No. 3.2.(i).

(v)

Finishing: Compact first with wood float. The blows shall be fairly heavy
but as consolidation takes places light rapid strokes shall be given.
Beating shall continue till all hollows in concrete are filled with mortar
cream. Then the surface shall be troweled till the moisture disappears.
Test the surface with straight edge. The surface must be uniform in
colour.
Vol. II / 56

Sen & Lall

(vi)

Spec/Tender doc.
Protection and curing: As per specification No. 3.2(ii) and No.3.2.1 (iv),
protection against movement of traffic shall also be done. Bunds for
impounding water for curing shall be either done by cement or lime
mortar. Mud will not be allowed.

(vii)

Admixtures: If directed a water proofing or hardening compound be

added according to manufacturers specifications. In such case the
work may have to be done in two layers.

Measurement : In square metre measured from wall to wall exceeding

exclusive of any finishing. Where admixture is specified it shall be paid by
weight calculated in accordance with manufacturers specifications. Nothing
extra shall be paid for work to be done in two layers or for work carried out in
the area of any shape.
No reduction shall be made for columns occurring on the floor, door
frames embedded in the floor or any other cut-out when area do not exceed
0.1 Sq. M. for each. However, nothing extra shall be paid for cutting involved
at such places.
(b)

Neat cement flooring : This shall be done as per specification No.3.4.1

(a) but immediately after trolling well mixed neat cement slurry (cement
and water solution) shall be sprinkled in a uniform layer at the rate of
2.2 Kg. per hundred Sq.m. The cement slurry shall be rubbed with
carborundum stone to remove float mark and leave a clean smooth
surface.

Vol. II / 57

Sen & Lall

(c)

Spec/Tender doc.
Neat cement and coloured skirting : The thickness of the skirting shall
be governed by the thickness of internal plaster. It shall always project
by 6 mm from the finished surface of the plaster. The receiving surface
shall be prepared as per plaster specification. .

Mortar: Mortar shall be 1 cement : 3 coarse sand well mixed and shall be
applied as per plaster when the surface become even it shall be uniformly
covered with a coat of neat cement (mixed dry with red oxide or other colour if
so specified in the schedule) finished in the same manner as the flooring.
All corner, angles, junctions shall be truly vertical and/or horizontal.
Rounding of the corners junctions, and junction joints or grooves required
shall be done without any extra charge.
Measurement : Measurement shall be in Sq. M.

Vol.II / 58

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.4.2. MARBLE MOSAIC / TERRAZZO, IN SITU FLOORING, SKIRTING AND

DADO
(i)

Preparation of sub-grades :

This shall be as per specification No.

3.4.1(a).
(ii)

Flooring composition : This will comprise of 2 layers, the bottom layer

called the "under coat" and the top one called the "top coat". The
bottom coat shall be 26 mm to 30 mm thick and the top coat 14 mm to
10 mm depending upon the size of the marble chips or as specified in
the schedule. The total thickness will be regulated to 40 mm, unless
otherwise stated in the schedule.
Under coat: Under coat will have the same proportions and
consistency as the granolithic floor and mixed and place in the same
manner {see specification No.3.4.1 (ii),(iii),(iv) and (vi)}.
Top coat : This shall be as laid down as in IS 2114-1962 using white or
gray cement and chips of sizes as stated in the schedule.
For lighter shade mosaic/terrazzo white cement shall be used
for neutral shade, grey cement shall be used. The proportion of
terrazzo mix shall be three part of cement and one part of marble
powder by weight. For every part of cement marble powder mix the
proportion of marble aggregate by volume shall be 1.5 part unless
otherwise specified.
The topping shall be mixed and laid in panels as described in
IS: 2114 and as per decorative designs prepared by Architects. It shall
be polished as specified in IS : 2114.

Vol .II/59

Sen & Lall

(iv)

Spec/Tender doc.
Dividing strips: The materials for dividing strips shall be such that it has
similar resistance to wear as the flooring. The dividing strips may be of
copper, brass, aluminium, plastic or similar materials as specified in the
description of items metallic dividing strips shall have a protective
coating of bitumen. The thickness of strips shall not be less than 1.5
mm. and width not less than 25 mm for metallic strips but for glass

(v)

strips it shall not be less than 3 mm thick and 40 mm wide. Distance

between the strips shall be maintained as directed by the Architect. All
the strips shall run parallel with cross strips at right angles. The strips
may be taken to skirting, if instructed. Unless otherwise mentioned,
nothing extra shall be admissible for glass strips. Extra shall be
payable for other than glass strips.
The dividing strips shall be embedded in under coat as per I.S. 21141962 para - 4.

(b)

Skirting and Dado : This shall be done as per specification No.3.4.1 (d)
but the top coat shall be laid as per specification No.3.4.2. (a) (ii).

Measurement: Skirting in Sq. M. of height above the finished floor from wall to
wall. Dado in Sq. M. from wall to wall above the finished floor level. Nothing
extra shall be allowed for rounding off corners with all or floor.

Vol.II /60

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

PLAIN AND COLOURED CEMENT TILES, MARBLE

MOSAIC TERRAZO TILE FLOORING:
3.4.3 (a)
(i)

FLOORING:
Tiles : The tiles shall be marble mosaic terrazzo or plain cement tiles,
and shall be of 25 cm x 25 cm x 22.5 mm or 30.cm x 30 cm x 22.6 mm.
Plain cement tiles shall be of 20 x 20 cm x 22.5 mm. The tiles shall be
as samples approved by the Architects and manufactured as per IS
1237-1959 using gray/white cement and size of chips as stated in the
schedule.

(ii)

Lime mortar 1:3 (1 lime: 3 surkhi) shall be used for laying the tiles and
the entire work completed as laid down under IS 1443-1959. Cement
Mortar (1:5) may also be used in lieu of L.M.

(iii)

Precautions: The flooring shall be kept covered and barricated from all
kinds of traffic and damage from all other sources.

Measurement : As per terrazzo cast insitu flooring specification No.

(b)

DADO, SKIRTING AND RISERS :

Tiles shall conform to IS 1237 and shall be of approved design. The
tiles shall be fixed with neat cement grout on a backing coat consisting
of 1:4 cement and sand plaster of 15 mm to 20 mm. thick. The top and
bottom junctions of tiles shall be rounded off neatly as directed. The
joints shall be filled with matching shade colour cement sturry. The
surface shall be kept wet for 7 days and then polished with
carborundum stone to obtain smooth surface and fine polish.

Measurement: Shall be in Sq. M. of height above the finished floor from wall
to wall.

Vol.II /61

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.4.4 BRICK FLOORING AND PAVING:

(i)

Bricks: Bricks shall be of first class as per specification or as specified

in the Scheduled and in the specification No.3.4.3 (i). If laid on earth or
sand such earth or sand will be properly watered and rammed hard
and slopped as directed before laying bricks. Nothing extra shall be
paid for earth work.

(ii)

Laying : Bricks shall be laid flat or on edge (as specified) in herring

bone bond or other approved pattern. Before laying, the bricks shall be
well soaked in water. The bricks shall be laid on a layer of mortar (as
specified in schedule) and all joints shall be grouted with the same
mortar and cut flush at top. In case of dry brick flooring joints shall be
filled with river sand for which no extra shall be paid. The thickness of
the joint shall not be more than 6 mm.

(iii)

Measurement : Shall be Sq.M.

3.4.5. CERAMIC TILES IN FLOORS/DADO:

a)

Ceramic Glazed Tiles - Ceramic glazed tiles from an approved

manufacture conforming to I.S.15622 shall be used. They shall be of
specified size and thickness. All specials viz. coves, internal and
external angles, corners, beads, etc. shall be used wherever directed.
Under layer will be cement mortar 1:3 of average 12 mm thick.
cement mortar with rough surface finish in walls and 20 mm thick
cement mortar in (1:4) at floors.
Tiles shall be soaked in water and washed clean, and set in
cement grout, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it
is properly bedded and in level with adjoining tiles. For proper
adhesion 4 pieces of marble dana should be fixed in 4 corners with
Araldite before fixing in the cement mortar, The tiles should have
adequate under cement slurry spread on the back surface also. The
joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or in
required and approved pattern. After tiles have been laid surplus
cement grout shall be cleaned off.
Vol.II / 62

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
The joints shall be cleaned off the gray cement grout a wire
brush of trowel to a depth of 5 mm and all dust loose mortar removed.
Joints then shall be flush pointed white cement. The surface shall then
be kept wet for seven days. After curing, the surface shall be washed
with Mild Hydrochloric Acid and clean water. The finished floor shall not
sound hollow when tapped with wooden mallet.

b)

SPARTEK/REGENCY TILES :
This shall be of approved manufacturer and shall be of specified size,
shade, colour and thickness. This shall be laid in wall dado with
'Terrafix' compound of M/s Terraco India Pvt. Ltd. or any equivalent
jointing material, in required pattern of joints, joints shall be kept as thin
as possible and shall be grouted with 'Terra Grout'.
The process of fixing the tiles with Terrafix compound and grouting with
'Terragrout' shall be as per manufacturers' specifications.

3.4.6 GRANITE TILES IN FLOORS / DADO:

This tiles shall be of specified size, shade and colour and shall be machine
cut and machine polished of specified thickness.
The details of process for fixation of tiles in wall shall be same as for Ceramic
tiles Spartek or Regency.
3.4.7 MARBLE STONE FLOORING
3.4.7.1 Materials
Marble stone Slabs : The slabs shall be of the kind marble specified in the
item, such as Makrana white, Makrana Doongri Adanga, Makrana chalk
Doongri, Markana Plain Pink, Makrana Adanga Pink, Makrana Kumari grey,
Makrana Dhobi Doongri Zebra, Abu white, Abu white venied Abu Panther,
Abu Black Zebra, Abu green, Bhansalna Plain Black, Bhansalna Zebra Black,
Narnaul Brown, Bar Plain Pink, Bar Pink Adanga Bar Brown, Baroda Green,
Falna Green, Umar (Bundi) green, Umar (Bundi) grey and Umar (Bundi) Pink
danga. The marble from which the slabs are made shall be of selected quality,
hard, sound, dense, and homogeneous in texture, free from cracks, declay
weathering and flaw. The sample of Marble stone slabs shall be qot approved
from the Engineer-in-charge before starting the work.
The slabs shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite dimensions.
Vol.II /63

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.4.7.2 Workmanship
Dressing of slabs : Every stone shall be cut to the required size and fine
chisel dressed to give a smooth and even surface on all sides to the full
depth. A straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be fully in contact
with it. Chisel dressing shall also be done on top surface to remove any
waviness. The sides and top surface of marble slabs shall be machine rubbed
or table rubbed with coarse sand before using. All angles and edges of the
slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings.
Thickness : Thickness shall be 25, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the item.
While allowable tolerance in thickness shall be 2 mm, it shall be 5 mm in
length and breadth.
Subqrade : Base concrete or R.C.C. slab shall serve as the sub grade.
Bedding : Bedding for the marble slabs shall either be lime mortar 1:1:1 (1
lime putty : 1 surkhi : 1 coarse sand) of average thickness 25 mm or cement
mortar 1:6 (1 cement : 6 coarse sand) of average thickness 20 mm as given
in the description of the item Minimum thickness at any place shall be not less
than 10 mm.
Laying : Sub grade shall be cleaned, watted and mopped. Mortar of the
specified mix and thickness shall then be spread on an area sufficient to
receive one marble slab. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. It
shall be laid on top, Pressed tapped gently to bring it in level with the other
slabs. It shall then be lifted and laid aside.
Top surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at
hollows or depressions. The mortar is then allowed to harden a bit. Over this
surface, cement slurry of honey like consistency at 4.4 Kg. of cement per
square metre. The edges of the slabs already paved shall be buttered with
grey or white cement with or without pigment to match the shade of the
marble slabs as given in the description of item. The slab shall then be gently
placed in position and topped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in
level with and close to the adjoining slab. The joint shall be as fine as
Vol.II / 64

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

possible. Surplus cement on the surface of the slab shall be removed. The
slabs fixed in the floor adjoining the walls shall enter not less than 10 mm
under the plaster, skirting or dado. The junction between the wall and floor
shall be finished neatly. The finished surface shall be true to levels and slopes
as instructed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Curing: The floor shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days.
Polishing and finishing : Unevenness at the meeting edges of slabs shall be
removed by fine chiseling. Finishing etc. shall be done as terrazzo tile flooring
except that cement slurry with or without pigments shall not be applied on the
surface before each polishing.
Measurement: Marble stone flooring with various kinds of marble shall be
measured separately in square metres correct to two places of decimal.
Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a centimeter and between
the finished faces of skirting, dado or wall plaster; No deduction shall be
made nor extras paid for any opening in the floor of area upto 0.05 sq. metre
(5 dm2). Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floor at different levels in the
same room. Treads and steps of stairs paved with marble stone slabs shall
also be measured under flooring. Extra shall be paid for such areas where
width of treads does not exceed 30 cm. The width of treads shall be
measured from outer line of nosing to finished face of riser. Nosing for treads
shall be measured in running metres and paid for extra.
Rate: The rate shall include all materials and labour required for all the
operations involved and described above.
3.4.8 Marble Stone in risers of steps and skirting
3.4.8.1

Materials
Marble Stone slab and dressing : The specification shall be same as in paras
3.10.1 and 3.10.02 except that the thickness of the slab shall be 25 mm. A
tolerance of 2 mm shall be allowed unless otherwise specified in the
description of the item.
Vol. II /65

Sen & Lall

3.4.8.2

Spec/Tender doc.

Workmanship
Preparation of surface: The specification shall be the same as for terrazzo tile
in skirting etc. The wall surface shall be cut uniformly to the requisite depth
so that skirting face shall have the projection from the finished face of wall as
shown in drawings or as required by the Engineer-in-charge.
Laying : The risers of steps and skirting shell be set in grey or white cement
admixed with or without pigment to match the shade of the stone as specified
in the de description of the item. The slab shall be so placed that the back,
surface is at a distance of 12 mm from the wall, subject to a minimum of 10
mm at any place. If necessary, the slab shall be help in position with the help
of M.S. hooks temporarily fixed in wall for the purpose at suitable intervals.
The skirting or riser face shall be checked for verticality and corrected.
The gap between the rear of slab and the wall shall be filled and packed with
cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) or other Mix as specified in the
item. After the mortar in the gap has acquired sufficient strength, the hooks
holding the slab shall be removed.
The joints in between the slabs shall be as fine as possible. The top
line of skirting and risers shall be truely horizontal and the joints truely vertical
or as per desired pattern. The risers and skirting slab shall be matched as
shown in drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Curing, polishing and finishing : The specification as per terrazzo tile flooring
shall be applicable in this case also except that cement slurry with or without
pigment shall not be applied on the surface and polishing shall be done only
manually. The face and top of skirting shall be polished :

Vol. II /66

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Measurement : Risers of steps and skirting shall be measured correct upto

two places of decimal. Length shall be measured along the finished face of
riser or skirting correct to a centimetre while height shall be measured correct
to a millimetre from the finished level of tread to the top or to the under side of
tread, in case of steps. Dados and lining of pillars shall be measured under an
appropriate item of section on 'Marble Work'.
Rate : The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in
all the operations described above.
3.4.9 KOTA STONE FLOORING
3.4.9.1

Materials
Kota stone slabs: The slabs shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense
and homogeneous in texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws.
These shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness, they should be
of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-incharge.
The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to
site.
The slabs shall conform to the size required. Before starting the work, the
Contractor shall get the sample slab approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

3.4.9.2

Workmanship
Dressing of slabs : Each slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and
fine chisel dressed at all the edges to full depth. The sides thus dressed shall
have a full contact if a straight edge is laid along. The sides shall be table
rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before paving. All angles and
edges of the slabs shall be true square and free from chippings giving a plane
surface.
Thickness : Thickness shall be 25, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the item.
Tolerances allowed shall be as under :
(a)

On dimensions more than 10 cm = 5 mm

(b)

On dimensions less than 10 cm = 2 mm

Vol.II/67

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Preparation of surface : Specification shall be same as marble flooring.

Laying : Specification shall be same as marble flooring except that the edges
of the slabs shall be buttered with grey cement, with admixture of pigment to
match the shade of the slab.
Curing, polishing and finishing : The specifications shall be same as terrazzo
tile flooring except that (a)

First polishing with coarse grade carborundum stone shall not be done;
and

(b)

Cement slurry with or without pigment shall not be applied to the

surface before polishing.

Measurements : Specifications as given in para 72:2.8. In Marble flooring

shall apply except that length and breadth shall be measured correct upto a
centimeter and no deduction shall be made nor extra paid for any opening in
floor of areas upto 0.1 sq.m (1 0 dm').
Rate : Rate shall include the cost of all materials and Iabour involved in all t
the operations described above.
3.4.10 KOTA STONE IN RISERS OF STEPS, SKIRTING AND DADO
3.4.10.1Materials

Kota stone slab & dressing : The specifications shall be the same as in para
74.1.1 and 74.2.1 except that the thickness of the slab shall 25 mm or as
specified in the item. The slabs may be of uniform size, if required.
3.4.10.2

Workmanship

Preparation of surface: Specifications in para 73.2.1 as applied to Marble

stone in risers of steps and skirting shall hold good.
Laying: Specifications shall be same as in para 73.2.2 except that the joints of
the slab shall be set in grey cement with pigment to match the shade of the
slabs.
Vol.II/68

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Curing, polishing and finishing: The specifications shall be same as Terrazzo

looring except that first polishing with coarse grade carborundum stone shall
not be done.
Measurements: Risers of steps, skirting and dado shall be measured in
square metres correct upto two places of decimal Length shall be measured
along the finished face of riser; skirting or dado Correct upto a centimetre.
Height .shall be measured from the finished level of tread or floor to the top or
the underside of tread in case of stops. This shall also be measured correct to
a cent1metre except in case of risers of steps and skirting where it shall be
measured correct to a millimetre. Lining of pillars etc. shall also be measured
under this item.
Rate : The rate shall include all materials and labour involved in the specifications
described above.
3.4.10.3

Red / White Sand Stone in Floors

40 mm thick fine dressed stone flooring over 20 mm (average) thick base

Of cement mortar 1:5 (1cement : 5 coarse sand) with joint finished flush.
3.4.10.4

Red / White Sand Stone in Walls

Stone work (machine cut edges ) for wall lining etc. (veneer work) backing
filled with a grout of average 12 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1cement : 3
coarse sand) including pointing in white cement mortar 1:2 (1white cement : 2
stone dust) with admixture of pigment matching the stone shed. Stone to be
secured to the backing and the sides by means of cramps and pins.
3.5

WOOD WORKS :

3.5.1 General Wood Works

Timber used shall conform to specifications described under Materials'
Doors,windows, ventilators, walls, paneling, false ceiling, etc. shall be in
accordance with Architect's drawing in every detail and all joiner's work shall
be accurately set out, framed and finished in a proper workmen-like manner.
Frames of doors, windows and ventilators, etc. and shutter styles and rails
shall be best quality. Timber specified in the schedule of items. The scantlings
shall be accurately planed smooth, Rebates, roundings and mouldings shall
be made as shown on the drawings. Patching or plugging of any kind shall
not be allowed. Joints shall be simple, neat and strong. Framed joints shall be
coated with suitable adhesive like glue or synthetic resin before the frames
are put together. All mortice and tenon joints shall fit in fully and accurately
without wedging on filling. The joints shall be pinned with hard wood or
bamboo pins of 10 mm to 12 mm dia or rust resisting star shaped metal pins
of 8 mm. after the frames are put together and pressed in position by means
Vol.II/69

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

of a press. The frames shall be protected during the progress of work

by suitable boxing. All shall be treated against termites by giving a coat of any
approved wood preservative.
Unless otherwise specified all door frames shall have six M.S. flat hold
fasts and window frames shall have four holdfasts. Holdfasts shall be
provided to the ventilators, if directed. Size of holdfast shall be 30 x 40 mm x
6 mm M.S. flat bent to shape with fish tail end and it shall fixed to frame with
sufficient number of screws as directed. When door window frames are to be
fixed to R.C.C. column or R.C.C. wall, holdfast shall be substituted by
suitable arrangement such as coach screws, rawl bolts etc. to secure frames
to R.C.C. columns or R.C.C. wall as directed by Architects. .
Frames and shutters shall not be painted or erected before being
approved by Architects.

3.5.2. PANNELLED SHUTTER: Panels shall be of pattern and size as shown on

the drawings or as directed by Architect. Panel shall be of specified thickness
of Teak wood particle Board of approved make with commercial veneering /
teak veneering (unless other-wise specified) panels shall be framed into
grooves made in styles and rails to the full depth of groove and faces shall be
closely fitted to sides of groove.
Partly panelled and partly glazed shutter shall be similar to panelled shutters
except that such parts as are directed shall be glazed with plane or ground
glass as specified.
Styles and rails shall be rebated 12 mm to receive glass. Sash bars shall be
moulded and rebated are mitred on sides to received the glass which be fixed
with putty.

3.5.3. HARDWARE FITTINGS: All the hardware fittings and fixture shall be
approved make, sizes and metals of the Hardware fittings will be as per bill of
Quantities and will be in conformity to ISI Standard. The fixation should be the
best workman like manner and in accordance with manufacturer
specifications and Architects Drawings and should be in true alignment.

Vol.II /70

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.5.4. FLUSH DOOR SHUTTER: All flush door shall be solid core unless otherwise
specified. It shall conform to the relevant specifications of I.S. 2202 and shall
be obtained from approved manufacturers the finished thickness of shutter
shall be mentioned in the items. Face veneers shall be of the pattern and
colour approved by the Architects and an approved sample shall be deposited
with the Architects for reference.
Edges of the core shall be lipped internally as per I.S.I. Details.
In addition to Internal lipping all doors may have external lipping where
specified by the purchaser all 6 mm to 10 mm thick.
MEASUREMENT :
i)

Doors and Windows frame shall be measured in Cum.

ii)

All the shutters shall be measured in Sq. M.

3.5.5. HINGES: These shall be M.S. oxidized butt hinges, as mentioned of heavy
type, to be fixed with 'the Doors and windows shutter as noted below:
For each leaf of window Shutters

2 Nos. Hinges 100 mm

long with 40 mrn Screws.

For each leaf of Door Shutter of

width not exceeding 80 cm.

For each leaf of Door Shutter

3 Nos. of Hinges 100 mm

long with 40 mm screws.

of width above 80 cm.

4 Nos. of Hinges
100 mm long with
40 mm screws.

3.6.

IRON AND STEEL WORKS

3.6.1. STEEL WINDOWS:

(i)

Steel windows shall conform to specification no.2.16 and be installed in

position as shown in Architects Drawings. The windows shall be fixed
to concrete members by rawl plugs number 19 and 32 x No. 10
galvanized wood screws or in brick work by steel adjustable lugs
Vol.II /71

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.2 mm thick 16 mm wide 100 mm long. Standard clips 40 mm x 40

mm x 8 mm thick 16 mm wide 100 mm long. Standard clips 40 mm x 40 mm x
8 mm and galvanized bolts with hexagonal nuts shall be used for fixing with
steel members. Number of lugs, screw sand clips shall be in the order of :
2 Nos. on each side for frames upto 1 metre high;
3 Nos. on each side for frames upto 1.5 metre high; and
4 Nos. on each side for frames upto 2.0 metre high.
One additional on each side for every 60 cms or part thereof height
beyond 2 metres.
Such lugs, screws or clips shall also be provided at top and
bottom at the rate of one on each face for every 60 cms. length or part
thereof (for windows greater than 60 cms width). Concrete sills, if
specified, shall preferably be laid after windows have been fixed to
enable the lugs to be embedded properly.
Composite members shall be assembled and joined together
with special mastic at the rate of 0.3 kg. per linear meter of the joints.
Special mastic shall be used in embedding the frame or brick, concrete
or steel surfaces. All joints between the frames and the plastered
surfaces shall be properly filled with the mastic to make the joints
waterproof.
(ii)

Glazinq : All windows shall have glazing fixed on outside and as shown on the
drawings with special glazing clips shall be provided during fabrication. The
putty used shall conform to IS 420 and shall not be less than 0.186 Kg. metre
of the glass perimeter. The thickness of the glass shall be as below (unless
otherwise specified) :
(1)

24 oz. 1/8" (3 mm) thick glazing for glass area not exceeding 0.55 Sq.
M. subject to dimension not exceeding 4-0" (120 cms).

(2)

26 oz. 1/8" thick glazing for glass area not exceeding 0.55 Sq.M. but
one side exceeds 4'-0" (120 cms).
Vol.II / 72

Sen & Lall

(3)

Spec/Tender doc.
32 oz. 3/16" (4 mm) thick glazing for glass area between 0.55 Sg.M.
where one side exceeds 120 cms and for area exceeding 1 Sq.M
All glass shall be fixed with putty or wooden beadings, or Steel/

Aluminum beadings as specified.

Woods shall be of first class teakwood fixed with putty. Holes for fixing
beading shall not be more than 9" (22 cms) apart and machine screws shall
be used for fixing beadings, windows before erection shall be painted with
one coat of red oxide.
(iii)

North - Light Glazing Frame shall conform to Standard I.S.C. and glazing as
per (ii) above.

(iv)

Paintings: Windows after erection shall be finished with synthetic Enamel

Paint or approved type (unless otherwise stated) of approved column as per
specification No,.3.8.2).

Measurement: In Sq.M. of over all size of windows from outside to outside edge of
frame inclusive of all items specified above and painted complete.
3.6.2 ROLLING SHUTTERS :
Rolling shutters shall be an approved quality complete with all
accessories, such as, top cover, handles, hasps, locking arrangement, etc.
complete source of supply shall be got approved by the ARCHITECTS before
placing the order.
This shall consist of 20 gauge x 5/16" (7.6 cm) steel lathe of convex
corrugation, side guides of 5" (120 cms) square bar and 1/8" (3 mm) thick
plate. Top rolling springs shall be English or Continental spring wire or of
approved make.
Painting: As per steel windows.
Measurement: In Sq.M. of clear size of opening only.
Vol.II/73

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.6.3 COLLAPSIBLE STEEL GATE:

It shall consist of vertical double channels at 10 cm centres. The sizes
of channels T-section for top and bottom shall be as approved by the
Architects. The gate shall be provided with necessary bolts, nuts, locking
arrangements, stoppers and brass handles on both sides. The gate shall be
painted with one coat of anticorrosive paint before erection and two coats of
synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and shade.
3.6.4 FAN HOOKS: Fan hooks shall be made from 16 mm dia M.S. bars cut and
bent to required shape and size as per standard drawing. Hooks shall be laid
in position before casting of slabs or beams.
Measurement: It shall be in number Inclusive of painting exposed part with
approved paint.
3.6.5 Wrought Iron Grills:
Grills shall be manufactured as per drawings and the welded joints
shall be smooth. The grills shall be painted with one coat of anti-corrosive
paint before fixing and two coats of Synthetic Enamel paint of approved
quality and shade.
3.6.6. GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR IRON AND STEEL WORKS :
(i)

Steel : Structural steel shall conform to IS : 226-1962, IS:2062 and 5T

440 of IS:1977-1962. All steel members such as channels, angle, etc.
shall be free from rust, flakes cracks, blisters, imperfect edges and all
other defects.

(ii)

Shop Drawings: If instructed the Contractor (or all the approved

fabricator) shall produce complete shop drawings all details and sizes
of gussets, bolts, rivets, holds, etc. architect for their approval.

Vol.II /74

Sen & Lall

(iii)

Spec/Tender doc.
Fabrication: As far as possible structure shall be drawn out to full scale
on a level ground or brick masonry platform. All angle and dimensions
shall be accurately set out complete with their jointing arrangement
such as gussets etc. wooden templates about 1/2" (12 mm) thick shall
be made to correspond to each member. Rivets holes shall also be
marked on the templates. Then with the help of the templates the
section shall be cut to the required dimensions.
All cuts shall be at right angles to the surface filled properly to
get edges. No burrs or uneven cuts shall be allowed. All structural
fabrication to conform to IS : 800 all welding to conform to IS : 8161956 and other relevant codes.

(iv)

holes: All holes should be accurately marked off from templates and
drilled except in plates 3/8" (10 mm) thick or under when they may be
punched. Holes should be cleaned off burrs or brought edges and
counter sunk where required.

(v)

Bolts and Bolting: All bolts shall have forged hexagonal head. They
shall be either cadimanised or treated black. Each bolt shall be fixed
with 1/4" (6 mm) thick washer. Holes shall be 1/16" (0.15 mm) larger
than the diameter of the bolt. All such Project shall not be less than
3/8" (10 mm) through the nuts. However, in special cases when
directed, such bolts shall be cut flush with face of the nut. All bolts and
nuts shall conform to IS : 1367-1961.

(vi)

Rivets and Riveting: All rivets shall be mild steel and be worked either
hot or cold. All rivets shall have anti corrosive treatment given by the
Manufacturer. The shant diameter, in which it is intended to be fixed.

(vii)

Welding: Welding shall be electrical flash welding as per Indian

Standard Specification. Gas welding shall not be allowed. Mild steel
electrodes shall comply with the requirements of IS : 814-1957
specification for covered electrodes for metal arc welding of mild steel.
Vol. II /75

Sen & Lall

(viii)

Spec/Tender doc.
Gussets: Gussets shall be cut as shown on drawings and will be paid
for the actual weight as calculated from the size shown on drawings or
if this is not feasible then by actual weighment. Nothing extra shall be
paid for wastage.

(ix)

Erection : After the erection all the members shall immediately be

supported by with necessary supports or props to prevent any falling
off or misalignment.

(x)

Painting: All cast and wrought iron and steel work including all
contract .surface should, except, when used in reinforced concrete
work, will be coated 'with one coat of red oxide paint before erection.
No extra shall be paid for this paint.
Measurement : By weight of finished work based on standard weight of
the section or by units as may be stated weight of the section or by
units as may be stated in the Schedule. In case when payment is by
weight, the of rivets, bolts and nuts shall be admissible on account of
rolling margin.

3.6.7 PRESSED STEEL DOOR FRAME :

Thickness of miId steel sheets should not be less than 1.25 mm and are
electrically Flash Butt welded a t the corners-.
The frame should be completed in aIl respects as per IS : 4351 including
fittings like M.S. Butt hinges in required number as per size of opening, hold
fasts, base tie shock obserbers, lock strike plates, etc..
Height of the frame will be 30 mm more, out of which 25 mm will go into the
flooring and 5 mm clearance is left between the finished floor and shutter.
The frames will be painted with shop coat anti-corresive red oxide zinc
chromate primer.
The door frames will be at profile C.

Vol.II / 76

Sen & Lall

3.7

Spec/Tender doc.

PLASTER AND FINISHING :

3.7.1 Internal/Plaster Works : Plaster shall be composed of mortar in proportion of

cement and/or lime and river sand and / or coarse sand as stated in the
Schedule as per Specification of each materials i.e. Specification Nos. 2.2,
2.4 and 2.5. Mortar shall be mixed as per Specification. No. 2.8 used within
half an hour. The joints in brick work shall be raked out to a depth of 1/2" (12
mm) if not already done and the surface watered and cleaned of all dust and
dirt. Concrete to surfaces shall be properly hacked to get adequate key. The
mixture shall be applied evenly with force on the surface to be plastered. The
Plaster shall be of specified thickness as per schedule. The surface shall be
finished at once by being rubbed over with trowel till the cement appears on
the surface. All corners, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical and
horizontal as the case may be and carefully and neatly finished. Rounding off
corners and junctions were required shall be done without extra charge. The
finished plaster shall be left to cure for 10 days. If required by the Architect,
junctions may be provided with deep grooves with extra charge.
3.7.2 LIME PUNNING:
(i)

The mortar for punning shall consist of one lime putty and one river
sand (unless otherwise stated).

(ii)

Punning: The undercoat of the surface on which the punning is to be

done should be left rough. The mortar for punning shall be applied in
1/8" (3 mm) thick layer after the undercoat has dried. It shall be
finished to a smooth and levelled surface by means of plaster's trowel.
All corners, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical and
horizontal as the case may be and shall be carefully and neatly
finished. Rounding of corners and junctions, where required, shall be
done without any extra payment. No portions of the surface shall be
left out initially to be patched up later on. The surface shall then be
cured for 10 days.
Measurement shall be as per plaster inclusive of curing.
Vol.II /77

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.7.3 POINTING MORTAR : As specified in the schedule.

The pointing shall generally be set back or recessed 3/8" (10 mm) to
1/2" (12 mm). The mortar shall be pressed into joints with pointing trowel and
shall not be allowed to spread over the corners edges or faces or bricks or
stones. It is thus, it must be immediately cleaned.
Flush Pointing: The mortar shall be finished off level to give smooth
appearance. Care should be taken to avoid falling or sticking of mortar to
faces. Curing of painting shall be done as for plaster.
Measurement : In Sq. M. of area actually done. Nothing extra shall be
payable for pointing in recesses, jambs corner or in other difficult location.
3.7.4

External Plaster works:

3.7.4.1

Rendered sand faced cement plaster:

The joints for brick walls shall be racked out and the concrete surfaces

hacked as for internal plaster and the surface cleaned and watered. The
External Plaster shall be 15 mm thick of cement plaster in the ratio of 1 part
cement and 4 parts coarse sand and finished rough with a cloth covered
travel or sponge. To get uniformity in size of sand particles sieving may be
insisted upon. Curing shall start after 24 hours and finished plaster shall then
be left to cure for 7 days.
Measurement: For all plaster work shall be measured in Sq. M. of the surface
over which plaster is to be done. The thickness of plaster shall not be taken
into account except for independent columns, where the measurement shall
be of the finished surface allowing 6 mm (1/4") over the designed dimensions.
Openings shall be deducted in full and jambs and soffits shall be allowed.
Opening less than 0.1 Sq.M. shall not be deducted and nothing extra shall be
paid for finishing jambs soffits and sides of such opening. The rate shall
include rounding of all corners and junctions and forming drip course
Wherever required and curing. Unless otherwise specified nothing extra shall
be allowed for plaster on independent columns and beams, any short widths
or on cured surfaces and difficult locations.
Vol.II / 78

Sen & Lall

3.7.4.2.

Spec/Tender doc.

Rough cast cement plaster to external surface of wall

The joints for brick walls shall be racked out and the concrete surfaces

hacked as for internal plaster and the surface cleaned and watered. The
baking coat shall be 12 mm thick cement plaster in the ratio of 1 part cement
and 4 part coarse sand and keys shall be formed on the surface. After this
coat has sufficiently dried up, the top layer of 10 mm. thick cement plaster
consisting of 1 part cement and 3 part coarse sand with water proofing
compound, as specified by manufacturers shall be laid and finished smooth.
All corners, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical and horizontal as the
case may be and carefully and neatly finished.
Over finished smooth surface and at green plaster stage a mixture of
sand and gravel or crushed stone of uniform color from 2.36 mm to 12.5 mm
nominal size dashed manually or mechanically. Including forming grooves of
uniform size in top layer as per approved pattern using wooden battens
Nailed to under layer including removal of wooden batten and finishing the
grooves. Finished plaster shall be left to cure for 10 days.
3.8.

Painting works:

3.8.1 PAINTING ON INTERNAL & EXTERNAL SURFACE OF THE BUILDING

Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be double scaffolding.
The surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar droppings
and foreign matter. All steel work shall be cleaned of loose rust, mill scales
etc. so as to expose the original surface. All broken edges, cracks, loose
plaster and wavy surface shall be brought up either by patch plaster work or
by plaster of paris.
All materials viz., dry distemper, oil bound distemper, oil paint, flat
oilpaint, synthetic enamel paint, plastic emulsion paint, cement primer, red
lead and other primers and metallic paints shall conform to respective I.S.
specifications and shall be obtained from approve manufacturers. All paints
shall be brought on site in sealed tins in ready mixed form and shall be
applied direct with the addition of thinner, if recommended by the
manufacturers.
Vol. II / 79

Sen & Lall

A.

Spec/Tender doc.

White Washing :
White wash shall be prepared from lime slaked on spot, mixed and
stirred with sufficient water to make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to
stand for 24 hours and shall be screened through clean cloth. Four Kg. of
gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cubic metre of the cream
(115 gm. per cft.). Blue shall be added to give required whiteness. The
approximate quantity of water to be added in making cream shall be five litres
per kg of lime.
White wash shall be applied in specified coats by using flat brushes or
spray pumps. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before next coat is applied. If
additional coats then that have been specified are necessary to obtain
uniform and smooth finish, it shall be given at no extra cost.
This finished dry surface shall not shown any signs of cracking and
peeling nor shall it come off readily on the hand when rubbed.
If directed by the Architects one coat of chalk and glue shall be applied
before application of white colour wash at no extra cost.
Measurement: Shall be Sg.M. of the actual covered area. Nothing extra shall
be allowed for painting any rough surface e.g. external sand faced plaster or
work in short width or surface in any shape.

B.

Colour Wash :
Colour wash shall be prepared by adding material colours not affected by lime
to white wash. No colour wash shall be done until a sample of the colour
wash to the required tint or shade has been got approved from the Architects.
Colour wash shall be applied as specified under 'white wash' .

Vol.II / 80

Sen & Lall

C.

Spec/Tender doc.

Dry Distemper :
Shade shall be got approved from the Architects before application of
distemper.
The surface shall be prepared as specified earlier. A primer coat using
approved primer of sizing shall be applied. Distemper prepared as per
manufacturer's directions shall be applied and each coat shall be allowed to
dry before subsequent coat is applied. The finished surface shall be free from
chalking when rubbed, even, uniform and shall show no brush marks. If
additional coats are necessary, they shall be given at no extra cost.
Measurement : Shall be in Sq.M. including undercoat of whiting of plaster of
paris. All work in ceilings shall be measured flat without any deduction for
airconditioning grills light fittings or any other such fittings. All work on walls
shall be measured as for plaster (Specification No. 3.7.1). Unless otherwise
specified in the schedule nothing extra shall be admissible for work in
ceilings, short widths or surface of any shape.

D.

Oil Bound Distemper :

The surface shall be prepared as specified above. A primer coat of either
cement primer or an approved distemper primer shall be applied.
After the primer coat has dried, the surface shall be lightly sand
papered and dusted to make it smooth to receive distemper.
Distemper shall be prepared as per the directions of the manufacturer
and conforming to shade approved. It shall be applied in specified coats,
taking care to allow for drying of each coat before subsequent coats are
applied.

E.

Waterproof Cement Paint:

The surface shall be prepared as specified above and thoroughly
wetted with clean water before waterproof cement paint is applied.
The paint shall be prepared strictly as per manufacturer's specifications
and in such quantities as can be used up in an hour of its mixing, as
otherwise the mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and finish.
Vol.II /81

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
The paint thus prepared shall be applied on clean and wetted surface

with brush or spraying machine the solution shall be kept stirred during the
period of application. It shall be applied on the surface which is on the shady
side of the building so that the direct heat of the sun on the surface is
avoided. The completed surface shall be watered after the day's work.
Number of coats shall be as specified in the item.
Measurement : Shall be Sq.M. of the actual covered area. Nothing extra shall
be allowed for painting any rough surface e.g. external sand faced plaster,
rough cast cement plaster or work in short width or surfaces in any shape.
F.

Painting-Oil/Enamel/Plastic Emulsion etc. :

Ready mixed oil paint, flat oil paint, plastic emulsion paint, ready mixed
synthetic enamel paint, aluminium paint, etc. shall be brought in original
containers and in sealed tins. If for any reason thinner is necessary, the brand
and quantity of thinner recommended by the manufacturer or as instructed by
the Architect shall be used.
The surface shall be prepared as specified above and a coat of
approved primer shall be applied. After 24 hours drying approved or specified
quality paint shall be applied evenly and smoothly. A filler putty coating may
be given to give a smooth finish. Each coat shall be allowed to dry out
thoroughly and then lightly rubbed down with sand paper and cleaned of dust
before the next coat is applied. Number of coats shall be as specified in the
item and if the finish of the surface is not uniform, additional coats as required
shall be applied to get good and uniform finish at no extra cost. After
completion no hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint puddles in the
corners of panels, angles of mouldings, etc., shall be left on the work. The
glass panes, floor etc. shall be cleaned of stains.
When the final coat is applied, if directed, the surface shall be rolled
with a roller or if directed, it shall be stippled with a stippling brush.

Vol.II / 82

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.8.2 PAINTING ON STEEL AND WOODEN SURFACE

(i)

Paints, oil, carinishes and primers in general shall be approved quality

and of approved manufacturer as specified.
These materials shall be ready mixed and in sealed tins and the
required quantity stocked at site.

(ii)

Preparation of surface:

(a)

Iron and steel work: The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, sand
prepared and/or rubbed with emely cloth. If necessary to remove
grease mortar or any other foreign matters. In case of rusted surface, it
shall be first cleaned with steel wire brushes till the corrected crust is
removed. The prepared surface shall be shiny and free from rubbish
marks, patches blisters and other irregularities. The surface thus
finished shall be got approved before painting.

(b)

Wood

work :

All surface shall be thoroughly planned and sand

papered.
(iii)

Knotting and Stopping (wood work only) : In case the surface having
knots and nails holes, they shall be filled with stopping and knotting
materials shall consist of pure shellac dissolved in methylated spirit.
For stopping, Russian tallow or putty shall be used the later should
consist of two parts of whiting (powdered chalk) one part of white lead
mixed together in double boiled shall be allowed to dry up and then
sand papered. Alternatively, a ready-made approved putty may be
used.

(iv)

Application: In all cases the following procedure will be :

After preparing the surface, a primer coat shall be applied. After
this an undercoat shall be given. Thereafter a top coat shall be applied.
This may also be the finishing coat, but if the surface is not satisfactory
or if a particular kind of paint requires and additional finish coat this
shall be given. Each successive coat shall be applied after the
previous one is dry. Care should be taken that dust or otherwise
disfigure the various coats.
Vol.II/83

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
In following the above procedure the materials to be used will
depend upon the type of paint specified; and only such materials as
are consistent with a particular type and brand shall be used. The
same brand of materials will be used for the various coats. All paints
shall be used and applied as per manufacturer's specification.
The paints shall be applied with bristle brushes and not horse
hair ones. The paints shall be applied in the thinnest possible layers
with parallel drawings ; no flowing down shall be allowed. Nothing extra
shall be paid for priming coat. Painting to false ceil ins sand acoustic
tiles, soft boards,. etc. shall be done by spray painting only.
Measurement : Measurement shall be as included in the items of work
unless otherwise stated in the schedule for any special work. If not
included in the item are the measurements shall be as follows :

Sl.

Description of works

How measured

Overlapping Factor

No
1
a.

Panelled

or

framed

2
3
and Measured flat (not 1.5 (for each side)

braced joinery.

girthed)
frame

chowkat

or

edges, shutter-

edges, jambs etc. will

b.

not be measured.
Measured Flat (not 1 (for each side)

Flush

girthed)
frame

chowkat
edges,

or

shutter

edges, jambs, etc. will

c.
d.

not be measured.
Fully glazed or gauges
-doPart paneled and part glazed -do -

(for each side)

1 (for each side)

e.

or gauged.
Fully venetianed or louvered

1.5 (for each side)

- do Vol.II/84

f.

Guard

bars,

balustrades, Measured Flat (not 1 1 (for painting all

gratings and railings.

girthed)

chowkat

or over)

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
edges, jambs, etc. will

g.

not be measured.
Gates and palisade facing The height shall

be 1 (for painting all

including standards, braces, taken from the lower of over)

rails, stoys, etc.

the plaisade upto the

top of standards if there

h.
i.

Carved or enriched
Corrugated sheets

are higher.
Measured flat.
- do -

2 (for each side)

114% of flat area
for each face.

B.

PAINTING WITH WOOD PRESERVATIVES

(i)

Preservatives: All the preservatives shall be approved brand or as

specified in the schedule. They should be procured in sealed tins and
stocked at site.

(ii)

Preparation of surfaces: shall be as specified in specification No. 3.8.2

(A).
(iii)

Application. : As stated in the specification No.3.8.2(A) but stout brush

shall be used. The preservatives should also be applied profusely at
the ends and allowed to soak well. The first coat shall be allowed to
soak before the successive one is rendered. The process shall be
done in minimum three coats.
Measurement: shall be for the actual area covered or as described
under 3.8.2(A).

(C)

POLISHING

(i)

Polish shall be obtained by dissolving 0.15 Kg. of shellac in 1 litre of

methylated spirit without applying any source of heat. After the shellac
has dissolved, suitable pigments shall be added to get the required
shade.
Vol.II/85

(ii)

Preparation of surface: As in specification No. 3.8.2(A).

(iii)

Application: The solution shall be applied with a pad (gaddi) of fine

muslin cloth tied as per general practice. The pad shall be dipped into

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
the solution and wrint with the fingers and rub hard the surface. In this
way , first coat shall be given. After the previous coat is dried up, the
successive coat shall be given in the same fashion till a mirror like
surface is obtained. The finished surface shall have a uniform texture
and high globs. Dull.
Measurement: As stated in specification No. 3.8.2(A).

3.9.

Roof works:

3.9.1 Water proofing treatment :

3.9.1.1. Water proofing treatment:
Part (A)
(i)

The water proofing shall be got done from anyone of the proprietary
specialist firms listed in schedule I and under their direct supervision
and strictly in accordance with their specification duly approved by
employer/Architecture or the specification noted her under in part B.

(ii)

The treatment shall be guaranteed against any seepage / leakage /

dampness etc. for a period of 10 years from the date of handing over
of building to the employer the guarantee shall have to be given by the
proprietary specialist firm doing the treatment directly to the employer
on Judicial stamp paper in approved Performa of the employer before
commencement of water proofing works.

(iii)

No extra charges will be paid for testing of treated areas by pounding

with water, I the water shall be made to stand for 72 hours in 50 mm
height

throughout

the

period

of

testing.

In

case

of

any

leakage/dampness/seepage the same shall be rectified completely and

testing shall be redone until all treated surfaces are found to be free
from any leakage/dampness/seepage.
Vol.II / 86
(iv)

The minimum thickness of treatment shall not be less than 75 mm. The
slope of the finished treatment .on terrace shall not be flatter than 1 in
80.

Sen & Lall

(v)

Spec/Tender doc.
For the purpose of payment exposed area of the treated roof slab in
plan shall be measured vertical surfaces shall not be measured. In
case of sloping roof slab, exposed area of the inclined portion shall be
measured rounding of junction of terrace will not be measured
rounding of junction at terrace will not be measured or paid for
separately.

(B)

Roof Water proofing treatment will consist the following process:

(i)

15 mm thick cement mortar 1:4 with proprietary water proofing

additives laid over well cleaned and moist roof surface.

(ii)

125 mm thick (Average) brick bat coba laid in 15 mm to 25 mm. vide

joints grouted with cement mortar 1: 4 with proprietary water proofing
additives in desired slope minimum 65 mm. thickness at edge.

(iii)

Finishing to top with cat proof/water proof/leak proof or any other

proprietary jointless plaster 20 mm thick or I.P.S to red teracota
colour/shades as decided by Architects.

(iv)

Finished surface will be cured and tested by pounding of water.

(v)

Vertical surfaces of adjoining junction of wall parapet etc. shall be

treated with leak proof cement plaster with proprietary water proofing
additives upto 30 cm. height.

3.9.1.2.

LIME TERRACING: 40% lime mortar consisting of 1 lime and 2 surkhi

should be well mixed with 60% 12mm to 25mm thick over burnt brick at
aggregate gradation and should be laid to required slope and
consolidation is to be done with wooden templates upto required strength
as per I.S.S. This will be paid in cum. after consolidation. The corner and
wattes will be paid under this item and nothing will be paid extra for the
same.

Vol. II /87

3.9.2. RAIN WATER PIPES :

Sen & Lall

(i)

Spec/Tender doc.
H.C.I. rain water pipes hall be approved make laid vertically with lead
caulked joints. Joints for pipes shall have 34 grams of lead per inch
diameter of the pipe.
If in chase, such chase shall be filled with cement concrete 1:2:4
(1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone chips 1/2" down). All exposed
pipes shall be painted with three coats of synthetic enamel paint of
desired shade or aluminum paint.
Measurement: In running M. from mouth to end of shoe including all joints, special fittings, etc. heads, bends shoes etc. The rate
shall be inclusive of filling joints with cement or lead as specified,
painting, and filling in the chase or embedded in concrete member as
have been stated in schedule complete in all respects.

3.10

ALUMINIUM WORKS :

3.10.1 Anodized Aluminum fully glazed sliding window: Anodized Aluminum fully
glazed windows shall be part fixed and part sliding as per drawing. All
aluminum section shall be as per IS 3695 - 1969, relevant IS sections.
The section should be of Indal make anodized to 18 micron by reputed
company like ILKA and finished mat silver. Glazing shall be clear 4 mm float
glass of approved make fixed with gasket of ethylene proplene or PVC.
The sliding shutter should fabricated to move within grooves of frame on
rollers.
The entire work shall be completed as per drawing and directions of E/l and
Architects.

Vol. II /88
3.10.2 Anodized Aluminum fully glazed casement windows:

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Anodized Aluminum fully glazed casement windows shall be of side hung or

tophung as per drawings. All aluminium sections of Aluminium Alloys
extrusions shall be as per IS 733 1983 and IS 1285 - 1975.
The section should be of INDAL make anodized to 18 micron by reputed
Company like 'ILKA' and finished mat silver. Glazing shall be clear 4 mm Float
glass of approved make.
Windows or ventilators will be fully weather sealed, by using high quality and
durable EPDM/Neoprene weather seal.
Windows or ventilators will be fitted with stainless steel friction hinges. This
will be either simple fixed sash, top hung or side hung casement or any
combination of these to cater the different needs.
The entire work shall be completed as per drawing and direction of Architects
and E/I.

Vol.II / 89

FURTHER DETAILS OF 3.15

Sen & Lall

(i)

Spec/Tender doc.

SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS

Before placing their order, the contractor shall submit shop drawings
and samples for the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. If required, the
contractor shall also submit the necessary engineering calculations.
Shop drawings shall clearly show all work including mechanical
systems, the arrangement of components the sequence and details of
fabrication assembly and erection. These drawings shall also give full
size details, all dimensions and thicknesses, anchoring devices and
accessories.

(ii)

INSTALLATION
Just prior to installation, the frames and members shall be uncrated
and stacked on edge on level bearers and supported evenly. The
Contractor shall assemble the various components to form units as
called for in the drawings. The assembled units shall be placed in
correct final position in the openings and marks made at jambs, sills
and heads against holes provided in the frames for anchoring. The
frames shall then be removed from the openings and laid aside. Neat
holes with parallel sides of appropriate size shall be drilled at the
marking with an electric drill to house the expansion bolts.

Vol.II / 90

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Expansion bolts shall be inserted in the holes, struck with a light
hammer till the nut is forced into the anchor shell. The frames shall be
set in the openings by using wooden wedges at supports and shall be
plumbed in position. The wedges shall invariably be placed at the
meeting points of glazing bars and frames the frames shall be installed
straight, level , without distortion and anchored to the supports through
cadmium plated machine screws of required size threaded to
expansion bolts.
Where aluminium comes into contact with concrete brick work stone
masonry, plaster or dissimilar metals, it shall be coated with an
approved insulation lacquer, paint or plastic tape to ensure that electrochemical corrosion is avoided. Insulation material shall be trimmed off
to a clean flush line on completion. Adjustments shall be made for
smooth operation. Hardware and moving parts shall be lubricated.
Operating parts shall be protected against accumulation of dirt and
foreign matter.

(iii)

GLAZING
The glass panes shall be of quality and make approved by the
Engineer-in-charge and Architects and shall have properly squared
corners and straight edges. Damaged or

glass

be replaced with

new glass at no additional cost. Glass shall be delivered with factory

labels intact, indicating glass type, quality and thickness, labels shall
not be removed until installation has been accepted.

Vol.II /91
(iv)

WEATHER PROOFING

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Frame at door perimeter shall be fitted with non-porous polymeric
weather stripping and door bottom shall have an adjustable
elastomeric weather-strip weather strip shall not bind or prevent door
from closing easily and tightly with weather-tight contact between
metal.
Alternatively, gaps between frame and supports as well as any gaps in
the various sections shall be raked out as directed and filled with
mastic cement of approved make and colour to ensure complete water
tightness. The mastic cement shall be of such colour and composition
so that It would not stain the supports and shall receive paint without
bleeding. Moreover, it shall not sag or run and shall not set hard or dry
out under any weather conditions.

(v)

FINAL CLEANING :
Protective coating and warning markings shall remain undisturbed
untill final acceptance. Immediately prior to final inspection, temporary
protective covering or coating shall be removed and surfaces shall be
washed with a suitable thinner and left in a finished condition having
approved uniform appearance and free from all marks and blemishes.
wash and polish glass on both faces.

(vi)

GUARANTEE :
The Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee certifying that the
anodised finish shall be free from any defects for a period of 10 years.

3.10.3

Aluminium rolling & Hand Rail : Aluminium railing and hand rail shall
be different Indal section as shown in Architects drawing. Aluminium section
shall be Anodised in mat silver finish to 18 microns by reputed companies like
ILKA.
The entire work will be completed as per drawing and direction of Architects
and E/I.
Measurement will be of finished work i.e. from top of treads/ kerbs to top of
aluminium hand rail.

3.11

Vol.II / 92
WASHED STONE GRIT PLASTER :

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Washed stone grit plaster on exterior walls in two layers , under layer 12 mm
cement plaster 1:4( 1 Cement : 4 Coarse sand ) furrowing the under layer
with scratching tool, applying Cement Slurry on the under layer @ 2 Kg of
cement per Sqm , top layer 15 mm Cement plaster 1:1/2 : 2 ( 1 Cement :
Coarse sand : 2 Stone Clipping 10 mm nominal size ) in panels with grooves
all around as per approved pattern including scrubbing and washing, the top
layer with brushes and water to expose the stone chippings.
3.12. ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALL:
The fully glazed curtain wall - Bart fixed and Part Sliding (conforming to
INDAL series 55 Curtain wall System or any other reputed Manufacturer
approved by Architect/ Employer shall be in anodised aluminium electro
coloured bronze finish with anodising thickness 25 microns arrangement as
per drawing of the following specifications :(i)

All Aluminium Sections shall be INDAL make standard sections or

equivalent as per IS : 733-1983 & IS : 1285-1975.

(ii)

Vertical and horizontal assembly shall have flexible vinyl thermal break
located between transom / mullion and pressure plates. Sealants shall
be applied at the time of field installation and sealing of mullion tongue
at all connection between vertical (mullions) and horizontal (transome).

(iii)

Glazing fixing/ materials shall consist of an exterior EPDM dry glazed,

gasket and interior EPDM dry glazed gasket, setting blocks and anitshift blocks shall also be included.

(iv)

Fastening system of the curtain wall system to the building structure

shall be done by stainless steel or Powder (Zinc) coated steel anchors,
nuts and bolts.

(v)

Glass shall be 5 mm thick Reflective Bronze/Grey Belgian glass (or

equivalent Float glass) of approved quality. Glazing shall be done from
the exterior.

(vi)

Openable sliding two track single glazing window to be provided as

shown in drawing. Glass in sliding shutters to be same as fixed panels.

(vii)

Measurement shall be on overall area of curtain wall area. No extra for

openable panel will be paid.
The entire aluminium glazing curtain wall's Shop Drawings will have to
be get approved by the Consultant. If necessary, necessary
calculations would also have to be submitted.
Vol.II/ 93

Sen & Lall

3.13

Spec/Tender doc.

WATERPROOFING TREATMENT OF BASEMENT FLOOR SLAB AND

RETAINING WALL

3.13.1 RAFT
The sub-base concrete (lean concrete) to be rendered smooth with Cement :
Sand Mortar (1:3) while it is still green.
Application of two coats of 'TAPECRETE' - Acrylic Polymer modified
cementitious coating over the properly rendered surface.
Placing and fixing 18 mm dia. threaded Nozzles of suitable length in an
approximate grid pattern at a spacing not exceeding 1.5 M c/c on the entire
raft, prior to or during concreting. Similar threaded Nozzles shall also be fixed
at a regular interval not exceeding 1.5 M apart along the construction joints.
Adequate precaution shall be taken to keep the Nozzles plugged at both ends
to prevent them from getting clogged by concrete. Similar Nozzles shall also
be post fixed at critical points, if required.
Casting of RCC (Minimum M-20 grade and W/C ratio not exceeding 0.50)
admixed with 'CICO SUPAPLAST' - Superplasticiser-cum-Cement
Waterproofer, as per recommended dosage.
Injection of 'CICO NON-SHRINK POLYMERIC WATERPROOF GROUTING
COMPOUND" admixed with Cement milk through the Nozzles under pressure
by pump. The grout should flow through all pores, cracks and shrinkages
thereby sealing them.
Sealing off the Nozzles after the Injection operation is over with 'CICO Quick
Setting Admixture"' admixed with Cement.
3.13.2 Retaining WALL
Placing and fixing 18 mm dia. threaded Nozzles of suitable length in an
approximate grid pattern at a spacing not exceeding 1.5 M c/c. on the entire
retaining wall prior to or during concreting. Similar threaded Nozzles Shall
also be provided at a regular, interval not exceeding 1.5 M apart along the
construction joints. Adequate precaution shall be taken to keep the Nozzles
plugged at both ends to prevent them from getting clogged by cement. Similar
Nozzles shall also be post fixed at critical points, if required.
Casting of RCC walls (Minimum M-20 grade and W/C ratio not exceeding
0.50) admixed with 'ClCO SUPAPLAST' - Superplasticisep-cum-Cement
Waterproofer, as per recommended dosage.
Application of two coat of 'TAPECRETE' - Acrylic Polymer modified
cementitious coating over the properly rendered external face of the Retaining
Wall.
Injection of CICO NON-SHRINK POLYMERIC WATERPROOF GROUTING
COMPOUND admixed with cement milk through the Nozzles under pressure
by pump. The grout should flow through all pores, cracks and shrinkages
thereby sealing them.
Sealing off the Nozzles after the Injection operation is Over with 'CICO Quick
Setting Admixture' admixed with Cement.
Vol.II / 94

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.13.3 GUARANTEE
The work carried out by us shall be covered by a written Maintenance
Guarantee for a period of ten years. However, such Guarantee shall be valid
and operative only if full payment is effected.
The work shall be done by the structural waterproofing Co. Pvt. Ltd. as per
the specification noted above or any other equivalent approved Agency.
The entire work shall be completed as per direction of Engineer Incharge /
Architect.
.3.14 Miscellaneous Works
3.14.1 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT : Pre-construction anti-termite treatment shall
be done by Specialist Agency approved by the employer The .civil Contractor
and the specialist firm will have to furnish Performance Guarantee for the
executed work. The Civil Contractor will be equally responsible for. The
performance of Specialist work as well. Day to-day account of using chemical
in the work will be maintained at the site by the Contractor and specialist
Agency.
3.14.2 EXPANSION JOINTS, AND ARTICULATION JOINTS: shall be carried out as
per standard drawing. The joint shall be filled with special expansion jointing
compound of Burmashell or equivalent make, and measured in running ft. of
the complete item. Articulation joint of copper plate as per standard
specification shall be fixedas per instructions.
3.14.3 ASBESTOS CEMENT PRODUCTS: Corrugated and Trefford sheet asbestos
roofing, sliding rain water pipes of Asbestos Cement (private) Ltd., or any
other approved make.
The work shall conform to standard specification and will be done in
accordance with the latest code of practice issued by M/s Asbestos Cement
(Private) ltd., or any other manufacturer.
All laps cuttings, placing should be done as per I.S.I. or manufacturers
specifications. The sheets should be fixed with galvanised J or L bolts of
required dia or as specified with neat bitumen and galvanised iron washers,
all of approved quality.
Vol.II / 95

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Measurement: For the actual work done and units as specified in the
schedule of quantities. Nothing extra shall be admissible for overlaps,
wastage of work in any shape.
3.14.4 SPECIAL MATERIALS : All materials of patented brand shall be used as per
manufacturer's

specifications.

The

Contractor

shall

produce

these

specifications and hand them over to the Architects and the Clerk of works
before starting the work.
3.14.5 Any items of work not covered by the above specifications will be carried out
as relevant I.S.I. Specifications and measured as per I.S.I. method of
measurement of building work or as approved by the Architects.

Vol.II /96

Sen & Lall

3.15

Spec/Tender doc.

WATER RETAINING STRUCTURE

Structure shall be of reinforced cement concrete of mix and thickness as
specified in the Architect's Drawings. Concrete shall be dense and
impermeable. Which can be achieved by proper gradation of aggregate,
proper compaction, and by proper control of water cement ratio.
To achieve water tightness of the concrete, waterproofing materials shall be
used as per manufacturers specifications unless it shall be mentioned
specifically in the schedule.
The inner surface of the structure shall be plastered with 20 mm. thick cement
mortar plaster 1:3 with 5% waterproof compound in two layers of 10 mm. thick
each, in quick succession including punning with floating coat of neat cement.
Outside surface shall also be plastered with cement mortar 1:6, 15 mm thick
with 5% waterproof compound.
All the connections pipe shall be fixed in proper position as per Drawings at
the time of casting.

The structure shall be tested for its water tightness per I.S. 3370 (Part)-1965.

Vol.II /97

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SPECIFICATION
FOR
LANDSCAPE & HORTICULTURE WORKS

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SPECIFICATION FOR LANDSCAPE & HORTICULTURE WORKS

1.0

GENERAL:

1.1

Scope: Contractor to furnish all materials labour and related items necessary
to complete the work indicated on drawing and specified herein including
maintenance of the premises for 12 months after completion.

2.0

MATERLALS:

2.1 Plant materials:

Plant materials shall be well formed and shaped type, and free from disease,
insects and defects such as knots, windburn, injuries, abrasion or
disfigurement. All plant materials shall be healthy, sound, vigorous, free from
disease, insect pests, or their eggs, and shall have healthy, well- developed
root systems. All plants shall be hardy under climatic conditions similar to
those in the locality of the project. Plants supplied shall conform to the names
listed on both the plan and the plant list. No plant material will be accepted if
branches are damaged or broken. All material must be protected from the sun
and weather until planted. Any nursery stock shall have been inspected by the
Landscape Architect.
All plants shall conform to the requirements specified in the plant list, except
those plants Larger than specified may be used if approved, but use of such
plants shall not increase the contract price. If the use of the larger plant is
approved, the spread of roots or ball of earth shall be increased in proportion
to the size of the plant.
Deliver plants with legible identification labels.
The minimum acceptable size of all trees after pruning, with branches in
normal positions, will confirm to the measurement specified in the Bill of
Quantities unless stated otherwise. Caliper measurement will be taken at a
point on the trunk 1.0 meter above natural ground. Plants that meet the
Vol. II / 98

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

specified measurement, but do

not possess a normal configuration or

balance of height and spread will be rejected All trees supplied will be
branched as specified in the Bill of Quantities. All trees supplied must have
terminal shoots. All specimen trees must have a minimum crown spread of
not less than half the size of the overall height.
2.2 Topsoil: (Good earth) pH range 6.5 to 7.5
Topsoil or good earth shall be a friable loam; typical of cultivated top soils of the
locality containing at least 20% of decayed organic matter (humus). It shall be
taken from a well-drained arable site. It shall be free of subsoil, stones, earth
clods, sticks, roots or other objectionable extraneous matter or debris. It shall
contain no toxic material. No topsoil shall be delivered in a muddy condition.
2.3 Fertilizer:
Dry farm yard manure shall be used measurement shall be in stacks, with 8%
reduction for payment. It shall be free from extraneous matter, harmful bacteria
insects or chemicals.
2.4 Root System:
The root system shall be conducive to successful transplantation . Where
necessary, the root-ball shall be preserved by support with hessian or other
suitable material. On soils where retention of a good ball is not possible, the root
should be suitably protected in some other way which should not cause any
damage to root.
2.5 Condition:
Trees and shrubs shall be substantially free from pests and diseases, and shall
be materially undamaged Torn or lacerated roots shall be pruned before
dispatch. No roots shall be subjected to adverse conditions ,such as prolonged
exposure to adverse conditions, such as prolonged exposure to drying winds or
subjection to water-logging, between lifting and delivery.
Vol.II / 99

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

2.6 Supply and substitution:

Upon submission of evidence that certain materials including plant materials are
not available at time. Of contract, the contractor shall be permitted to substitute
other material and plants, with an equidistant adjustment of price. All
substitutions shall be subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect.
2.7 Packaging:
Packaging shall be adequate for the protection of the plants and such as to
avoid heating or drying out .
2.8 Marking:
Each specimen of tree and shrub, or each bundle, shall be legibly labeled with
the following particulars:
(A) Its name
(B) The name of the supplier, unless otherwise agreed.
(C) The date of dispatch from the nursery.
2.9 Miscellaneous Items:
The nominated Landscape Contractor will allow for the following list of materials
in the rates for other items as stated in the Bill of Quantities.
1. Hose and Wire Ties
galvanized iron wire.
2. Wood Tree Stakes
grade

: 12mm diameter rubber with #12 gauge

50mm x 50mm x 2.5m rough construction

3. Hose Pipe
4.Lawn Mower.

Vol.II / 100

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Execution:
2.0

FINE GRADING :
The nominated Landscape contractor will adjust with screened soil as
necessary. Grades will be smooth and even on a uniform plane without abrupt
changes or pockets and slope it away from the building. The nominated
Landscape Contractor will verify the surface drainage of planting areas and
notify the Landscape Architect of any discrepancies, obstructions or other
conditions considered detrimental to proper execution of the work and plant
growth.
Landscape work will be tied to the existing condition such as existing trees,
palms, landscape features, utility lines, pavement curbes, etc. Finished grade
will bear proper relationship to such control. The nominated Landscape
Contractor will adjust all work as necessary to meet the conditions and fulfill
the intention of the
Drawings After initial settlement the finish grade will be :
1. Turf
2. Shrubs and Ground covers

20mm lower than adjacent walks, kerbs.

:

40mm lower than adjacent walks, kerbs.

Prior to planting operation, the contractor will ensure all planting areas free of,
weed, debris, rocks over 25mm in diameter and clumps pf earth that will not
break up.
4.0 TREE PLANTING :
4.1 Trees should be supplied with adequate protection as approved. After
delivery, if planting is not to carried out immediately, balled plants should be
placed cheek to cheek and the ball covered with sand to prevent drying out.
Bare rooted plants can be heeled in by placing the roots in a prepared trench
and covering them with earth which should be watered in to avoid air
pockets round the roots.
4.2 Digging of pits:
Tree pits shall be dug a minimum of three weeks prior to backfilling. The pits
shall be 120cms in diameter and 120cms deep. While digging the pits, the
topsoil up to a depth of 30cms may be kept aside, if found good (depending
upon site conditions), and mixed with the rest of the soil. If the soil is bad
below, it shall be replaced with the soil mixture as specified further her in. If
the soil is normal it shall be mixed with manure ; river sand shall be added to
the soil if it is heavy.
Vol.II / 101

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

4.3 Flooding of pits to reduce air pockets:

The soil backfilled, watered through and gently pressed down, a day previous to
planting, to make sure that it may not further settle down after planting. The soil
shall be pressed down firmly by treading it down. Leaving a shallow depression
all round for watering.
4.4 Planting :
No tree pits shall be dug until final tree positions have been pegged out for
approval Care shall be taken that the plant sapling when planted is not buried
deeper than in the nursery or in the pot.
Planting should not be carried in water logged soil .
Plant trees at the original soil depth; the soil marks on the stem is indication of
this and it should be maintained on the finished level, allowing for setting of the
soil after planting. All plastic and other imperishable containers should be
removed before planting. Any broken or damaged roots should be cut back to
sound growth.
The bottom of the planting pit should be covered with 50mmto75mmof soil. Bare
roots should be spread evenly in the planting pit; and small mound in the center
of the pits on which the roots are placed will aid an even spread. Soil should be
placed around the roots, gently shaking the trees to allow soil the particles to
shift into the root system to ensure close contact with all roots and to prevent air
pockets. Back fill soil should be firm as filling proceeds, layer by layer, care
being taken to avoid damaging the roots, as follows:
25gms of 50% BHC shall be sprinkled on walls of pit, and initially pit shall be
filled to 200 depth with earth mixed with 10gm of BHC. The balance earth shall
be filled in a mixture of 1:2(1 part manure to 2 part earth). A ldrin or equivalent
shall be applied every 15 day in a mixture 0.2% which comes to 6cc in 1 liter of
water.
4.5 Staking :
Newly planted trees must be held firmly although not rigidly by staking to
prevent a pocket forming around the stem and newly formed fibrous roots being
broken by mechanical pulling as the tree rocks.
Methods :
The main methods of staking shall be :
(A)
A single vertical stake, 900mm longer than the clear stem of the tree,
driven 600mm to 900mm into the soil.
Vol. II / 102

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

(B)

Two stakes as above driven firmly on either side of the tree with cross-bar
to which the stem is attached. Suitable for small bare-rooted or balled
material.

(C)

A sigle stake driven in at an angle 45 and leaning towards the prevailing

wind, the stem just below the lowest branch being attached to the stake,
Suitable for small bare-rooted or balled material.

The end of stake should be pointed and the lower 1m to 1.2m should be coated
with
Non-injurios wood preservative allowing at least 150mm above ground level.
Tying :
Each tree should be firmly secured to the stake so as to prevent excessive
movement. Abrasion must be avoided by using a buffer, rubber or hessian,
between the tree and stake. The tree should be secured at a point just below its
lowest branch, and also just above ground level; normally two ties should be
used for tree. These should be adjusted or replaced to allow for growth.
4.6 Watering
The contractor should allow for the adequate watering in all newly planted trees
and shrubs immediately after planting and he shall during the following growing
season, keep the plant material well watered.
4.7 Fertilizing :
Fertilizing shall be carried out by application of the following fertilizers, every
15 days from the beginning of the monsoon till the end of winter :
-

Organic well-rotted dry farmyard manure :0.05cum or 1tassla

Urea 25gm

Or
- ammonium sulphate 25gm
Potassium sulphate 25gm
All shrubs, which are grown, shall be well soaked prior to planting.
Watering in and subsequent watering of summer planted container-grown plants
is essential.

Vol. II / 103

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

5.0 SHRUB PLANTING IN PLANTERS AND BEDS

All areas to be planted with shrubs shall be excavated, trenched to a depth of
750mm, refilling the excavated earth after braking clods and mixing with
manure in the ratio 8:1(8parts of stacked volume of earth after reduction by
20%:1 part of stacked volume of manure after reduction by 8%).
Positions of shrubs to be planted should be marked out in accordance with the
planting plan. When shrubs are set out, precautions should be taken to prevent
root Tall shrubs may need staking : which shall be provided if approved by the
landscape Architect, depending upon the conditions of individual plant
specimen.
For planting shrubs and ground cover shrubs in planters, good earth shall be
mixed with manure in proportion as above and filled in planters.
drying. Planting holes 40cm dia and 40cm deep should be excavated for
longer shrubs. Polythene and other non-perishable containers should be
removed and any badly damaged roots carefully pruned, The shrubs should
then be set in holes so that the soil level, after settlement, will be at the
original soil mark on the stem of the shrub. The hole should be back-filled to
half its depth and firmed by treading.
The reminder of the soil can than be returned and again firmed by treading.
6.0 GRASSING
6.1

Preparation
During period prior to planting the ground shall be maintained free from weeds.
Grading and final leveling of the lawn shall be completed at least three weeks
prior to the actual sowing. Regular watering shall be continued until sowing by
dividing the lawn area into portions of approx. 5mts square by constructing
small bunds to retain water. These bunds shall be leveled just prior to sowing
of grass plants. At the time of actual planting of grass, it shall be ensured that
the soil has completely settled.

Vol.II / 104

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

6.2 Soil:
The soil itself shall be ensured to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect to
be a good fibrous loam, rich in humus.
6.3 Sowing the grass roots.
Grass roots (Selection No.1) shall be obtained from a grass patch, seen and
water sprayed over the same after keeping the stock in a protected from sun
and dry wind.
Grass stock received at site may be stored for a maximum of three day. In case
grassing for some areas is scheduled for a later date fresh stock of grass roots
shall be ordered and obtained.
6.4 Execution :
Small roots shall be dibbled about 7.5cms apart into the prepared grounds.
Grass areas will only be accepted as reaching practical completion when
germination has proved satisfactory and all weeds have been removed.
6.5 Maintenance :
As soon as the grass is approximately 3cm high it shall be rolled with a light
wooden roller in fine, dry weather-and when it has grown to 5 to 8cm above
ground, weeds
must be removed and regular cutting with the scythe and rolling must be
begum. A top-dressing of farm yard manure to the square yard or well
decomposed well broken sludge manure shall be applied when the grass is
sufficiently secure in the ground to bear the mowing machine, the blades must
be raised an inch above the normal level for the first two or three cuttings. That
is to say, the grass should be cut so that it is from 4to5cms in length, instead of
the 3cm necessary for mature grass.
In the absence of rain, the monsoon the lawn shall be watered with sprinklers,
three days soaking the soil to a depth of at least 20cms. Damage, failure or
dying back of grass due to neglect of watering especially for seeding out of
normal season shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Any shrinkage below
the specified levels during the contract or defects liability period shall be the
rectified at the contractors
expense.
The contractor is to exercise care in the use of rotary cultivator and mowing
machines to reduce to a minimum the hazards of flying stones and brickbats. All
rotary mowing machines are to be fitted with safety guards.

Vol. II / 105

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

6.6 Rolling :
Lawn mover with roller shall be used periodically, taking care that the lawn is not
too wet and sodden.
6.7 Edgings :
These shall be kept neat and must be cut regularly with the edging shears.
6.8 Watering :
Water shall be applied at least once in three days during dry weather. Water
whenever done should be though and should wet the soil at least upto a depth
of 20cms.
6.9 Weeding :
Prior to regular moving the contractor shall carefully remove rank and unsightly
weeds.
7.0 MAINTENANCE
7.1 The landscape contractor shall maintain all planted areas within the landscape
contract boundaries for one year until the area is handed over in whole or in
phases. Maintenance shall include replacement of dead plants, watering,
weeding, cultivating, control of insects, fungus and other diseases by means of
spraying with an approved insecticide or fungicide, pruning, and other
horticulture operations necessary for the proper growth of the plants and for
keeping the landscape contract area neat in appearance.
7.2 Pruning and repairs :
Upon completion of planting work under the contract all trees should be pruned
and all injuries repaired where necessary. The amount of pruning shall be
limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead or injured twigs and to
compensate for the loss of roots and result of transplanting operations.
Pruning and removal of any part of plant materials will be done with clean sharp
tools. Tools used to carry out the pruning work must be appropriate for the task.
The surface of tools and equipment will be sterilized after use on the plant
materials that are suspected or known to be diseased.
Cuts on plant materials will be made into the living tissues to induce callousing.
Cut surface will be flat, sharp and without jagged or torn edges.
Pruning shall be done in such a manner to change the natural habitat or special
shape of the trees. Pruning operation will consider carefully the natural growth
pattern of branches on the tree, palm or shrub. Tree branches will be pruned
back to the collar at the base of the branch.
Vol.II / 106

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

7.3 Tree guards :

Where tree guards are necessary, care should be taken to ensure that they do
not impede natural movement or restrict growth.
7.4 Nursery Stock :
Planting should be carried out as soon as possible after reaching the site. Where
planting must of necessity be delayed, care should be taken to protect the plants
from pilfering or damage from people or animals. Plants with bare roots should be
heeled- in as soon as received or otherwise protected from drying out, and others
set closely to gather and protected from the wind. If planting is to be delayed for
more than a week, packed plants should be unpacked, the bundles opened up and
each group of plants heeled in separately and clearly labeled. If for any reason the
surface of the roots becomes dry the roots should be thoroughly soaked before
planting.
7.5 Protective fencing :
According to local environment shrubs shall be protected adequately from vandalism
until established.

Vol. II / 107

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

7.6 Manpower
1. 1 Supervisor full-time on 1 day per month.
Gardner's full-time on 6 day per week.
2. A back-up team will operate separately for two (2) days on major trees,
palms,
Shrubs, groundcovers and lawn maintenance.
3. A grass cutting team will operate separately from the Maintenance team.
Grass cutting work to be completed in 4 days on each operation.
4. A separate tree pruning team will operate once every six months. Tree
Pruning works to be completed in 2 days on each operation.
7.7 Clean- up works
There shall be areas designated by Landscape Architect for the contractor to
carry out Clean-up works.
These shall include the following :
1. Removal of dead and/or over hanging branches of existing trees, palms,
shrubs and groundcovers .
2. Removal of any garbage and unsightly foreign materials.
3. Removal of dead vines and plant materials.
The contractor shall prevent damages to the existing plant material, identified
to be conserved. The plant materials that are to be conserved are damaged
beyond use during the clean-up operations, the contractor shall be liable to
replace the plant materials at their own expense.
7.8 Restoration :
The contractor is responsible for the use of all material, labor and equipments
and any injury to the plant material, labor and equipment and will be repaired by
the contractor at his own expense.
7.9 Completion :
On completion the ground shall be formed overt and left tidy.

Vol.II / 108

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Specification
for
Sanitary & Plumbing

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - PLUMBING WORKS

Section 1

General Requirements

1.

Should be read in conjunction with General Conditions of Contract for any

discrepancy General Conditions of Contract will prevail.

1.1

Scope of work

1.1.1 Work under this contract shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials,
equipment and appliances necessary and required. The Contractor is
required to completely furnish all the plumbing and other specialized services
as described hereinafter and as specified in the schedule of quantities and/or
shown on the plumbing drawings.
1.1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the work shall include the
following:
Plumbing Works includes:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
2

Plumbing Fixtures, Chrome Plated Fittings & Accessories.

Soil, Waste & Vent Pipes & Fittings.
Rainwater Pipes & Fittings.
Internal Water Supply System (Cold & Hot).
Drainage of campus up to external services.
Solar Water System.

Work Not Included In This Contract

2.2.1 To be executed by building contractor

a)
3

Manholes, Pipe Inserts and ladders for RCC water tanks.

Licence and Permits.

Contractor must hold a valid plumbing or any other licence as required by the
municipal authority or other competent authority under whose jurisdiction the
work falls.
--- xxx --End Section 1
General Requirements
Vol.II / 109

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES

1.0
Scope of work
1.1.

Work under this section shall consist of providing all materials & labour
necessary and required to completely install all sanitary fixtures, chromium
plated fittings and accessories as required by the drawings and specified in
the Bill of Quantities.

1.2

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the sanitary fixtures shall
include the following:a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

1.3.

Sanitary fixtures
Shower trays
Chromium plated fittings
Porcelain or stainless steel sinks
Accessories e.g. towel rods, toilet paper holders, soap dish etc.
Electrically operated fixtures

Whether specifically mentioned or not, the rates quoted for providing and
installation of the fixtures, appliances and accessories shall include all tools
and tackles, fixing devices, nuts, bolts, screws, hangers as required.

1.4.

All exposed pipes within toilets and near fixtures shall be chromium plated
brass or copper unless otherwise specified.
2.0 General
2.1

Sanitary ware and C.P. fittings as specified in Bill of Quantities. All fixing
devices for proper fixing arrangement, nuts, bolts, screws as required to
complete the item in working condition, even if the same is not specifically
mentioned the Bill of Quantities, Specifications or shown on the drawings
shall be provided by the contractor.

2.2

Fixing screws shall be half round head stainless steel wood screws or bolts
with Stainless Steel washers. Rusted iron screws will not be permitted.

2.3

All fittings and fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike manner true to
level and heights shown on the drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations. Care shall be taken to fix all inlet and outlet
pipes at correct positions. Faulty locations shall be made good and any
damage to the finished floor, tiling or terrace shall be made good at
Contractor's cost.

2.4

Contractor shall provide poly-sulphide sealant appropriate for its use for all
fixtures fixed near wall, marble and edges at no extra cost.

Vol.II / 110

Sen & Lall

3.0

Spec/Tender doc.

Sanitary Fixtures
European WC

3.1

European WC shall be wash down or siphonic type floor or wall mounted

set flushed by means of flush valve, exposed or concealed type flush
valve or by imported type flush valve which will be an integral part of the wall
system. Framework, walling and finishing will not form a part of the
contractors work. Where applicable flush pipe/ bend shall be connected to
the WC by means of a suitable rubber adapter. Wall hung WC shall be
supported by CI floor mounted chair.

3.2

Each WC set shall be provided with a plastic seat shall be with rubber buffers
and chromium plated hinges.

3.3

Plastic seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationary in vertical

position without falling down on the WC. Each WC shall be suitable for
flushing in low volume of water 5-6 litres.

3.4

Flush valve shall be provided with all internal flushing mechanism, any frame
work required for fixing cistern has to be provided by the contractor.

4.0

Wash Basins

4.1

Wash basins shall be fixed at proper heights as shown on drawings. If height

is not specified, the rim level shall be 79 cms or as directed by Project
Manager.

4.2

Each basin shall be supported on MS galvanized or painted C.I. brackets

and securely fixed to wall for under/above counter installation. The design of
the brackets shall suit the basin selected and as recommended by the
manufacturer.

4.3

Each basin shall be provided with a single pillar tap/hot & cold CP mixer
without pop up waste fittings, CP brass waste 32 mm dia. CP cast brass
bottle trap, CP pipe to wall and flange as specified in the BOQ.

4.4

The edge between the fixture and the wall or the counter shall be sealed with

approved type of poly-sulphide sealant at no extra cost.

4.5

Each wash basin connection (separately for hot and cold) shall be provided
with C.P. angle valves with CP wall flange and C.P. copper connecting pipe of
required length.
Vol.II / 111

Sen & Lall

5.0

Spec/Tender doc.

Sinks
Sinks used shall be of any of the following types:

5.1

For kitchens, pantries, and designated utility rooms the sinks shall be
stainless steel sinks with or without drain boards.

5.2

Each sink shall be supported by MS galvanized or painted C.I. brackets and

clips and the basin securely fixed to wall or on the counter. The design of the
brackets shall suit the basin selected and as recommended by the
manufacturer.

5.3

Stainless steel sinks shall be provided with PVC flexible waste pipe, basket
waste with plug (as supplied by manufacturer).

5.4

Each sink shall be provided with hot & cold CP mixer with approved type of
swan neck spout or individual cock as specified in Bill of Quantities.

6.0

Urinals

6.1

Urinals shall be fixed with 15 mm dia CP spreader, 32 mm dia C.P. domical

waste and C.P. cast brass bottle trap with pipe and wall flange, and shall be
fixed to wall by C.I. brackets and C.I. wall clips as recommended by
manufacturers. (CI brackets and clips shall be painted as approved by Project
Manager)

6.2

The contractor shall provide chromium plated brass spreaders of required

type.

6.3

Waste pipes for urinals shall be uPVC class 6 kg/cm 2 (IS: 4985) with all
fittings and connected to the urinal trap independently or as directed by the
Project Manager.

6.4

Flushing system comprising of Infra-red photocell electrical mains or battery

operated solenoid valve concealed in recessed box with stainless steel plate
shall be fixed with all accessories, wiring and connecting piping complete as
required to provide satisfactory functioning of system to be able to flush the
urinal before and after use by a person.

6.5

The edge between the fixture and the wall shall be sealed with approved type
of poly-sulphide sealant.
Vol.II / 112

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

7.0 Urinal partitions

7.1

Urinal partitions shall be white glazed vitreous china or 25 mm thick marble of

size specified in the Bill of Quantities or directed by the Project Manager
/Architects.

7.2

Porcelain partitions shall be fixed at proper heights with stainless steel

screws/ bolts, and anchor fasteners and painted MS clips as recommended
by the manufacturer and directed by Project Manager.

7.3

The edge between the fixture and the wall or the counter shall be sealed with
approved type of poly-sulphide sealant at no extra cost.

8.0

Accessories

8.1

Accessories shall be of the following types:

Towel rails
Towel rings
Coat hooks
Soap dispensers
Soap dishes
Hand drier
Air purifier container

8.2

Accessories shall be fixed with stainless steel half round head screws and
cup washers in wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting
and making good the walls.

8.3

Porcelain accessories shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1 : 2 (1

cement : 2 coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work. The flange of
the recessed fixture shall cover the recess in the wall fully.

9.0 Measurement
9.1

Sanitary fixtures shall be measured by numbers.

9.2

Rates for all items mentioned above shall be inclusive of cutting holes and
chases and making good the same, stainless steel screws, nuts, bolts and
any fixing arrangements required and recommended by manufacturers,
testing and commissioning.

9.3

Project Managers decision with respect to the correct interpretation regarding

mode of measurement shall be final and binding on the contractor.
END OF SECTION 2
Plumbing Fixtures
Vol.II / 113

Sen & Lall

SECTION 3

Spec/Tender doc.
Soil, Waste, Vent & Rainwater Pipes & Fittings

Scope of work

1.1

Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials,

equipments and appliances necessary and required to completely install all soil,
waste, vent and rain water pipes and fittings as required by the drawings and as
given in the Schedule of Quantities.
1.2

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the work shall include the
following:a) Vertical and horizontal soil, waste, vent and rain water pipes, and fittings,
joints, clamps and connections to fixtures.
b) Soil & rainwater pipes in stilt floor ceiling up to external sewers/drains.
c) Connection of all pipes to sewer lines as shown on the drawings at ground
floor levels.
d) Floor and urinal traps, cleanout plugs, inlet fittings and rainwater
heads/Khurras.
e)
Testing of all pipe lines.

General requirements

2.1

All materials shall be new and best quality conforming to Latest IS Code and
specifications and subject to the approval of the Project Manager /Architect.

2.2

Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as

required in a neat workmanlike manner.

2.3

Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and
maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.

2.4

Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps a

intervals specified.

2.5

Access doors for fittings and cleanouts shall be so located that they are easily
accessible for repair and maintenance.

Piping System

3.1

Soil, Waste & Vent Pipes

a)

The Soil & Waste pipe system above ground has been planned as a "two
pipe system" as defined in IS: 5329, having separate pipes for waste from
kitchen sinks, bath tubs, showers, washbasins, condensate drains and floor
drains and is approved by the local authority.
Vol.II / 114

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

b)

Vertical soil & waste stacks shall be connected to a common horizontal

drain pipe at stilt floor ceiling or to an external manhole directly wherever
feasible as shown on the drawings.

c)

Floors of toilets, kitchens and other service areas located on structural

slab are SUNK by 100 mm to accommodate waste pipes from fixtures

d)

Air Admittance valves (maxi vent & mini vent) shall be provided for soil &
waste pipe on vertical stacks. It may also be provided for waste lines where
shown on the drawings.

e)

Maxi filtra with activated carbon filter shall be provided at all sewer lines at
the starting manholes.

3.2

Rainwater Pipes

a)
b)

All terraces shall be drained by providing down-takes rainwater pipes.

A separate piped drainage system for slopping roof with leaders shall be
provided.

c)

Rainwater pipes are separate and independent connected to the external

storm water drainage system as shown on the drawings.

d)

Rainwater in enclosed courtyards shall be collected in catch-basins and

connected to storm water drains.

e)

Any dry weather flow from waste appliances, AHU's pump rooms, shall be
connected to the sewerage system only.

3.3

Balcony/Planter drainage
Open balconies, terraces, planters and formal landscape areas will be
drained by a separate pipe connected to external storm water drainage
system.

3.4

uPVC pipes for SWR system (for soil waste and rain water)

3.4.1 Pipes
3.4.2 All pipes shall be straight and smooth and inside free from cracks and other
manufacturing defects. Pipes shall be self fit conforming to IS: 13952 type B
for soil & waste and of type A for rain water.
3.4.3 Pipes shall be joined by approved type solvent cement made with solvent
cement.
3.5.
3.5.1

Fittings
Fittings shall conform to the Indian Standard recommended for the
pipes. Pipes and fittings must be of matching IS specification. Interchange of
pipes of one standard with fittings on the other standard will not be permitted.
Vol.II / 115

Sen & Lall

3.5.2

Spec/Tender doc.

Fittings shall be of the required degree of curvature with or without access

door.

3.5.3 Connection from a vertical stack or position to a horizontal line shall be made
only by a Y junction.
3.6

Fixing

3.6.1 All vertical pipes shall be fixed truly vertical to walls with approved type of
uPVC saddle clamp. Branch pipes shall be connected to the stack at the
same angle as that of the fittings. No collars shall be used on vertical stacks.
Each stack shall be terminated at top with a cowl (terminal guard). However
shaft where more vertical pipes run, the pipes may be fixed to the slotted
angle/channel supports fixed to walls at intervals specified here under:3.6.2 Horizontal pipes running along ceiling shall be fixed on galvanized structural
adjustable clamps (Clevis clamps) of special design shown on the drawings
or as directed. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to uniform slope and the clamps
adjusted to the proper levels so that the pipes fully rest on them.
3.6.3 Contractor shall provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts during the
construction. He shall provide all necessary information to the Project
Manager/Building Contractor for making such provisions in the structure as
necessary. All damages shall be made good to restore the surfaces at no
extra cost.
4.0

Clamps

4.1

Holder bat clamps shall be of standard design and fabricated from

galvanized MS standard flats 40x3 mm thick and 12 mm dia MS rod and 6
mm nuts and bolts. Holder bat clamps shall be fixed in cement concrete 1 : 2 :
4 mix blocks 10x10x10 cms deep.

4.2

Where holder bat clamps are to be fixed in RCC column or slotted angles,
walls or beam they shall be fixed with galvanized 40x3 mm flat iron "U" type
clamps with anchor fasteners of approved design or 6 mm nuts and bolts.

4.3

For SWR pipes conforming to IS: 13592 shall be clamped to wall with
approved type of uPVC saddle clamp/U-clamp or as given in the Bill of
quantities.

4.4

Structural clamps shall be fabricated by electro-welding from MS structural

members e.g. rods, angles, channels flats as per detailed drawing. Contractor
shall provide all nuts & bolts, welding material. All fabricated clamps, nuts,
bolts and washers shall be not dipped galvanized.
Vol .II / 116

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

4.5

Galvanized slotted angle/channel supports on walls shall be provided

wherever shown on drawings. Angles/channels shall be of sizes shown on
drawings or specified in schedule of quantities. Angles/channels shall be fixed
to brick walls with bolts embedded in cement concrete blocks and to RCC
walls with suitable anchor fasteners. The spacing of support bolts horizontally
shall not exceed 1 m.

4.6

Wherever MS clamps are required to be anchored directly to brick walls,

concrete slabs, beams or columns, nothing extra shall be payable for
clamping arrangement and making good with cement concrete 1 : 2 : 4 mix (1
cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 mm stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as
directed by the Project Manager.

4.7

For sleeves, anchor fasteners and clamp spacing chart shall be as follows:
CLAMP AND PIPE SUPPORT SPACING

5.0

Traps

5.1

Floor traps
Floor traps shall be siphon type full bore P or S type uPVC having a minimum
50 mm deep seal. The trap and main waste pipes in toilets having 100 mm
sinking shall run below slab and shall be supported from the ceiling below.
The trap and waste pipes in sunken area (where required) shall be set in
cement concrete blocks firmly supported on the structural floor. The blocks
shall be in 1 : 2 : 4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone aggregate 20
mm nominal size) and extended to 40 mm below finished floor level.
Contractor shall provide all necessary shuttering and centering for the blocks.
Vol. II / 117

Sen & Lall

5.2

Spec/Tender doc.

Urinal traps
Urinal traps/horn shall be uPVC P or S traps with or without vent shall be fixed
as specified for floor traps.

5.3

Floor trap inlet

Bath room traps and connections shall ensure free and silent flow of
discharging water. Where specified, Contractor shall provide a special type
inlet fitting fabricated from uPVC pipe without, with one, two or three inlet
sockets fixed on side to connect the waste pipe. Joint between waste and
hopper inlet socket of the trap shall be joined with solvent cement
recommended by the manufacturer. Inlet shall be connected to an uPVC. P or
S trap. Floor trap inlet hoppers and the traps if set in cement concrete blocks
as specified in para above without extra charge. UPVC multi-inlet trap can be
used where ever possible to be decided by the project Engineer.
Trap & Seals
All traps shall be self cleaning design and the seal depth shall be as specified
below wherever the traps are not integral with the appliances:
Appliance or ware
Lavatory /wash basin
Sink
Kitchen
floor
drain
fabricated drain boxes
Urinals
AHUs

5.4

of

Material

Trap Type

C.P. cast
brass
C.P. cast
brass
uPVC/C.I.

32 mm dia Bottle

Seal
depth(mm)
75 mm

40 mm dia Bottle

75 mm

75/100 mm dia P or
S
100 mm dia P or S
75 mm dia P or S

50 mm

uPVC/C.I.
uPVC/C.I.

50 mm
50 mm

Floor Gratings
Floor and urinal traps shall be provided with 100-150mm square or round
CP/stainless steel grating, with rim of approved design and shape. Minimum
thickness shall be 3 mm or as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.

5.5

Jointing
Jointing with solvent cement shall be applied to uPVC waste pipes
(confirming to IS 4985) and fittings or as recommended by the
manufacturers.

Vol. II / 118

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Cleanout Plugs (on soil pipes)

6.1

uPVC clean out pipe for Soil, Waste or Rainwater pipes laid under floors shall
be provided near pipe junctions bends, tees, Ys and on straight runs at such
intervals as required as per site conditions. Cleanout pipe shall terminate
flush with the floor levels.

6.2

Cleanout on Drainage Pipes

a)

Cleanout pipe shall be provided on starting point of each drain and in

between at locations indicated on plans or directed by the Project Manager.
Cleanout pipe shall be of size matching the full bore of the pipe but not
exceeding 160 mm OD.

b)

Cleanouts at ceiling level pipe shall be provided with a bend terminating at

floor level above. The cap of the cleanout pipe shall have a cap flush with
floor.

7.0

Waste pipe from appliances

7.1

General

a)

Waste pipe from appliances e.g. wash basins, sinks and urinals shall be of
uPVC pipes 40, 50 or 63 mm OD conforming to IS: 4985 class II (6 kg/cm 2 or
as given in the Schedule of Quantities or shown on the drawings.

b)

All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the outfalls of drains. Pipes inside
a toilet room shall be in chase unless otherwise shown on drawings. Where
required pipes may be run at ceiling level in suitable gradient and supported
on galvanized structural clamps. Spacing for clamps for such pipes shall be
as per the pipe spacing chart given in section 1.

8.0

Encasing pipe in Cement Concrete

uPVC soil and waste pipes and drainage under floor in sunken slabs and in
wall chases (when cut specially for the pipe) shall be encased in cement
concrete 1 : 2 : 4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone aggregate 12 mm
size) 75 mm in bed and all-round. When pipes are running well above the
structural slab, the encased pipes shall be supported with suitable cement
concrete pillars of required height at intervals of one metre. Rate for
concreted round pipes shall be inclusive of pillars, supports, shuttering and
centering.

Vol. II / 119

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

9.0

Cutting and making good

9.1

Contractors rate shall include for providing all necessary holes, sleeves, cut
outs and chases in structural members as building work proceeds. Wherever
holes are cut or left originally, they shall be made good with cement concrete
1 : 2 : 4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size)
or cement mortar 1 : 2 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand) and the surface restored as
in original condition.

10.0

Testing

10.1

Testing procedure specified below apply to all soil, waste and vent pipes
above ground including pipes laid along basement ceiling.

10.2

Entire drainage system shall be tested for water tightness during and after
completion of the installation. No portion of the system shall remain untested.
Contractor must have adequate number of expandable rubber/bellow plugs,
manometers, smoke testing machines, pipe and fitting work test benches and
any other equipment necessary and required to conduct the tests. All testing
equipment/motors etc. shall be certified for its calibration by an approved
laboratory.

10.3

All materials obtained and used on site must have manufacturer's hydraulic
test certificate for each batch of materials used on the site.

10.4

Testing soil, waste and rainwater pipes

a)

Apart from factory test all pipes and fittings shall be hydraulically tested for
a head of 3 m preferably on a specially set up work bench. After applying
pressure, strike the pipe with a wooden pallet and inspect for blow holes and
cracks. Pressure may be applied for about 2 minutes. Reject and remove all
defective pipes.

b)

After installation all connections from fixtures, vertical stacks and

horizontal drains including pipes along ceiling shall be tested to a hydraulic
pressure not exceeding 3 m. Such tests shall be conducted for each floor
separately by suitable plugs.

c)

After the installation is fully complete, it should be tested by flushing the

toilets, running at least 20% of all taps simultaneously and ensuring that the
entire system is self draining, has no leakages, blockages etc. Rectify and
replace where required.

10.5

Contractor shall maintain a test register identifying date and time of each
area. All tests shall be conducted in presence of Project Manager and signed
by both.
Vol. II / 120

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

11
11.1
a)

Measurements
General
Rates for all items quoted shall be inclusive of all work and items given in the
specifications and Schedule of Quantities.

b)

Rates are applicable for the work in basements, under floors, in shafts at
ceiling level area for all heights and depths.

c)

Rates are inclusive of cutting holes and chase in RCC and masonry work and
making good the same.

d)

Rates are inclusive of pre testing, on site testing, of the installations, materials
and commissioning of the works.

e)

Pipes (unit of measurement. Linear meter to the nearest centimeter)

11.2

Pipes shall measured per running meter correct to a centimeter for the
finished work which shall include fittings e.g. bends, tees, crosses, etc. The
length shall be taken along centre line of the pipes and fittings. All pipes and
fittings shall be classified according to their diameter, method of jointing and
fixing substance, quality, and finish. The diameters shall be nominal outer
diameter.

11.3

Cement concrete around pipes shall be measured along the center of the
pipe line measured per linear meter and include any masonry supports,
shuttering and centering cutting complete as described in the relevant
specifications.

11.4

Slotted angles/channels shall be measured per linear meter of finished length

and shall include support bolts, nuts and clamps embedded in masonry walls
with cement concrete blocks and nothing extra will be paid for making good
the same.

11.5

Fittings
Unit of measurement shall be the number of pieces. Pipe fittings are included
in the rate for pipes. Urinal traps, trap gratings, hoppers, cleanout plugs shall
be measured by number per piece and shall include all items described in the
relevant specifications and Schedule of Quantities.

11.6

Excavation for soil pipes

No payment shall be admissible with respect to excavation, refilling and
disposal of surplus earth for soil and waste pipes laid below ground, in
sunken slabs or over basement rafts.

11.7

Project Managers decision with respect to the correct interpretation regarding

mode of measurement shall be final and binding on the contractor.
End of Section 3
Soil, Waste, Vent & Rainwater Pipes & Fittings
Vol. II / 121

Sen & Lall

Section 4
1

Spec/Tender doc.
Water Supply System

Scope of work

1.1

Work under this section consists of furnishing all labour, materials equipment
and appliances necessary and required to completely install the water supply
system as required by the drawings, specified hereinafter and given in the
Schedule of Quantities.

1.2

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the water supply system
shall include the following:a) Municipal water connection including water meter up to U.G. water tanks.
b) Piping from tube well to raw water tank
c) Rising main from pump house to terraces of buildings for flushing
requirement.
d) Distribution system from overhead tank to each toilet in the building.
e) Distribution mains from hydro pneumatic system to all fixtures and
appliances for cold and hot water to buildings.
f) Excavation and refilling of pipes trenches.
g) Control valves, masonry chambers and other appurtenances.

General requirements

2.1

All materials shall be new and of the best quality conforming to specifications.
All works executed shall be to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

2.2

Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as

required in a neat workmanlike manner.

2.3

Long bends shall be used on all main pipe lines as far as possible. Use of
elbows shall be restricted for short connections.

2.4

Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and
maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.

2.5

Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at

intervals specified. (See 4.7 for clamp spacing chart Section 3 above)

2.6

Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located as to provide easy

accessibility for operations, maintenance and repairs.

Vol. II / 122

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Water Supply System

3.1

Contractor should study the site plan and water supply system diagram for an
overview of the system.

3.2.

Source

a)

Water supply will be acquired from Municipal water mains through a service
connection

b)

Additional water supply will be obtained from captive tube-wells within the site
or from the lake. The rising mains will be connected to the main fire static tank
and then overflow into the main domestic water tank.

3.3

Water supply piping for garden hydrant and sprinkler and irrigation system will
be separate and independently connected to a different pumping system.

4.0

GI pipes, fittings & valves

4.1

All pipes inside the buildings and where specified, outside the building shall
be galvanized steel tubes conforming to IS: 1239 of class specified. When
class is not specified they shall be heavy class.

4.2

Fittings shall be of malleable iron galvanized of approved make. Each fitting

shall have manufacturer's trade mark stamped on it. Fittings for GI pipes shall
include couplings, bends, tees, reducers, nipples, unions, and bushes.
Fittings shall conform to IS: 1879-(Part I to X).

4.3

Pipes and fittings shall be jointed with screwed joints. The care shall be taken
to remove burr from the end of the pipe with a proper file after cutting a pipe
with a hacksaw or a cutting machine.

4.3.1 Pipe threaded joints will be made by applying suitable grade of TEFLON tape
used for drinking water supply. (Use of red or white lead and sutli will not
be permitted for screwed joints)
4.3.2 All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with layout and alignment shown on the
drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets. GI pipes inside toilets shall
be fixed in wall chases well above the floor. No pipes shall be run inside a
sunken floor as far as possible. Pipes may be run under the ceiling or floors
and other areas as shown on drawings.
4.0

CPVC pipes, fittings & valves

4.1

All pipes inside the buildings and where specified, outside the building shall
be CPVC pipes tubes conforming to Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 at 23 0 C
should be 1.55 as specified. With Tensile Strength as per ASTM D 638 at
230C should be 55 N/mm2
Vol. II / 123

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

4.2

All special fittings and accessories like internally or externally threaded brass
adaptors, ball valves, globe valves, unions, diaphragm valves, butterfly valves
etc shall be made of CPVC by Licensee.

4.3

The CPVC solvent cement used for installing CPVC piping systems shall
conform to ASTM F493. Pipes from upto 2 pipes and fittings, single step
medium bodied CPVC solvent cement should be used. For CPVC pipes and
fittings upwards of 2, a primer shall be used followed by heavy bodied
solvent cement conforming to ASTM F493. PVC solvent cement should not
be used.

4.4

Concealed Piping
All internal concealed plumbing for water supply shall be done with CPVC.
The pipes & fittings shall conform to CTS (copper tube size) SDR-11 as per
ASTM D2846 OR SDR-13.5. All pipes and fittings from upto 2 shall come
under this category. Medium body CPVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM
F493 should be used for joining pipes to fittings.

4.5

External Piping: (If applicable)

All external plumbing for water supply and distribution shall be done with
CPVC pipes. The CPVC pipes above 2 for external water supply lines shall
conform to ASTM F441 CPVC Schedule 40 & 80 pipe and will be the CPVC
brand. The fittings above 2 size shall conform to ASTM F438 (Schedule 40
CPVC fittings) or ASTM F 439 (Schedule 80 CPVC fittings). All threaded
CPVC fittings shall conform to ASTM F437 (threaded CPVC fittings
schedule). Heavy bodied CPVC solvent cement shall be used along with a
primer. IPS brand primer and heavy bodied CPVC solvent cement only should
be used conforming to ASTM F493. All external CPVC pipes shall be coated
with water based acrylic paint emulsion for enhanced UV protection.

4.6

Installation procedure:
All parameters pertaining to the installation of CPVC plumbing system such
as cutting, joining, support spacing, expansion loops, insulation, type of
support, special connections, etc. shall be as per the manufacturers
specifications.

4.7

All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with layout and alignment shown on the
drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets.

4.8

Clamps
CPVC/GI Pipes in shafts and other locations shall be supported by galvanized
MS clamps of design approved by Project Manager. Pipes in wall chases
shall be anchored by GI hooks. Pipes at ceiling level shall be supported on
structural clamps fabricated from MS structurals. Pipes in typical shafts shall
be supported on slotted angles/channels as per standard drawings.
Vol. II / 124

Sen & Lall

4.9
4.10

Spec/Tender doc.

For sleeves, anchor fasteners and clamp spacing chart (See 4.7 for clamp
spacing chart Section 3 above).
Unions
Adequate number of unions with metal inserting on pipes 50 mm OD and
below shall be provided to enable easy dismantling later when required.
Unions shall be provided near each gunmetal valve, stop cock, or check valve
and on straight runs as necessary at appropriate locations as required and/or
directed by Project Manager.

4.11

Trenches
All water supply pipes below ground shall be laid in trenches with a minimum
cover of 60 cms. The width and depth of the trenches shall be as follows:Dia of pipe
15 mm to 50 mm
65 mm to 100 mm

4.12

Width of trench

Depth of trench

30 cms
45 cms

75 cms
100 cms

Sand filling
All CPVC pipes in trenches shall be protected with fine sand 15 cms thick. All
- round before filling in the trenches.

4.13

Where shown on the drawings main pipe lines may be run in masonry
trenches from the pump house to the buildings, filled up with sand and buried
in ground as per architectural /landscape details.

5.0
5.1

Valves
Ball valves

5.1.1 Valves 40 mm dia and below shall be screwed type ball valves with chrome
plated balls, spindle, teflon seating and gland packing tested to a hydraulic
pressure of 20 kg/cm 2 and accompanying couplings and steel handles to BS:
5351.
5.2

Butterfly Valves

5.2.1 Valves 50 mm dia and above shall be cast iron butterfly valve to be used for
isolation and/or flow regulation. The valves shall be bubble tight,
neoprene/EPDM body lining stainless steel upper stem, PTFE bush, suitable
for flow in either direction and seal in both direction. Valves shall be provided
with matching flanges with neoprene insertion gasket 3 mm thick
5.2.2 Butterfly valve shall be of best quality conforming to IS: 13095.
Vol. II / 125

Sen & Lall

5.3

Spec/Tender doc.

Non Return Valve

5.3.1 Where specified non return valve (swing check type) shall be provided
through which flow can occur in one direction only. It shall be single door
swing check type of best quality conforming to IS: 5312.
5.3.2 Each butterfly and slim type swing check valves shall be provided with a pair
of flanges screwed to the main line by providing fittings with metal inserts and
having the required number of galvanized nuts, bolts and washers of correct
length.
5.4

Sluice valves (For use in Suction lines of Water supply & Fire Pumps)

5.4.1 All valves 80 mm dia and above shall be C.I. double flanged sluice valves.
Sluice valves shall be cast iron double flanged, with non rising spindle. Each
sluice valve shall be provided with wheel in exposed positions and cap top for
underground valves. Contractor shall provide suitable operating keys for
sluice valves with cap tops.
5.4.2 Sluice valves shall be of approved makes conforming to IS: 780 of class as
specified.
6

Brick Masonry Chamber for meters and valves

Constructing masonry chamber 60x60x75 cms inside with
75 class
designation brick work in cement mortar 1 : 5 (1 cement : 5 fine sand) for
sluice valve with CI surface box 100 mm top dia 160 mm bottom dia and 180
mm deep (inside) with chained lid and RCC top slab 1 : 2 : 4 mix (1 cement :
2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) necessary
excavation foundation concrete 1 : 5 : 10 mix (1 cement : 5 fine sand and 10
graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) and inside plastering with
cement mortar 1 : 3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) 12 mm thick finished with a
floating coat of neat cement complete as per standard design with FPS
bricks.

Storage Tanks

7.1

Underground & Overhead Tanks (Part of Civil Contractor)

Underground & overhead water storage tanks for water supply shall be
reinforced cement concrete. The tanks shall be provided with lockable CI
manhole cover fabricated from MS sheet, MS ladders/Orange foot, inserts for
all pipe connections and will be provided by the building contractor. Plumbing
contactor shall make all connections and provide overflows etc.

Vol. II / 126

Sen & Lall

7.2

Spec/Tender doc.

Tank connection and accessories

7.2.1 Contractor shall provide the following to each tanks:

a)
b)
c)
d)

Inlet and outlet connections to pumps, equipment and main pipe lines.
Tank overflows with mosquito proof gratings
Scour drain and valve as per drawings
Water level gauge with approved type of brass gauges, plastic tube, a
wooden board with level marking.

7.2.2 Electronic level controllers, cabling, sequence controllers and all related
equipment shall be provided by agency executing the pumping system work.
Plumbing contractor shall provide necessary sleeves and co-operate with the
contractor to ensure that the work is successfully executed.
8

Testing

8.1

All pipes, fittings and valves, after fixing at site, shall be tested by hydrostatic
pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure or 10 kg/cm 2 whichever is more.
Pressure shall be maintained for a period of at least 12 hour without any drop.

8.2

A test register shall be prepared and all entries shall be maintained date wise
by Contractor and jointly signed by Contractor(s) and Project Manager.

8.3

In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the construction,

Contractor shall test the entire installation after connections to the overhead
tanks or pumping system or mains. He shall rectify all leakages and shall
replace all defective materials in the system. Any damage done due to
carelessness, open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, to the building,
furniture and fixtures shall be made good by the Contractor during the
defects liability period without any cost.

8.4

After commissioning of the water supply system, Contractor shall test each
valve by closing and opening it a number of times to observe if it is working
efficiently. Valves which do not effectively operate shall be replaced by new
ones at no extra cost and the same shall be tested as above.

Measurement

9.1

Pipes
All piping work above ground shall be measured per linear meter (to the
nearest cm) and shall be inclusive of all fittings e.g. couplings, tees, bends,
elbows, unions, and flanges. Deduction for valves shall be made. Rate quoted
shall be inclusive of all fittings, clamps, cutting holes chases and making good
the same and all items mentioned in the specifications and Schedule of
Quantities.
Vol. II / 127

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

9.2

Pipes below ground shall be measured per linear meter (to the nearest cm)
and shall be inclusive of fittings, e.g. couplings, tees, bends, elbows, unions,
deduction for valves shall be made. Rates quoted shall be inclusive of all
fittings, excavation, back filling, compaction and disposal of surplus earth,
cutting holes and chases and making good and all other items mentioned in
the specifications and Schedule of Quantities.

9.3.

Gunmetal, cast iron, butterfly and non return valves puddle flanges, level
indicators and meters shall be measured by numbers.

9.4

Brick masonry chamber for valves and meters shall be measured by number
and include all items given in the Bill of quantities.

9.5

ISI code with respect to measurement of work is not applicable to this work.

9.6

Project Managers decision with respect to the correct interpretation regarding

mode of measurement shall be final and binding on the contractor.
End of Section 4
------ Water supply -----

Vol. II / 128

Sen & Lall

Section 5

Spec/Tender doc.
External Services (Sewers & Storm Water Drains)

Scope of work

1.1

Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials,
equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely install all the
drainage system as required by the drawings and specified hereinafter or
given in the Schedule of Quantities.

1.2

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the drainage system

shall include:-

a)

Sewer lines including excavation, laying pipelines,

connections and connections to the existing sewer.

b)

Storm water drainage, excavation, laying pipelines, manholes, catch basins,

drain channels and connections to the existing storm water drain.

General requirements

2.1

All materials shall be new and best quality conforming to specifications and
subject to the approval of the Project Manager.

2.2

Drainage lines and open drains shall be laid to the required gradients and
profiles.

2.3

All drainage work shall

municipal/mandatory laws.

2.4

Contractor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for the drainage
system from the municipal or any other competent authority.

2.5

Location of all manholes, etc. shall be got confirmed from the Project
Manager with relation to the landscape drawings.

3
3.1

Excavation
Alignment and grade

be

done

in

accordance

manholes,

with

drop

applicable

The sewer pipes shall be laid to alignment and gradient shown on the
drawings but subject to such modifications as shall be ordered by the Project
Manager. No deviations from the lines, depths of cutting or gradients of
sewers shown on the plans and sections shall be permitted except written
direction by the Project Manager.
3.2

Excavation in tunnels
The excavation for sewer works shall be open cutting unless the permission
of the Project Manager is obtained for laying pipes in tunnel where sewers
have to be constructed along narrow passages or difficult ground.
Vol. II / 129

Sen & Lall

3.3

Spec/Tender doc.

Opening out trenches

While excavating the trenches in tarred/paved roads or turfed areas, the solid
road metalling, pavement, kerbing, etc. or the turf is to be placed on one side
and preserved for reinstatement. Before any road metal is replaced, it shall be
carefully sifted. The surface of all trenches and holes shall be restored and
maintained to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall scrub up and clear the surface over the trenches and
other excavations of all trees, stumps roots and all other encumbrances
affecting execution of the work and shall remove them from the site to the
approval of the Project Manager.

3.4

Obstruction of roads
The Contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one
half of the width of any road or street and sufficient space shall then be left for
public and private transit, he shall remove the materials excavated and bring
them back again when the trench is required to be refilled. The Contractor
shall obtain the consent of the Project Manager.

3.5

Removal of filth
All night soil, filth or any other offensive matter met with during the
execution of the works, immediately after it is taken out of any trench, sewer
or cess pool, shall not be deposited on to the surface of any street or where it
is likely to be a nuisance or passed into any sewer or drain but shall be at
once put into the carts and removed to a suitable site to be identified by
Contractor and approved by the Project Manager.

3.6

Excavation to be taken to proper depths

The trenches shall be excavated to such a depth that the sewer/storm water
drain shall rest on concrete as described in the several clauses relating there
to and so that the inverts may be at the levels given in the sections. In bad
ground, the Project Manager may order the contractor to excavate to a
greater depth than that shown on the drawing. In all such cases, the trench
will be filled up with cement concrete of the same mix as that of base
concrete up to the required level.

Vol. II / 130

Sen & Lall

3.7

Spec/Tender doc.

Refilling
After the sewer or other work has been laid and tested to be water tight, the
trench or other excavations shall be refilled. Utmost care shall be taken in
doing this, so that no damage shall be caused to the sewer and other
permanent work. The filling in the haunches and up to 75 cms above the
crown of the sewer shall consist of the good earth placed carefully in 20 cms
layers and flooded and consolidated. After this has been laid, the trench and
other excavation shall be refilled carefully in 20 cms layers with materials
taken from the excavation, each layer being watered to assist in the
consolidation. The consolidation shall be done by power operated mechanical
plate compactors as directed by the Project Manager.

3.8

Contractor to restore settlement and damages

The Contractor shall, at his own costs and charges, make good
promptly during the whole period the works are in hand, any settlement that
may occur in the surfaces of roads, berms, footpaths, gardens, open spaces
etc. whether public or private caused by his trenches or by his other
excavations and he shall be liable for any accidents caused thereby. He shall
also, at his own expense and charges, repair and make good any damage
done to buildings and other property.

3.9

Disposal of surplus soil

The Contractor shall at his own costs and charges provide places for
disposal of all surplus materials not required to be used on the works. As
each trench is refilled the surplus soil shall be immediately removed, the
surface properly restored and roadways and sides left clear as directed by the
Project Manager.

3.10

Timbering of sewer and trenches

The Contractor shall at all times support efficiently and effectively the sides of
the sewer trenches and other excavations by suitable timbering, piling and
sheeting. The trenches shall be closed timbered in loose or sandy strata and
below the surface of the sub soil water level.

a)

All timbering, sheeting and piling with their walling and supports shall be of
adequate dimensions and strength and fully braced and strutted so that no
risk of collapse or subsidence of the walls of the trench shall take place.

b)

The Contractor shall be held responsible and will be accountable for the
sufficiency of all timbering, bracings, sheeting and piling used as also for, all
damage to persons and property resulting from improper quality, strength,
placing, maintaining or removing of the same.

d)

Open or closed timbering where required in the opinion of Project Manager

where decision shall be final, and done by the contractor shall be paid for
separately.
Vol. II / 131

Sen & Lall

3.11

Spec/Tender doc.

Shoring of buildings
The Contractor shall shore up all buildings, walls and other structures, the
stability of which is liable to be endangered by the execution of the work and
shall be fully responsible for all damages to persons or property resulting from
any accident.

3.12

Removal of water from sewer, trench etc.

a)

The Contractor shall at all times during the progress of the work keep the
trenches and excavations free from water which shall be disposed of by him
in a manner as will neither cause injury to the public health nor to the public or
private property nor to the work completed or in progress nor to the surface of
any roads or streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the same by
the public.

b)

If any excavation is carried out at any point or points to a greater depth than
the specified cross section of the sewer with its envelope, the additional depth
of the trench shall be filled with concrete of the same mix as that of base
concrete by the Contractor at his own expenses and charges to the
requirements of the Project Manager.

3.13

Width of trench

3.14

Recommended width of trenches at the bottom shall be as follows:100 mm dia pipe

150 mm dia pipe
225-250 mm dia pipe
300 mm dia pipe

55 cms
55 cms
60 cms
75 cms

Maximum width of the bed concrete shall also be as above. Should the
contractor excavate the trenches to width greater that specified above, no
additional payment will be admissible for widths greater than specified. The
contractor shall also fill the additional width with cement concrete for the pipe
to the full width of the excavated trench without any extra cost.
4

Salt glazed stoneware pipes

4.1

Stoneware pipes shall be of first class quality salt glazed and free from rough
texture inside and outside and straight.
All pipes shall have the
manufacturers name marked on it and shall comply to IS: 651.

Vol. II / 132

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

4.2

Laying and jointing of stoneware salt glazed pipes

a)

Pipes are liable to be damaged in transit notwithstanding tests that may have
been made before despatch. Each pipe shall be examined carefully on arrival
at site. Each pipe shall be rung with a wooden hammer or mallet and those
that do not ring true and clear shall be rejected. Sound pipes shall be carefully
stacked to prevent damage. All defective pipes should be segregated, marked
with permanent marker in a conspicuous manner and their use in the works
prevented.
All stoneware pipes should be fitted together on the surface of the ground to
ensure proper fit before they are lowered. The barrels, spigots and sockets
are properly cleaned and brushed.
b)
The pipes shall be laid with sockets leading uphill and rest on
solid and even foundations for the full length of the barrel. Socket holes shall
be formed in the foundation sufficiently deep to allow the pipe jointer room to
work right round the pipe and as short as practicable to admit the socket and
allow the joint to be made.
Pipes shall be laid carefully to the alignment, levels and gradient as per
drawings, specifications and as directed by Project Manager and care shall
be taken to prevent any sand, earth or other matter from entering the pipes
during laying. The pipes between manholes shall be laid truly in straight line.
The alignment shall be done by suitable ranging rods and levels established
by proper levelling instrument.

c)

Where pipes are not bedded on concrete the trench bottom shall be left
slightly high and carefully bottomed up as pipe laying proceeds so that the
pipe barrels rest on firm ground. If excavation has been carried too low it shall
be made up with cement concrete of the same mix as specified for pipe
bedding at the Contractor's cost and charges.

d)

If the bottom of the trench consists of rock or very hard ground that cannot be
easily excavated to a smooth surface, the pipes shall be laid on cement
concrete bed to ensure even bearing.

4.3

Jointing of pipes
a) A gasket of Tarred yarn shall be wrapped round the spigot of each pipe and
the spigot shall then be placed into the socket of the pipe previously laid, the
pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in its correct position and the gasket
caulked tightly home so as to fill not more than one quarter of the total length
of the socket. The yarn will be moistened to avoid absorption of water from
the mixed cement mortar.
Vol. II / 133

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

b)

The remainder of the socket shall be filled with stiff mix of cement mortar (1
cement : 1 clear sharp washed sand). When the socket is filled, a fillet should
be formed round the joint with a trowel forming an angle of 45 degrees with
the barrel of the pipe. The mortar shall be mixed as needed for immediate
use and no mortar shall be beaten up and used after it has begun to set.

c)

After the joint has been made any extraneous materials shall be removed
from inside of the joint with a suitable scraper of "badger". The newly made
joints shall be protected until set from the sun, drying winds, rain or dust.
Sacking or other materials which can be kept damp shall be used. The joints
shall be exposed and space shall be left all round the pipes for inspection by
the Project Manager. Inside of the sewer must be left absolutely clear in bore
and free from cement mortar or other obstructions throughout its entire length,
and shall efficiently drain and discharge.
Depths of yarn and cement mortar paste for different sizes of pipe joints are
given
below:
Internal dia
Depth of
Depth of
Depth of
of pipe (mm)
socket (mm
yarn
mortar
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------100
50
22
28
150
60
28
28
250
65
32
32
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.4

Testing

a)

All lengths of the sewer and drain shall be fully tested for water tightness by
means of water pressure maintained for not less than 30 minutes. Testing
shall be carried out from manhole to manhole. All pipes shall be subjected to
a test pressure of at least 2.5 metre head of water at the highest point in the
section. The test pressure shall, however, not exceed 6 metre head at any
point. The pipes shall be plugged preferably with standard design plugs with
rubber plugs on both ends. The upper end shall however be connected to a
pipe for filling with water and getting the required head.

b)

Sewer lines shall be tested for straightness by:

inserting a smooth ball of dia 12 mm less than the internal diameter of the
pipe. In the absence of obstructions such as yarn or mortar projecting at the
joints the ball should roll down the invert of the pipe and emerge at the lower
end,
Vol. II / 134

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

means of a mirror at one and a lamp at the other end. If the pipe line is
straight the full circle of light will be seen otherwise obstruction of deviation
will be apparent.

c)

The Contractor shall give a smoke test to the drains and sewer at his own
expense and charges, as directed by the Project Manager.

d)

A test register shall be maintained by the contractor and jointly signed and
dated by Contractor and the Project Manager.

4.5

Gully traps

a)

Gully traps shall be of glazed stoneware to IS: 651

b)

Gully traps shall be fixed in cement concrete 1 : 5 : 10 mix and a brick

masonry chamber 30x30 cms inside in cement mortar 1:5 with 15x15 cms
grating inside and 30x30 cms CI sealed cover and frame weighing not less
than 7.3 kg to be constructed as per standard drawing. Where necessary,
sealed cover shall be replaced with CI grating of the same size (1 cement : 5
coarse sand : 10 stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size).

Reinforced cement concrete pipes

5.1

All underground storm water drainage pipes and sewer lines where specified
(other than those specified uPVC SWR System) shall be centrifugally spun
S&S RCC pipes to IS 458 NP-2.class. Pipes shall be true and straight with
uniform bore, throughout. Cracked, warped pipes shall not be used on the
work. All pipes shall be tested by the manufacturer and the Contractor shall
produce, when directed a certificate to that effect from the manufacturer.

5.2

Laying
RCC spun pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed or cradles as specified
and shown on the detailed drawings. The cradles may be pre-cast and
sufficiently cured to prevent cracks and breakage in handling. The invert of
the cradles shall be left 12 mm below the invert level of the pipe properly
placed on the soil to prevent any disturbance. The pipe shall then be placed
on the bed concrete or cradles and set for the line and gradient by means of
sight rails and bonding rods etc.

Vol. II / 135

Sen & Lall

5.3

Spec/Tender doc.

Jointing
RCC pipes shall be jointed either by O ring or by cement mortar as given in
the BOQ.

i)

For O rubber ring joints, the rubber ring shall be put on the spigot end before
inserting in the socket of the already laid pipe at the groove. The pipe shall
then be pushed into the socket by tilting till the O rubber ring reaches the
groove of the socket. The pipe then should be set for proper alignment and
fixed in position and joint filled with cement mortar 1 : 2 (1 cement : 2 fine
sand).

ii)

After setting out the pipes the socket shall be centred over the spigot and
filled in with tarred gaskin, so that sufficient space is left on either side of the
collar to receive the mortar. The space shall then be filled with cement mortar
1 : 2 (1 cement : 2 fine sand) and caulked by means of proper tools. All joints
shall be finished at an angle of 45 degrees to the longitudinal axis of the pipe.

5.4

Testing
All pipes shall be tested to a hydraulic test of 2.5 m head for at least 30
minutes at the highest point in the section under test. Test shall also be
carried out similar to those for stoneware pipes given above. The smoke test
shall be carried out by the Contractor, if directed by the Project Manager. A
test register shall be maintained by the contractor and jointly signed and
dated by Contractor and Project Manager.

Building Materials
(for cement concrete and masonry works in drainage system.)

6.1

Materials

a)

Water
Water used for all the constructional purposes shall be clear and free from oil,
acid, alkali, organic and other harmful matters, which shall deteriorate the
strength and/or durability of the structure. In general, the water suitable for
drinking purposes shall be considered well enough for constructional purpose.

b)

Aggregate for concrete

The aggregate for concrete shall be in accordance with IS: 383 and IS: 515 in
general, these shall be free from all impurities that may cause corrosion of the
reinforcement. Before actual use these shall be washed in water, if required
as per the direction of Project Manager. The size of the coarse aggregate
shall be as per IS: 383.

Vol. II / 136

Sen & Lall

c)

Spec/Tender doc.

Sand
Sand for various constructional purposes shall comply in all respects with IS:
650 and IS: 2116. It shall be clean, coarse hard, sharp, durable, uncoated,
free from any mixture of clay, dust, vegetable matters, mica, iron impurities
soft or flaky and elongated particles, alkali, organic matters, salt, loam and
other impurities.

d)

Cement
The cement used for all the constructional purposes shall be ordinary
Portland cement or rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS: 269.

e)

Mild steel reinforcement

The mild steel for the reinforcement bars shall be in the form of round bars
conforming to all requirements of IS: 432 Grade I.

f)

Bricks
Brick shall have uniform colour, thoroughly burnt but not over burnt, shall
have plain rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp right angled edges.
They should give ringing sound when struck. Brick shall not absorb more than
20% to 22% of water, when immersed in water for 24 hours. Bricks except for
manholes in sewerage system shall be of class designation 75. Bricks to be
used for construction of manholes in sewerage line shall conform to IS 4885.
All the bricks be got approved from the Project Manager before their use.

g)

Other materials
Other materials not fully specified in these specifications and which may be
required in the work shall conform to the latest relevant IS Codes. All such
materials shall be approved by the Project Manager.

6.2

Cement concrete (plain or reinforced)

a)

Cement concrete in pipe bedding, cradles, foundations and in RCC slabs for
all works shall be mixed by a mechanical mixer where quantities of the
concrete poured at one time permit. Hand mixing on properly constructed
platforms may be allowed for small quantities by the Project Manager. Rate
for cement concrete shall be inclusive of all shuttering and centring at all
depth and heights.

b)

Concrete work shall be of such thickness and mix as given in the Schedule of
Quantities.

c)

All concrete work shall be cured for a period of at least 7 days. Such work
shall be kept moist by means of gunny and water bags at all times.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 137

6.3

Masonry work
Masonry work for manholes, chambers, septic tanks, and such other works as
required shall be constructed with bricks and mortars as specified in the
Schedule of quantities. All joints shall be properly raked to receive plaster.

6.4

Cement concrete for pipe support

a) Wherever specified or shown on the drawings, all pipes shall be supported in
bed, all round or upto haunches. The thickness and mix of the concrete shall
be given in the Schedule of Quantities. Width of the bedding shall be as per
para 3.14 of this section. .
b) Unless otherwise directed by the Project Engineer, cement concrete for bed,
alround or in haunches shall be laid as follows :-

upto 1.5 m
depth

From 1.5 m
upto 3 m
beyond 3 m
depth
depth

RCC/Stoneware pipes
buried in open
ground
All round
in Haunches All round
(no sub soil water)
(1 : 4 : 8 )
(1 : 4 : 8 )
(1 : 4 : 8 )
RCC or SW in sub
soil water

All round
(1 : 3 : 6)

in Haunches in Haunches
(1 : 3 : 6)
(1 : 3 : 6)

CI Pipes
(in all conditions)

All round
(1 : 3 : 6)

Haunches
(1 : 3 : 6)

Haunches
(1 : 3 : 6)

RCC pipes or CI pipes

under or building

All round
(1 : 3 : 6)

All round
(1 : 3 : 6)

All round
(1 : 3 : 6)

(Ratio refers to cement: coarse sand: stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size)

c)

RCC pipes or CI pipes may be supported on brick masonry or pre-cast R.C.C.

or in situ cradles. Cradles shall be as shown on the drawings.

d)

Pipes in loose soil or above ground shall be supported on brick or stone

masonry pillars as shown on the drawings.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 138

6.7

Manholes and chambers

Where not specified, manholes shall be constructed as follows:(all dimensions internal clear in cms)

Size & type of manhole 90x80 120x90

90 dia
120 dia
1500 dia
Rect. Rect.
Conical
Conical
Conical
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------a)
Maximum depth in mm
1500
2400
1670
2290
9000
b)

Average thickness
of RCC slab mm

150

150

c)

Size of cover and

frame mm

-- 610x455 --

d)

Weight of cover
and frame kg.

23/15

58/58

---------------------560 dia ---------------

----------------------182 kg. -------------

6.7.1 All manholes shall be provided with cement concrete benching in 1 : 2 : 4 mix
(1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size). The
benching shall have a slope of 10 cms towards the channel. The depth of the
channel shall be full diameter of the pipe. Benching shall be finished with a
floating coat of neat cement as per standard details.
6.7.2 All manholes shall be plastered with 12/15 mm thick cement mortar 1 : 3 (1
cement : 3 coarse sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement
inside. Manhole shall be plastered outside as above but with rough plaster
mixed with water proofing compound.
6.7.3 All manholes with depths greater than 1 m. shall be provided with 20 mm 2 or
25 mm round rods plastic coated catch rings set in cement concrete blocks
25x10x10 cms in 1 : 2 : 4 mix 30 cms vertically and staggered. Foot rests
shall be coated with coal tar before embedding.
6.7.4 All manholes shall be provided with cast iron/steel fibre reinforced plastic
(SFRC) covers and frames as specified in BOQ and embedded in reinforced
cement concrete slab. Weight of cover, frame and thickness of slab shall be
as specified in the Schedule of Quantities or given above.
6.7.5 Road gullies, ramp drains, gratings in basement shall be cast iron with MS
frame or Steel Fibre Reinforced Concrete (SFRC) with frame as specified in
the Schedule of Quantities.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 139

6.8

Drop Connection

6.8.1 In case where branch pipe sewer enters the manhole of main pipe sewer at a
level higher than 600 m than the main sewer, a drop connection shall be
provided. The drop connection shall be made with CI pipes and special
conforming to IS: 1729 shall be of the same size as that of the branch pipe
sewer as per standard design.
6.8.2 For 150 mm and 250 mm main line, if the difference in level between the
invert level of main line and the invert level of the branch line is less than 60
cm connection may be provided by giving suitable slope.
7

Making connections
Contractor shall connect the sewer line and storm water drains of the building
to the existing municipal manhole by cutting holes and making channels
inside after obtaining all clearances required and specified in this contract.
The holes in walls of the manhole shall then be made up with cement
concrete.

Measurement

8.1

Excavation

8.2

Measurement for excavation of pipe trenches shall be made per linear meter
under the respective category of soil classification encountered at site and
specified in the tender.
a) All soils
b) in soft or hard rock

8.3

Trenches shall be measured between outside walls of manholes at top and

the depth shall be the average depth between the two ends to the nearest
cm. The rate quoted shall be for a depth upto 1.5 m or as given in the
Schedule of Quantities.

8.4

Payment for trenches more than 1.5 m in depth shall be made for extra depth
as given in the schedule of quantities and above the rate for depth upto 1.5
m.

8.5

Timbering and Shoring

The cost of Timbering and shoring shall be included in the relevant item in the
Schedule of Quantities. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Vol. II / 140
8.6

Excavation below sub soil level

No extra payment for pumping and bailing out water shall be made for
excavation with an average depth of 1.5 m in saturated soil, surface water
from rain falls or broken pipes lines, and other similar sources. An extra rate
as quoted in the schedule of quantities shall be paid for excavation below sub
soil level for pipe trenches.

8.7

Refilling, Consolidation and Disposal of Surplus Earth

Rate quoted for excavation of trenches shall be inclusive of refilling,
consolidation and disposal of surplus earth within the site premises as
specified by the Project Manager.

8.8

Stoneware Pipes/RCC/CI pipes

Stoneware RCC/CI pipes shall be measured for the finished length of the
pipeline per linear metre i.e.
a) Lengths between manholes shall be recorded from inside of one manhole
to inside of other manhole,
b) Length between gully trap and manhole shall be recorded between
socket of pipe near gully trap and inside of manhole. Rate shall include
all items given in the schedule of quantities and specifications.

8.9

Gully Traps
Gully traps shall be measured by the number and rate shall include all
excavation, foundation, concrete, brick masonry, cement plaster inside and
outside, C.I. grating and sealed cover and frame.

8.10

Cement Concrete for Pipes

Cement concrete in bed and all round or in haunches shall be paid per
running metre between the outside wall of manholes at bottom of the trench.
No additional payment is admissible in respect of concreting done for depths
and widths greater than specified, for shuttering or centring.

8.11

Manholes, Catch basins & Ramp drains

a)

All manholes and catch basins shall be measured by numbers and shall
include all items specified above and necessary excavation, refilling &
disposal of surplus earth.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 141

b)

Manholes with depths greater than specified under the main item shall be
paid for under "extra depth" and shall include all items as given for manholes
measurement shall be done to the nearest cm. Depth of the manholes shall
be measured from top of the manhole cover to bottom of channel.

c)

Ramp drains shall be measured per meter length.

8.12

Safety Footrest
Safety footrest shall be measured by nos. and rate shall include providing and
fixing as specified in Bill of Quantities

8.13

Making Connections
Item for making connection to municipal sewer and storm water drain shall be
paid for by number and shall include all items given in the Schedule of
Quantities and specifications.
End of Section 5
------ External Services ------

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 142

Section 6
1

Water Supply Pumping System & Allied services

Scope of work
Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials,
equipment and appliances necessary and required for the satisfactory supply,
installation, completion and commissioning of water supply pumping system
and allied works as described hereinafter as specified in the schedule of
quantities and/or shown on the plumbing drawings and described in the scope
of work .

The System

2.1

The system described below is for the contractors bidding for the works to
understand the extent and scope of work and the intent in the manner in
which the water supply system is planned and shall be executed.

2.2

Sources of supply

a)

City water supply for which a water main from the main road to the
underground water tank will be laid by plumbing contractor.

b)

Tube-well supply from the captive deep tube wells bored at site and pipe line
for connections into the fire tank will be laid by the Plumbing Contractor.

2.3

Underground water tanks

2.3.1 Static fire water storage tanks in one compartment. Connections from the
tube well water supply lines will be made into these tanks. Water will overflow
into the raw water tanks
2.3.2 Raw Water Tank to hold the tube well as well as Supply water will be made to:
a)

A set of pumps will be connected to and water filter and chlorination system
and the filtered water stored in the Treated Water Tanks (in Two compartment.
All piping and connections for this system are a part of this contract.

c)

Domestic Water Pumping Systems

Water supply to the various buildings will be made from a set of pumping sets
to the overhead water and supplementary fire tanks located on the terrace of
each building in the following order:

2.3.3 The requirement of pump set is as listed below:-

Vol. II / 143

Sen & Lall

2.4

Spec/Tender doc.

Water Filtration System

-

The raw water from the tube well will be filtered by filter and chlorinated in
pressure filtered and stored in the treated water tanks. The method of
filtration will be based on water test report.
on line chlorination will be provided on drinking water transfer pump set

2.5

Rising Mains & level control system

a)

Water from the pumps described above will fill each tank by a rising main to
each tower.

b)

To control the level in each tank and enable it to fill as the water demand so
requires, each tank will be provided with a ball cock to shut off the water
supply when the tank is full.

c)

A set of electronic level sensing probes will be installed in each tank The
probes installed in each pumping system will be wired to a central electronic
panel which will activate the pump when any one of the tank probe signals
low water conditions and top up all tanks. No excess flow will occur due to the
ball cock in the tank.

2.6

Drainage and sewage pumps (Applicable if required)

a)

The basement is provided with sumps and submersible drainage pumps for
collection and disposal of waste water that will be collected.

b)

Areas in basement provided with toilets will have similar sumps but provided
with submersible sewage pumps.

Pumping sets (for Raw & Domestic Water Supply)

3.1

Water supply pumps shall be suitable for clear water. Pumps shall be single
or multi stage, horizontal/vertical centrifugal pumps with cast iron body and
stainless steel (Grade 304) impeller & shaft, mechanical seal and coupled to
a electric motor. Each pump should be operate to a curve as specified in the
operating conditions.

3.2

Each pump shall be provided with a totally enclosed fan cooled induction
motor of suitable H.P. The motors shall be suitable for 415 volts 10%, 3
phase, 50 cycles A.C. power supply.

3.3

Each pumping set shall be provided with a100 mm dia gunmetal Bourden
type pressure gauge with brass isolation valve and connecting piping.

3.4

Each pumping set shall be installed on rubber vibration eliminator foundation

pads appropriate for each pump as recommended by the manufacturer and
accepted by the Project Manager.
Vol. II / 144

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Drainage Pumps (If Required)

6.1

Pumps for basement drainage shall be submersible pumps with single stage,
single entry impeller suitable for muddy and wash water with solid size not
exceeding 12 mm.

6.2

Pump shall be of cast iron construction with dynamically balanced stainless

steel or bronze impeller connected to a common shaft to the motor and
provided with mechanical seal.

6.3

Each pump shall be provided with electric motor suitable run at 415 volts
10%, 3 phase, 50 cycles A.C. power supply.

6.4

Each sump shall have two pumps. Normally one pump will operate at predetermined level setting. If the incoming discharge is high and the level of
water in sump goes up, the second pump will also come into operation until
the water is drained out. The operation of the sump pump will be controlled by
Electronic level controller assembly as specified below.

6.5

The pumps operating circuit shall be so arranges so that each pumps works
alternately after each operation.

6.6

Pump shall be provided with the delivery piping, valves and check valves on
the delivery and a common delivery header with an out let with a flange for
the plumbing contractor to connect the piping to the external drainage system.
Each set will be provided with all accessories and devices necessary and
required for the pump to make a complete working system.

Sewage Pumps (If required)

Sewage pumps will be of the same specification except that they shall be
capable of handling raw sewage with solids upto 40 mm in size.

Level Controllers

8.1

Level controllers shall be electronic magnetic type using required number of

stainless steel type probes, shrouded in PVC sheath or encapsuled in a
stainless steel pipe.
The level controller will be used for following
applications:-

Vol. II / 145

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

8.1.1 Sump Pump level controller & high water alarm ( Drainage & Sewage
Pumps)
To cut off the drainage sump pump when the sump is empty and to start
when :a)
Duty pump No. 1
at pre-determined level.No.1

8.2

8.3

b)

Duty pump No.2

at a higher pre-determined level.No.2

c)

Provide a audible high water alarm when water level in the sump
reaches a pre-determined high level in the sump location at MCC
panel installed in wall near sump location

Overhead tank level controller cum indicators

Each OHT to be provided with required number of stainless steel

electronically operated probes (housed in a stainless steel protective
housing) and connected by a control cable to solenoid valves. A
common multi-core cable from each tank of buildings will be laid up to
the solenoid valves. The probes will function as follows:

To cut off the water supply pumps when all the OHT is full and to start
the pump if any OHT level reaches at pre-determined low level.

Provision shall be made to enable the operation of the second duty

pump in case the water level does not rise above a pre-determined
level in the tank due to water demand which is higher than capacity of
duty pump no.1 to meet.

Each OHT are also provided with a motorised butterfly valve to stop
the supply in individual OHT when level reaches a cut off high level.

Control & Indicating Panel (For underground water tanks)

A centralized indicating standalone wall mounted panel fabricated from 14 g.
MS sheet and painted inside and outside with stove enameled finish with
clear vertical panels for each group of buildings & tanks shall indicate water
level in each tank by means of digital display unit to indicate water level in
each tank in four levels ( th,, and full). The panel shall be installed on the
control console panel located in the pump room or as directed by the Project
Engineer. The panel shall have:
a)
b)
c)

Digital level indicator panel meter for each water tank.

Etched plate identification plates.
Control cabling from MCC to the panel installed in the control room as
directed by the Project Manager.

Vol. II / 146

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Pressure filters for Water Supply System

9.1

Specification shall apply for water filtration system

a)

Pressure filters shall be manufactured with factory made bobbin wound

polyester fibre glass multilayer filters fitted with internal GI distribution pipe
with polypropylene diffusers on top, collector pipes and arms, inlet and outlet
header vertical water pressure dished ends complete with initial charge of
filter media, G.I. face piping, accessories testing and commissioning
complete. Working Pressure 2.4 kg/cm2 (Test pressure 3.75 kg/cm2).

b)

Each vessel will be provided with suitable pressure tight manhole cover
appropriately located for inspection and repairs.

c)

The diameter and height of each vessel shall be as per the design
requirement and given in the BOQ and as per site conditions.

9.2

Multi Port Valves

a) Each vessel will be provided with multi port valves to operate and regulate the
normal flow, backwash and rinsing, rapid washing, on the face piping.
b) Provide suitable sampling cocks to draw water samples for raw water and
treated water.

9.3

Face Piping

a)

Each vessel shall be provided with non-corrosive face piping from the inlet to
the outlet. Face piping shall be uPVC (IS 4985) 10 kg/cm 2 class with injection
moulded fittings and solvent weld and flanged joints

b)

All valves shall be butterfly valves as specified in the piping section over 65
mm dia and for pipe dia below 50 mm dia shall be provided with ball valves.

9.4

Water Filtration Plant (For Domestic Water)

9.4.1

Filter media
Graded aggregate of required size selected coarse and fine silica sand as per
latest water treatment practice. Aggregate and sand to be acid washed and
having purity of 99.9%.

Vol. II / 147

Sen & Lall

9.4.2

Spec/Tender doc.

Depth of filter media:

Approx. 750-900 mm deep (as per manufacturers design)

9.4.3 Back washing

By air scouring through air blower (approx. 5.1 lpm/m 2 of filter surface area
and water supply from raw water pumps by reverse flow
9.4.4 Output Water Quality for Domestic Filters: To conform to IS 10500 for the
relevant design criteria
9.5

Chemical Dosing Pumps

9.5.1 Pump applications

a)
Chlorination of raw water from tube wells,
9.5.2

Dosing system comprising of an electronic metering pump with, 100 lit

capacity uPVC/HDPE solution tank with level gauge and lid on top.

9.5.3

Electronic driven metering pumps with mechanically actuated diaphragm

with oil lubricated gear mechanism. The output of the pump should be
adjustable for operation from 10-100%. Pump construction shall be corrosion
resistant polypropylene or similar material. Pump electrical circuit shall be
interlocked with the main raw water /pool recirculation pumps so that they
operate only when the pumps are operating.

9.6

Air Blower for Back Washing (If applicable)

9.6.1 Low pressure air blower with TEFC electrical motor, belt driven or direct drive,
all mounted on a common structural based plate with oil and water separator.
9.6.2 Air blowers will be used for back washing operations. The air blower shall be
designed for operation of one filter at a time. Blowers will be designed for air
flow of approx 5.1 lpm/m2 air capacity at 0.5 kg/cm 2 pressure. (This may be
modified to suit manufacturers requirement for filters offered.)
9.6.3 The electrical switchgear shall be included in the respective MCC panel of the
system
--- End of Section 6 --Water Supply Pumping System & Allied services
Vol. II / 148

Sen & Lall

Section 7

Spec/Tender doc.
Pipes & Fittings

Headers, piping and connections

a)

All pipe within the plant room building in exposed locations and shafts
including connections buried under floor and for suction and delivery headers
shall be GI pipes medium class and thickness specified. Pipes upto 150 mm
dia shall conform to IS 1239.

b)

Pipe 200 mm dia and above shall be GI ERW tubes to IS: 3589. If
black pipes are available they shall be galvanized before use.

c)

Fittings for GI pipes shall be approved type malleable iron or wrought

iron screwed galvanized fittings for screwed joints. Fittings 200 mm dia may
be shop fabricated but shall be shop galvanized after fabrication.

d)

All M.S. structural supports and clamps shall be galvanised. All the pipe work
within plant room shall be adequately supported with MS structural supports
from floor or ceiling as required and directed by Project Manager.

Jointing

2.1.

GI Pipes (Screwed joints)

Pipe shall be provided with metal to metal threaded joints. Teflon tape shall be
used for lubrication and rust prevention. (USE OF LEAD/ZINC BASED
JOINTING COMPOUND ARE NOT PERMITTED)

2.2

Flanged joints
Flanges shall be provided on:
a) Straight runs not exceeding 12-15 m on pipe lines 80 mm dia and above.
b) Both ends of any fabricated fittings e.g. bends, tees etc. of 50 mm dia or
larger diameter. (When Permitted)
c)

Both end of all suction delivery and other headers.

d) For jointing valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with pipes, to

water tanks and other places necessary and required as good for
engineering practice.
e) Flanges shall be as per applicable IS with appropriate number of G.I. nuts
and bolts, 3 mm insertion rubber gasket complete.
f)

The cost of flanges is included in the rates of pipes along with

fittings.
Vol. II / 149

Sen & Lall

2.3

Spec/Tender doc.

Unions
Provide approved type of dismountable unions on pipes lines 50 mm and
below near valves or inspector test/drain and assemblies and as required as
per site conditions.

Vibration Eliminators
All suction and delivery lines and as shown on the drawings double flanged
reinforced neoprene bellow type flexible pipe connectors shall be provided.
Connectors should be suitable for a working pressure of each pump and
tested to the test pressure given in the relevant head. Length of the
connectors shall be as per site requirements in accordance with
manufacturers details.

Valves

4.1

Sluice valves

a)

Full way Sluice Valves shall be used on the suction connection to pumps and
headers.

b)

Sluice valves (80 mm dia and above) shall be CI double flanged sluice valves
with rising stem. Each sluice valve shall be provided with wheel in exposed
positions and cap top for underground valves. Contractor shall provide
suitable operating keys for sluice valves with cap tops.

c)

Sluice valves shall be of approved makes conforming to IS:780 PN 1.6 class

4.2

Butterfly Valves

a)

Butterfly Valves shall be used in all other locations as required conforming to

IS 13095.

b)

They shall have a cast iron body.

c)

Disc shall be CI heavy duty electrolyses nickel plated abrasion resistant.

d)

The shaft is EN-8 Carbon Steel with low friction nylon bearings.

e)

The seat shall be drop tight constructed by bonding resilient elastomer inside
a rigid backing.

f)

Built in flanged rubber seals.

g)

Actuator to level operated for valves above ground and T Key operated for
valves below ground.
Vol. II / 150

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

h)

Built in flanges for screwed on flanged connections. Manufacturers details on

fixing and installation will be followed.

4.3

Non Return Valves (NRV)

a)

Non return valves will be used at location to allow flow only in one
direction and prevent flow in the opposite direction.

b)

NRV shall be cast iron slim type with cast iron body and gunmetal
internal parts and accompanying flanges. Valves shall conform relevant IS or
match the butterfly valves.

c)
4.5

Built in flanges for screwed on flanged connections.

Ball Valves
Ball Valves upto 40 mm dia shall be screwed type ball valves with stainless
steel balls, spindle, Teflon seating and gland packing tested to a hydraulic
pressure of 20 kg/cm2 and accompanying coupling and steel handles (to BS:
5351.

Y Strainers
Provide cast iron Y type strainers with gunmetal internal strainers, CI
screwed plug to be provided on all water tank suction connections to pumps.

Measurements (Section 1, 2 & 3)

7.1

General

a)

Unit rate for individual items, e.g. pressure tanks, MCC, level controller,
water tank are for purposes of payments only. Piping, headers, valves,
accessories, cabling and MCC to measured separately in this contract only.

b)

All items must include all accessories fittings as described in the

specifications, BOQ and shown on the drawings.

7.2

Water supply pumps

Pumps shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items as given in
the specifications and schedule of quantities to provide a complete working
system.

7.3

Drainage Pumps & Sewage Pumps

Drainage pumps shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items as
given in the specifications and schedule of quantities to provide a complete
working system.
Vol. II / 151

Sen & Lall

7.4

Spec/Tender doc.

Level controllers & Alarms

Level controllers for each set of pumps shall be measured by number and
inclusive of probes, cabling upto surface box near the pump and shall include
all items as given in the specifications and schedule of quantities to provide a
complete working system.

7.5

Piping Work

a)

Suction and delivery headers for each pumping system shall be

measured per set with required length and shall include all items as given in
the schedule of quantities. Painting shall be included in rate of headers.

b)

G.I. pipes between various filters and units shall be measured per
linear meter of the finished length and shall include all fittings, flanges,
jointing, clamps for fixing to walls or hangers and testing. Flanges shall
include 3 mm thick insertion rubber gasket, nuts, bolts and testing.

c)

Vibration eliminators, Y strainers, butterfly valves, slim non return

valves, ball valves shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items
as given in the schedule of quantities and specifications.
--- End of Section 7 --Pipes & Fittings

Vol. II / 152

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 8 Specifications for Electrical Installation

1

Electrical Control Panels

1.1

General
All medium voltage switchboards shall be suitable for operation at three
phase/three phase 4 wire, 415 volt, 50 Hz, neutral grounded at transformer
system with a short circuit level withstand of 31 MVA at 415 volts or as per
schedule of quantities.

The Switch Boards shall comply with the latest edition with upto date
amendments of relevant Indian Standards and Indian Electricity Rules and
Regulations.

1.2

Switch Board Configuration

The Switch Board shall be configured with Air Circuit Breakers, MCCB's, and
other equipment as called for in the Schedule of Quantities.

The MCCB's shall be arranged in multi-tier formation whereas the Air circuit
breakers shall be arranged in Single or Double tier formation only to facilitate
operation and maintenance.

The Switch Boards shall be of adequate size with a provision of 25% spare
space to accommodate possible future additional switch gear.

1.3

Equipment Specifications
All equipment used to configure the Switch Board shall comply to the relevant
Standards and Codes of the Bureau of Indian Standards and to the detailed
technical Specifications as included in this tender document.

1.4

Constructional Features

The Switch Boards shall be metal enclosed, sheet steel cubicle pattern,
extensible, dead front, floor mounting type and suitable for indoor mounting.

The Switch Boards shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin
proof. Synthetic rubber gaskets between all adjacent units and beneath all
covers shall be provided to render the joints dust and vermin proof to provide
a degree of protection of IP 42/IP 54 as specified. All doors and covers shall
also be fully gasketed with synthetic rubber and shall be lockable.

The Switch Board shall be fabricated with CRCA Sheet Steel of thickness not
less than 2.0 mm and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a
rigid support for all components. The doors and covers shall be constructed
from CRCA sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6 mm. Joints of any kind
in sheet metal shall be seam welded and all welding slag ground off and
welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal.
Vol. II / 153

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and square with the frame. The
holes in the panel shall be correctly positioned.

Fixing screws shall enter holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal or
provided with hank nuts. Self threading screws shall not be used in the
construction of the Switch Boards.

1.5

Switchboard Dimensional Limitations

1.6

A base channel 100 mm x 50 mm x 6 mm thick shall be provided at the

bottom.

A minimum of 200 mm blank space between the floor of switch board and
bottom most unit shall be provided.

The overall height of the Switch Board shall be limited to 2300 mm

The height of the operating handle, push buttons etc shall be restricted
between 300 mm and 2000 mm from finished floor level.

Switch Board Compartmentalization

The Switch Board shall be divided into distinct separate compartments

comprising

A completely enclosed ventilated dust and vermin proof bus bar

compartment for the horizontal and vertical bus bars.

Each circuit breaker, and MCCB shall be housed in separate

compartments enclosed on all sides.

Sheet steel hinged lockable doors for each separate compartment shall be
provided and duly interlocked with the breaker in "on" and "off" position.

For all circuit breakers separate and adequate compartments shall be

provided for accommodating instruments, indicating lamps, control
contactors and control MCB etc. These shall be accessible for testing and
maintenance without any danger of accidental contact with live parts of the
circuit breaker, bus bars and connections.

A horizontal wire way with screwed cover shall be provided at the top to
take interconnecting control wiring between vertical sections.

Separate cable compartments running the height of the Switch Board in

the case of front access Boards shall be provided for incoming and
outgoing cables.
Vol. II / 154

Sen & Lall

1.7

Cable compartments shall be of adequate size for easy termination of all

incoming and outgoing cables entering from bottom or top.

Adequate and proper support shall be provided in cable compartments to

support cables.

Switch Board Bus Bars

1.8

Spec/Tender doc.

The Bus Bar and interconnections shall be of electrolytic

Copper/Aluminium and of rectangular cross sections suitable for full load
current for phase bus bars and half rated current for neutral bus bar. The
maximum current density for copper shall be 1.6 amps per mm 2 and for
Aluminum shall be 1 amp per mm 2 and suitable to withstand the stresses
of a 31 MVA fault level or at 415 volts for 1 second or as per schedule of
quantities. .
The bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated with insulation
tape/fiber glass.

The bus bars shall be extensible on either side of the Switch Board.

The bus bars shall be supported on non-breakable, non-hygroscopic

insulated supports at regular intervals, to withstand the forces arising from
a fault level of 31 MVA at 415 volts for 1 second.

All bus bars shall be colour coded.

All bus bar connections in Switch Boards shall be bolted with brass bolts
and nuts. Additional cross section of bus bars shall be provided wherever
holes are drilled in the bus bars.

Switch Board Interconnections

All connections between the bus bars/Breakers/cable terminations shall be

through solid tinned copper strips of adequate size to carry full rated
current and PVC/fibre glass insulated.

For unit ratings upto 100 amps PVC insulated copper conductor wires of
adequate size to carry full load current shall be used. The terminations of
all such interconnections shall be crimped and aluminium lugs shall be
used.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Vol. II / 155
1.9

Drawout Features
Air Circuit Breakers shall be provided in fully drawout cubicles. These cubicles
shall be such that drawout is possible without disconnection of the wires and
cables. The power and control circuits shall have self aligning and self
isolating contacts. The fixed and moving contacts shall be easily accessible
for operation anmd maintenance. Mechanical interlocks shall be provided on
the drawout cubicles to ensure safety and compliance to relevant Standards.
The MCCB's shall be provided in fixed type cubicles.
Instrument Accommodation
Instruments and indicating lamps shall not be mounted on the Circuit
Breaker Compartment door for which a separate and adequate
compartment shall be provided and the instrumentation shall be
accessible for testing and maintenance without danger of accidental
contact with live parts of the Switch Board.

1.10

For MCCB's instruments and indicating lamps can be provided on the

compartment doors.

The current transformers for metering and for protection shall be mounted
on the solid copper/aluminium busbars with proper supports.

Wiring
All wiring for relays and meters shall be with PVC insulated copper conductor
wires. The wiring shall be coded and labelled with approved ferrules for
identification. The minimum size of copper conductor control wires shall be
1.5 mm2.

1.11

Cable Terminations

Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the

Switch Board in conformity with the location of incoming and outgoing
conduits/cables.

The cable terminations of the Circuit Breakers shall be brought out to

terminal cable sockets suitably located at the rear of the panel.

The cable terminations for the MCCB's shall be brought out to the rear in
the case of rear access switchboards or in the cable compartment in the
case of front access Switch Boards.

The Switch Boards shall be complete with tinned brass cable sockets,
tinned brass compression glands, gland plates, supporting clamps and

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

brackets etc for termination of 1100 volt grade aluminium conductor

PVC/PVCA cables.
Vol. II / 156
1.12

Space Heaters
The Switch Board shall have in each panel thermostatically controlled space
heaters with a controlling 15 amp 230 volt switch socket outlet to eliminate
condensation.

1.13

Ventilation Fans
The Switch Board shall be provided with panel mounting type ventilation fans
in each panel with switchgear rated for 2500 amp and above. The fan shall be
interlocked with switchgear operation.

1.14

Earthing
A main earth bar of G.I./copper as required shall be provided throughout the
full length of the Switch Board with a provision to make connections to the
sub-station earths on both sides.

1.15

Sheet Steel Treatment And Painting

Sheet Steel materials used in the construction of these units should have
undergone a rigorous rust proofing process comprising of alkaline
degreasing, descaling in dilute sulphuric acid and a recognised
phosphating process. The steel work shall then receive two costs of oxide
filler primer before final painting. Castings shall be scrupulously cleaned
and fettled before receiving a similar oxide primer coat.

1.17

All sheet steel shall after metal treatment be spray or powder painted with
two coats of shade 692 to IS 5 on the outside and white on the inside.
Each coat of paint shall be properly stoved and the paint thickness shall
not be less than 50 microns.

Name Plates And Labels

Suitable engraved white on black name plates and identification labels of
metal for all Switch Boards and Circuits shall be provided. These shall
indicate the feeder number and feeder designation.
Testing
Copies of type test carried out at ACB/MCCB manufacturers works and
routine tests carried out at the switchboard fabricators shop shall be furnished
along with the delivery of the switchboards. Project Manager reserves the
right to get the switchboard inspected by their representative at fabricators
works prior to dispatch to site to witness the routine tests as per clause 7.7 of
SCC

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Vol. II / 157
3.

TESTING AT SITE
Pre-commissioning tests as required and as per
manufacturers
recommendations shall be carried out on each switchboards at site before
energizing the switchboards including but not restricted to the following.

Physical checking of the switchboards including checking alignment of

panels, interconnection of Bus bars, tightness of bolts/connections and
evidence of damage/cracks in any components.
Physical checking and inspections of Inter panel wiring
Checking free movement of ACBs/MCCBs/SFUs
Checking of operation of breakers
Insulation tests of bus bar supports and control wiring etc. with 1.1 kV
megger.
Primary & secondary injection tests of relays and CTs.
Checking of Interlocking function.

4.

Cables

4.1.

Medium Voltage Cables

Medium voltage cables shall be aluminium conductor PVC insulated, PVC
sheathed armoured conforming to IS 1554. Cables shall be rated for a 1100
Volts. The conductor of cables from 16 Sq. mm. to 50 mm 2 shall be stranded.
Sector shaped stranded conductors shall be used for cables of 50 mm 2 and
above. Conductors shall be made of electrical purity aluminium 3/4 H or H
temper. Conductors shall be insulated with high quality PVC base compound.
A common covering (bedding) shall be applied over the laid up cores by
extruded sheath of unvulcanised compound. Armouring shall be applied over
outer sheath of PVC sheathing. The outer sheath shall bear the
manufacturer's name and trade mark at every meter length. Cores shall be
provided with following colour scheme of PVC insulation.
1 Core
2 Core
3 Core
3 1/2 /4 Core

:
Red/Black/Yellow/Blue
:
Red and Black
:
Red, Yellow and Blue
Red, Yellow, Blue and Black

Current ratings shall be based on the following conditions.

a)
b)
c)
d)

Maximum conductor temperature

70O C
Ambient air temperature
45O C
Ground temperature
30O C
Depth of laying
1000 mm

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Vol. II / 158
Short circuit rating of cables shall be as specified in IS 1554 Part-I.
Cables have been selected considering conditions of maximum connected
loads, ambient temperature, grouping of cables and allowable voltage drop.
However, the contractor shall recheck the sizes before cables are fixed and
connected to service.
M.V. cables shall be PVC insulated aluminium/copper conductor and
armoured cables conforming to IS Codes. Cables shall be armoured and
suitable for laying in trenches, duct and on cable trays as required. Control
cables and indicating panel cables shall be multi core PVC insulated copper
conductor and un armoured cables.
4.2

On Trays/Walls

4.2.1 Wherever so specified, cables shall be laid along walls/ceiling or on cable

trays. Cable shall be secured in position and dressed properly by means of
suitable clamps, hooks, saddles etc. such that the minimum clear spacing
between cables is diameter of the cable. Clamping of cables shall be at
minimum intervals as below.
Type

of

cables
MV
MV & HV
MV & HV

Size
Upto and including 25 mm2
35 mm2 to 120 mm2
2

150 mm and above

Clamping by

Fixing

intervals
Saddles 1 mm thick
45 cm
Clamps 3 mm thick 25 mm 60 cm
wide
Clamps 3 mm thick 40 mm 60 cm
wide

Note : The fixing intervals specified apply to straight runs. In the case of
bends, additional clamping shall be provided at 30 cm from the centre
of the bend on both sides.
4.2.2 Cable trays
Cable trays, of sizes as per schedule of quantities and drawings shall be of
perforated doubled bend channel or of ladder design as specified in BOQ.
Cable trays shall be fabricated from sheet steel of thickness as per BOQ and
shall be complete with tees, elbows, risers, and all necessary hardware.

Vol. II / 159

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Trays shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide proper support for all
the contained cables. Trays shall not have sharp edges, burrs or projections
injurious to cable insulation. Trays shall include fittings for changes in
direction and elevation. Cable trays and accessories shall be painted with two
coats of red oxide zinc chromate primer after proper surface preparation and
two finishing coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make or as
specified in BOQ. Cable trays shall have side rails or equivalent structural
members.
Cable trays shall be mounted on support structure as specified by means of
specified size of threaded rods and suitable fasteners. Spacing of the support
structure shall be such that the cable trays shall remain perfectly horizontal
without buckling when fully loaded with cable runs. The support structure shall
be suspended from ceiling slab or grouted to walls in an approved manner.
Width of the horizontal arms of the support structure shall be same as the tray
width plus length required for threading /bolting /welding to the vertical
supports. The length of vertical supporting members for horizontal tray runs
shall be to suit the number of tray tiers required. Cable trays shall be
bolted/welded to the support structure. Minimum clearance between the top
most tray tier and the ceiling shall be 300 mm. Trays shall be erected properly
to present a neat and clean appearance. Trays shall be installed as a
complete system. The entire cable tray system shall be rigid. Each run of
cable tray shall be completed before laying of cables. Cable trays shall be
erected so as to be exposed and accessible. Cables shall be fixed to the tray
by clamps fabricated from minimum 3 mm thick GI sheets. The cables shall
be dressed properly so as to provide minimum one cable diameter clearance
between adjacent cables and from tray ends. Cable trays shall be earthed by
2 runs of 25 mm x 3 mm GI strips through out their lengths.
5.

LAYING OF CABLES
Cables shall be so laid that the maximum bending radius is 12 times the
overall diameter of the cable for medium voltage cables. Cables shall be laid
in masonry trenches, directly on walls/cable trays, directly buried in ground or
in pipes/ducts as elaborated below. Cables of different voltages and also
power and control cables shall be laid in different trenches with adequate
separation. Wherever available space is restricted such that this requirement
cannot be met, medium voltage cables shall be laid above HT cables. Where
more than one cable is laid side by side, cable marker tags of approved type
inscribed with cable identification details shall be permanently attached to
cables at entry points to the building, at specified intervals for cables laid
direct in grounds and in locations like manholes, pull pits etc.

6.

Drawings
Shop drawings for control panels and wiring of equipment showing the route
of conduit cable shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of Project
Manager before starting the fabrication of panel and starting the work. On
completion, all details like location of panels, switches, junction/pull boxes
and cables route etc. shall be furnished by the contractor.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 160

Measurement
Panels shall be counted as number of units. The quoted rate of panel shall
also include all accessories, switch gear, fuses, contractor, indicating meters
and lights as per the specification. Cable tray, Power & Control cable shall be
measured in running meter.
--- End of Section 8 --Pipes & Fittings

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 161

Sen & Lall

Section 9
1.

Spec/Tender doc.
Commissioning and Guarantees

Scope of work
Work under this section shall consist of pre-commissioning, commissioning,
testing and providing guarantees for all equipment, appliances and
accessories supplied and installed by the contractor under this contract.

General requirements:

2.1.

Work under this section shall be executed without any additional cost. The
rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of the works given in this section

2.2

Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, metering and testing devices
required for the purpose.

2.3.

On award of work, contractor shall submit a detailed proposal giving

methods of testing and gauging the performance of the equipment to be
supplied and installed under this contract.

3.

Pre commissioning

3.1.

On completion of the installation of all pumps, piping, valves,

pipe
connections, electrical wiring, motor control panels and water level
controlling devices the contractor shall proceed as follows:-

a)

Testing of MCC

b)

Tests to be carried out for motor control centres shall be:

c)

Insulation resistance test with 500 volt megger, before and after high voltage
test, on all power and control wiring.

d)

High voltage test sat 2000 volts AC for one minute on all power and control
wiring.

e)

Low voltage continuity test (6 volts) on power wiring of each feeder,

between bus bars and the outgoing terminals with switches and contactors
in closed position.

f)

Low voltage continuity test (6 volts) on all control wiring.

g)

Operation test for all feeders with only control supply made 'on' to ensure
correctness of control wiring, operation of the various equipment used such
as push buttons, protective devices, indicating lamps and relays etc. All
contactors shall be checked and there shall be no chattering.

Vol. II / 162

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

h)

Earth continuity test with voltage not exceeding 6 volts between various noncurrent carrying metallic parts of equipment, steel work etc. And the earth bus
provided in the MCC.

i)

Operation of all instruments and meters provided on the MCC.

3.2
i)

Pipe work
Check all clamps, supports and hangers provided for the pipes.

ii)

Fill up pipes with water and apply hydrostatic pressure to the system as
given in the relevant section of the specifications. If any leakage is found,
rectify the same and retest the pipes.

iii)

check all face piping and valves

iv)

check air blower connections

Commissioning & testing

4.1

All pumping sets

Start the duty pump on manual controls, check its operation and then test run
on auto controls. Change over the duty pump and test it in the same manner
as the first pump.

4.2

Test run the entire system to ensure satisfactory performance.

Handing Over
All commissioning and testing shall be done by the contactor to the complete
satisfaction of the Project Manager and the job handed over to the Project
Manager or his authorized representative.
Contractor shall also hand over, to the Project Manager charge, all
maintenance & operation manuals, 4 sets of As Built drawings and all other
items as per the terms of the contract.

6
a)

Guarantees
The contractor shall submit a warranty for all equipment, materials and
accessories supplied by him against manufacturing defects, malfunctioning or
under capacity functioning.

b)

The form of warranty shall be as approved by the Project Manager.

c)

The warranty shall be valid for a period of one year from the date of
commissioning and handing over.

Vol. II / 163

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

d)

The warranty shall expressly include replacement of all defective or under

capacity equipment. Project Manager may allow repair of certain equipment if
the same is found to meet the requirement for efficient functioning of the
system.

e)

The warranty shall include replacement of any equipment found to have

capacity lesser that the rated capacity as accepted in the contract. The
replacement equipment shall be approved by the Project Manager.

f)

The contractor shall separately submit with this offer his charges per
month for operation of mechanical equipments after commissioning and
handing over.
--- End of Section 9 --Commissioning and Guarantees

Vol. II / 164

Sen & Lall

Section 10
1.

Spec/Tender doc.

Technical Information for Water Supply & Drainage Pumps

Pumps
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)

Make
Model
Pump Discharge
Max/Min
Pump Head Min/Max,
Impeller Material
Motor HP
(Specify make, class of insulation &
rated voltage %)
Shaft Seal Type & make
Type of Coupling
Efficiency of Pump
Type of Bearings
RPM

2. Pressure Tanks (Where specified)

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Make
Material of Construction
Internal finish
External finish
Air balloon/ diaphgram
specifications

3. Submersible pumps (If Applicable)

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)

Basement

Make
Model No.
Pump discharge lpm
max / min
Pump head min/max,
Impeller material
Motor HP
(Specify make, class of insulation &
rated voltage %)
Shaft seal Type & make
Type of coupling
Efficiency of pump
Type of bearings
RPM

Vol. II / 165

Sewage

Sen & Lall

Motor Control Centres

required

Spec/Tender doc.

Give

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

Make
Type (floor/wall mounted)
Make of switch gear
Make of meters
Make of accessories
Confirm that all switch gear
starters match the capacities
of pumps offered.
5. Power & control cables
a) Make
6. Electronic Level controllers
a) Make
b) Model No.
7. Electronic High Water Alarm
a) Make
b) Model No.
8. Electronic Level Indicator
a) Make
b) Model
9. Pipes
a) Make offered
b) Heavy Class 150 mm dia & below
c) Heavy Class 200 mm dia & above
10. Butterfly Valves
a) Make
b) Material
c) Test pressure
11. NRV Slim Type
a) Make
b) Material
c) Test pressure
12. Vibration eliminators
a) Make
b) Material
c) Test pressure
Vol. II / 166

detail

on

separate

sheets

if

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

13. Filters
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

Water Filter

Make
Model
No. Offered
Material of construction
Shell plate thickness
Dished ends plate thickness
Dimensions

a) Diameter
b) Height of filter
c) Total height
14.
Pressure
a) Working pressure
b) Test pressure
c) Filtration/holding Capacity
d) Inlet/outlet sizes
Painting/coating
a) Inside
b) Outside
15.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
15.
a)
b)
c)
d)

Equipment
Air Blower
Make
Model
Pump Discharge
Max/Min
Pump Head Min/Max,
Impeller Material
Motor HP
(Specify make, class of insulation &
rated volatage %)
Shaft Seal
Type of Coupling
Efficiency of Pump
Type of Bearings
Speed of Pumps

Chlorinator

Motor control centres

Type (floor/wall mounted)
Make of switch gear
Make of panel meters
Confirm that all
switch gear starters
are of capacities
reqd. For pumps offered.
--- End of Section 11--Vol. II / 167

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1.1

Fire suppression works specified in the tender have to be executed in

accordance with:

1.1.1 The rules and regulations of Local Fire Authority as per the statutory
regulations applicable for obtaining the occupation certificate from the Local
Development/Fire Authority.
1.1.2 Applicable norms laid down by the National Building Code of Bureau of Indian
Standards (B.I.S.) shall be followed as applicable.
1.1.3 The codes of the National Fire Protection Association of USA (NFPA) shall
use as a general guide for good engineering practice, design and
workmanship norms. No certificate of compliance to NFPA codes will be
required.
1.2

All materials used in the works shall have Bureau of Indian Standards valid
certification stamped, marked or cast on the material in an acceptable and
approved manner.

1.3

It is the contractor's responsibility to ensure the competence of design to meet

the above requirements.

1.4

Drawings issued with the tenders are schematic and indicate the concept.
Contractor shall make his shop drawings on basis of Architectural and Interior
design drawings issued by the Engineer-in - charge. Work will be executed
only as per approved shop drawings.

1.5

Quantities in the tender document are approximate worked out on the tender
drawing issued.

1.6

Contractors are invited to highlight any aspects of the contract document that
may need revision or reconsideration before the work is awarded. He must
furnish details of any variations in the specifications or the quantities that may
be necessary for him to comply with the Code and statutory requirements.
These may be identified and approval of the Project managers taken before
the start of the work.

1.7

Contractors shall furnish detailed Shop drawings, hydraulic and other design
calculations for submission and approval of the Local Fire Authority and for
Insurance Companies

Vol. II / 168

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

2.0

System Design

2.1

Fire suppression system for the building is based on the concept of "total
protection" by the wet riser hydrant and sprinkler system for the entire
premises with excepted areas identified on the drawings or as instructed by
the Project Managers.

2.2

Water Storage & Pump House

2.2.1 A static underground RCC water storage tank in one compartment having
gross water storage capacity of 200 cum will be provided. The tank will be
provided with manholes, inserts, puddle flanges, ladders inside and outside
the tanks by the civil contractor.
2.2.2 One over head water storage tank of 10 cum on each tower as a secondary
water source for the sprinkler system will be provided on the terrace.
2.2.3 The pump house is located in the upper basement so as to provide net
positive suction to all pumps. Test lines from pumps shall discharge back into
the fire tank to conserve water.
2.2.4 Configuration and operating conditions of pumps are given in the
Specifications.
2.3.

Wet Riser Hydrant System

2.3.1 The building will be provided with a wet riser system. Hydrants are fed from a
150 mm dia M.S. pipe endless ring main running all round the building. The
ring main will be provided with three isolation valves to enable atleast a part
of the main to provide water in case a section is under repairs.
2.3.2 External fire hydrants with butterfly isolation valves will be provided on the
ring main. Hydrants shall be located approx. 2 m away from the building.
Internal wet risers for the building shall be connected to the ring main with an
non return valve and a three way fire brigade inlet connection with isolation
butterfly valve for each wet riser connection.
2.3.3 Hydrant stations and cabinets shall be provided at all designated locations
inside and along with the external hydrants. The hydrant stations shall be
located in a MS steel fire cabinets as per drawings and will contain all items
described in the BOQ and specifications.

Vol. II / 169

Sen & Lall

2.4.

Spec/Tender doc.

Sprinkler System

2.4.1 A separate and independent riser fire sprinkler for basement shall be provided
as shown on the drawings. The system will be divided in several zones with
their own installation valves, located in the basement or near the fire pump
room.
2.4.2 The entire basemnt is protected with automatic sprinkler system with
permitted exceptions e.g. electrical switch rooms, power transformers and
D.G. rooms as identified.
2.4.3 Types of sprinklers to be used shall be as given in specifications, BOQ and
approved by the Project Managers
2.5.

Pumping System

2.5.1 The pumping system shall provide the water supply and pressure to the wet
riser fire and sprinkler mains.Diesel Engine will be a common stand by.
2.5.2 Provide a full bore test valve on the by pass line with rate of flow meter on
the common pump header to discharge in the water tank. Also provide an
isolation valve on headers outlet to each circuit to enable pressure setting
and testing of pumps.
End of General Instructions

Vol. II / 170

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
FIRE SUPPRESSION WORKS

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTIONI TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.0

FIRE FIGHTING SERVICES

1.1

Work under this sub-head consists of furnishing all Labour, Materials,

equipment and accessories necessary and required to completely install the
Fire Fighting equipment etc., specified hereinafter and given in the Schedule
of Quantities.

1.2

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the work of Fire Fighting
System shall include the followings:

a)

Providing MS black steel pressure pipe line main including valves, fire
hydrants, Excavation for Pipe, laying of pipe, painting of pipe and Making
Connection to supply system.

b)

Black Steel Pipe, Mains Laterals, Branches, Valves, Hangers and

Appurtenances.

c)

Hose Reels, Rubberized fabric lined hose pipes, Hose cabinets, Sprinkler
heads and Landing Valves.

d)

Portable Fire Extinguishers

e)

Fire Fighting Pumps, diesel operated pumps, panels and all connected
accessories including suction & delivery pipes.

f) Testing Commissioning and giving live demonstrations to the various Inspection

Authorities and Obtain their No Objection Certificate (NOC) for occupation of
the building.
2.
2.1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All materials shall be of the best quality conforming to the Specifications and
subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.

2.2

Pipes and Fittings shall be fixed truly Vertical, Horizontal or in slopes as

required in a neat workman like manner.

2.3

Pipes shall be fixed in a manner so as to provide easy accessibility for repair

and maintenance and shall not cause any obstruction in shaft, passage etc.

2.4

Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceiling by suitable clamps at

intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for
RCC ceilings.

2.5

Valves and other appurtenance shall be so located that they are easily
accessible for operation, repairs and maintenance.
Vol. II / 171

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

PIPES

3.1

All pipes within and outside the building in exposed locations and shafts
including connections buried under floor shall be MS pipes as follows:

3.1.1 Pipes 150 mm dia and below IS: 1239 heavy class
3.1.2 Pipe 200 mm dia and above IS 3589 of thickness specified.
4

PIPE FITTINGS.

4.1

Pipes and fittings means tees, elbows, couplings, flanges, reducers etc. And
all such connecting devices that are needed to complete the piping work in its
totality.

4.2

Fabricated fittings shall not be permitted for pipe diameters 50 mm and below.

4.3

When used, they shall be fabricated, welded and inspected in workshops

under
supervision of Project Managers whose welding procedures have
been approved by the TAC as per TAC rule 4102 for sprinkler system and
applicable to hydrant and sprinkler system. For "T" connections, pipes shall
be drilled and reamed. Cutting by gas or electrical welding will not be
accepted.

JOINTING

5.1

Screwed (50 mm dia pipes and below)

Joint for black steel pipes and fittings shall be metal-to-metal thread joints. A
small amount of red lead may be used for lubrication and rust prevention.
Joints shall not be welded or caulked. (With screwed MS forged fittings)

5.2

Welded (65 mm dia and above)

Joints between M.S. pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes and
fittings having "V" groove and welded with electrical resistance welding in an
approved manner. Buried pipes will be subject to X-Ray test from an
approved agency as per the TAC norms at the cost of contractor. (With
welded M.S. fittings heavy class with V-Groove). The welding machine shall
be 3 Phase of required current and capacity.

5.3

Flanges.
Flanged joints shall be provided on:
a) Straight runs not exceeding 30 m on pipelines 80 mm dia and above.
b) Both ends of any fabricated fittings e.g. bends, tees etc. of 65 mm dia or
larger diameter.
Vol. II / 172

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

c) For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with

other type of pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and
required as good for engineering practice.
d) Flanges shall be as per IS 6392-1971, Table E with appropriate number of
G.I. nuts and bolts, half threaded with 3 mm insertion neoprene gasket
complete.
5.4

Unions
Provide Approved type of dismountable unions on pipes lines 65 mm and
below in similar places as specified for flanges shall be provided.

6.0

PIPE PROTECTION

6.1

All pipes above ground and in exposed locations shall be painted with one
coat of Red Oxide Primer and two or more coats of Synthetic Enamel Paint of
approved shade.

6.2

All black steel pipes under floors or below ground shall be provided with
protection against corrosion by application of 100mm wide and 4mm thick
layer of PYPKOTE/ MAKPOLYKOTE over the pipe, as per manufacturers
specifications.

6.3

PIPE PROTECTION TEST

6.3.1 All buried pipes protected with pype-coat shall be tested for electrical
conductivity by Halliday test conducted as per the TAC requirements.
6.3.2 The trench will remain open till testing is checked and approved by
ARCHITECTS
7.

PIPE SUPPORTS

7.1

All pipes shall be adequately supported from ceiling or walls from

existing/new inserts by Structural clamps fabricated from M.S. Structural e.g.
Rods, Channels, Angles and Flats as per details given in drawings and
specifications. All clamps shall be painted with one coat of red lead and two
coats of black Enamel paint.

7.2

Where inserts are not provided, the Contractor shall provide anchor fasteners.
Anchor fastener shall be fixed to walls and ceilings by drilling holes with
Electrical drill in an approved manner as recommended by the manufacturer
of the fasteners.

Vol. II / 173

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

8.

TESTING

8.1

All pipes in the system shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 1.5 times of
the working pressure or minimum of 15 kg/cm 2 without drop in the pressure
for at least 2 hours.

8.2

Rectify all leakages, make adjustment and retest as required.

9.

ANCHOR BLOCK

9.1

Contractor shall provide suitable cement concrete, anchor blocks of ample

dimensions at all bends, tee connection and other places required and
necessary for overcoming pressure thrusts in pipes. Anchor blocks shall be of
cement concrete 1 : 2 : 4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone aggregate
20 mm nominal size).

10.

VALVES

10.1

Valves, gauge and orifice plates

10.1.1 Sluice Valves above 65 mm shall be of cast iron body and bronze/gunmetal
seat. They shall conform to type PN 1.6 of IS: 780-1980, valves upto 65mm
shall be of Gunmetal Fullway Valve with wheel tested to 20 kg/cm 2 class-II as
per IS: 778-1971. Valve wheels shall be of right hand type and have an arrow
head engraved or cast thereon showing the direction for turning open and
closing.
10.1.2 Non-return valves shall be of Cast Iron body and Bronze/Gunmetal seat.
They shall conform to class of IS:5312 and have flanged ends. They shall be
swing check type in horizontal runs and lift check type in vertical runs of
piping. They shall not be spring-loaded type.
11.

EXTERNAL YARD HYDRANTS

11.1

The Contractor shall provide External Fire Hydrant in the Ring or on External
Fire Line, as per specifications as specified in Schedule of Quantities and as
shown in drawings. The spacing of the hydrants and the distance from the
building shall be maintained as per relevant requirements of latest relevant
codes, unless specified herewith.

11.2

Each External Fire Hydrant shall be provided with an External Fire Hose
Cabinet of M.S or fiber glass, as specified in Schedule of Quantities of size 90
x 60 x 25 cm, as approved by the Architect to equip 2 nos. of 63 mm dia
controlled percolating hose and accessories as required. The cabinet shall be
installed near the Hydrant as per details, approved by the Engineer-inCharge/Architect.
Vol. II / 174

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

12.

INTERNAL HYDRANTS

12.1

The Internal Hydrant outlet shall comprise Single Headed Single Outlet
Gunmetal Landing Valve conforming to type A of IS: 5290-1977. Separate
valve on the head shall form part of the landing valve construction.

12.2

A cap with chain is provided on one head of the outlet. The hydrant will have
an instantaneous pattern female coupling for connecting to Hose Pipe.

12.3

The Landing Valve shall be fitted to a Tee connection on the wet riser at the
landing.

13.0

FIRST-AID HOSE REEL EQUIPMENT

13.1

First aid hose reel equipment shall comprise reel, hose guide fixing bracket
hose tubing globe valve, stopcock and nozzle. This shall conform to IS: 884 1969. The hose tubing shall confirm to IS: 1532-1969.

13.2

The hose tubing shall be 20 mm dia and 36.5m long. The Aluminum nozzle
5mm and globe valve shall be of 20 mm size.

13.3

The fixing bracket shall be of swinging type. Operating instructions shall be

engraved on the assembly. This heavy duty mild steel and cast iron brackets
shall be conforming to IS: 884 - 1969. The first-aid hose reel shall be
connected directly to the MS pipe riser taken independently from ring.

14.

HOSE PIPES, BRANCH PIPES AND NOZZLES

14.1

Hose pipes

14.1.1 Two numbers Hose Pipes shall be rubber lined woven jacketed and 63mm in
dia. 15m long. They shall confirm to type A (Reinforced rubber lined) of IS:
636 - 1979. The hose shall be sufficiently flexible and capable of being rolled.
14.1.2 Each run of hose shall be complete with necessary coupling at the ends to
match with the landing valve or with another run of hose pipe or with branch
pipe. The couplings shall be of instantaneous spring lock type. This shall be
conforming to IS: 903.
15.

BRANCH PIPE

15.1

Branch pipes
Branch pipe shall be of Aluminum alloy as given in BOQ 63 mm dia and be
complete with male instantaneous spring lock type coupling for connection to
the hose pipe. The branch pipe shall be externally threaded to receive the
nozzle.
Vol. II / 175

Sen & Lall

15.2

Spec/Tender doc.

Nozzle
The nozzle shall be of Aluminum as specified in BOQ 20 mm in (internal)
diameter. The screw threads at the inlet connection shall match with the
threading on the branch pipe. The inlet end shall have a hexagonal head to
facilitate screwing of the nozzle on to the branch pipe with nozzle spanner.

15.3

End Couplings, Branch pipe, and Nozzles shall conform to IS: 903 - 1985.

15.4

Two CP hoses of 15m length with couplings shall be provided with each
External (Yard) Hydrant. Two RRL hoses of 15m length, as specified, with
couplings shall be provided with each Internal Hydrant. One nozzle and one
branch pipe with coupling shall be provided with each Yard Hydrant and
Internal Hydrant.

16.

HOSE CABINET

16.1

The internal hose cabinet shall accommodate the Hose Pipes, Branch Pipe,
Nozzle First aid Hose Reel and Hydrant Outlets and shall be fabricated from 2
mm thick or 14 mm gauge MS/ aluminum sheet as specified in Bill of
Quantities. The overall size shall be 2100x1200x600 mm, or as specified in
the Architectural details. This shall have lockable centre opening glazed doors
as per the requirement and as per Architectural details. Where the niche for
wet riser is provided with shutters, separate hose cabinet as above may be
dispensed with.

16.2

The hose cabinet shall be painted red and stove enameled and woods FIRE
written in front glazed portion.

17.

FIRE BRIGADE INLET CONNECTIONS

17.1

Fire Brigade Inlet connection shall be provided near the pump house and to
the wet riser system as specified and as described in the BOQ, for the
following purposes:

17.2

i)

Fire Brigade suction connection for fire static tank with provision of foot
valve.

ii)

Fire brigade inlet connection to fire static tank.

iii)

Fire brigade inlet connection to the wet riser system. Each connection
shall be provided with similar dia of Sluice valve and Non return valve.

The locations of these Fire brigade connection shall be suitably decided with
the approval of Consultant/Landscape Architect and with a view that these are
easily accessible to the fire brigade, without any possible Hindrance.
Vol. II / 176

Sen & Lall

18.

Spec/Tender doc.

HYDRAULIC SIREN
A siren shall be provided in the system, to indicate the flow of water in the wet
riser system as may be specified in Bill of Quantities. Alternative
arrangements may also be adopted. This shall be turbine type.

19.

VALVE CHAMBERS

19.1 Contractor shall provide suitable brick masonry chamber in cement mortar 1 :
5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) on cement concrete foundations 150 mm thick
in 1 : 5 : 10 mix (1 cement : 5 fine sand : 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm
nominal size) 15 mm thick plaster inside and outside finished with a floating
coat of neat cement inside with cast iron surface box approved by fire brigade
including excavation, back filling complete.
19.2

Valve chambers shall be of following size:

For depths 100 cm and beyond 90x90x100 cm

20.

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided as per Bill of Quantities and shall
confirm to IS: 2190-1979.

Two 9 lit. water CO2 type for every 600 m 2 area with minimum of 1
extinguishers per floor as per IS: 940-1989

Dry Chemical powder type of 5 kg capacity as per IS: 2171

CO2 type of 4.5 kg capacity as per IS: 2878.

21.

SPRINKLER HEADS

21.1

Sprinkler heads shall be provided at approximate spacing to cover 12 m 2 per

Sprinkler head. The spacing shall however, be in conformity with the drawings
and properly coordinated with Electrical Fixtures, Ventilation Ducts and Grills
and other services along the ceiling.

21.2

Sprinkler heads shall be Chrome finished Brass/Gunmetal with quartz bulb

with a temperature rating of 68C. Sprinkler heads shall be of type and quality
approved by the local fire brigade authority. The inlet shall be screwed.
Sprinkler heads shall be pendent, recessed or special application side wall
sprinkler types as shown in drawings. All Sprinklers should have the
Specifications, as far as maximum possible as per NFPA requirements and
shall be UL/FM approved.
Vol. II / 177

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

21.3

Contractor shall supply spare Sprinkler Heads of each type as per

requirement and one Spanner for each type of sprinkler neatly installed in a
steel box with glass shutters at locations approved by the Engineer - in charge.

22.

ALARM VALVE & AUTOMATIC WATER MOTOR GONG VALVE

The alarm valve & water motor gong valve is to be provided on the Sprinkler
main delivery pipe with items No. 1 to 11 U.L. listed F.M. approved as per
NFPA 13 complete in all respects.

23.0

FIRE FIGHTING PUMPS

23.1

Fire and Jockey Pumps

23.1.1 Pumping sets shall be single/multi stage horizontal centrifugal single or multi
outlet with cast iron body and bronze dynamically balanced impellers.
Connecting shaft shall be stainless steel with bronze sleeve and grease
lubricated bearings.
23.1.2 Pumps shall be connected to the drive by means of spacer type love-joy
coupling, which shall be individually balanced dynamically and statically.
23.1.3 The coupling joins the prime mover with the pump shall be provided with a
sheet metal guard.
23.1.4 Pumps shall be provided with approved type of mechanical seals.
23.1.5 Pumps shall be capable of delivering not less than 150% of the rated capacity
of water at a head of not less than 65% of the rated head. The shut-off head
shall not exceed 120% of the rated head.
23.1.6 The pump shall meet the requirements of the tariff advisory committee and
unit shall be design proven in fire protection services.
23.2

Motors for Electric Driven Pumps

23.2.1 Electrically driven pumps shall be provided with totally enclosed fan cooled
induction motors. For fire pumps, the motors should be rated not to draw
starting current more than 3 times normal running current.
23.2.2 Motors for fire protection pumps shall be at least equivalent to the horse
power required to drive the pump at 150% of its rated discharge and shall be
designed for continuous full load duty and shall be design proven in similar
service.
23.2.3 Motors for fire pumps shall meet all requirements and specifications of the
tariff advisory committee.
Vol. II / 178

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

23.2.4 Motors shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 Phase, 50 cycles AC supply and shall
be designed for 33o C ambient temperature. Motors shall conform to IS: 325.
23.2.5 Motors shall be designed for auto start system.
23.2.6 Motors shall be capable of handling the required starting torque of the pumps.
23.2.7 Contractor shall provide heating arrangements for the main fire pump motor
to ensure that motor windings shall remain dry.
23.3

Air Vessel for Fire Pumps

23.3.1 An air vessel fabricated from 10mm MS sheet with dished ends and suitable
supporting legs shall be provided in the pump house. Air vessel shall be
provided with a 100mm dia flanged connection from pump, one 25mm dia
drain with valve, one gunmetal water level gauge and 25mm sockets for
pressure switches. the vessel shall be 450mmx2000mm dia high and tested
or 1.5 times of the working pressure or 13 kg/cm 2, whichever is greater.
23.3.2 The fire pumps shall operate on drop of pressure in the mains automatically
or manually as specified below:23.4 Operating Conditions for the Service Pumps
23.4.1
Fire Service
Nos
Cut in
Cut Out
Pump
.
Pressure
Pressure
Jockey pump
One
Main pump

23.5

One

Remarks
To auto start and auto stop on
pressure switch on air vessel to
stop.
To auto start on pressure switch
on air vessel and manual off.

Push
button
manual
Diesel
Fire One
Push
To auto start on pressure switch
Pump
button
on air vessel and manual off.
manual
Sprinkler Pump One
Push
To auto start on pressure switch
button
on air vessel and manual off.
manual
(The above ratings will be adjusted finally at the time of commissioning as per
site requirement and final setting shall be kept as per approval of Engineer-inCharge/Project Consultant).
Diesel Fire Pump

23.5.1 Scope
This section covers the details of requirements of the standby fire pump,
operated by a diesel engine.
Vol. II / 179

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

23.5.2 General
The diesel pump set shall be suitable for automatic operation complete with
necessary automatic starting gear, for starting on wet battery system and
shall be complete with all accessories. Both engine and pump shall be
assembled on a common bed plate, fabricated from mild steel channel.
23.5.3 Drive
The pump shall be only direct driven by means of a flexible coupling.
Coupling guard shall also be provided. The speed shall be 1500/2900 RPM
as specified in bill of quantities.
23.5.4 Fire pump
a) The fire pump shall be horizontal split casing centrifugal type. It shall have
a capacity to deliver 2280 lpm as specified, developing adequate head so
as to ensure a minimum pressure of 3.5 kg/cm 2 at the highest and the
farthest outlet. The delivery pressure at the pump outlet shall be not less
than 7 kg/cm2 in any case. The pump may be single stage or multi stage
as specified. The pump shall be capable of giving a discharge of not less
than 150% of the rated discharge at a head of not less than 65% of the
rated head. The shut off head shall be within 120% of the rated head.
b) The pump casing shall be of cast iron to grade FG 200 to I.S: 210 and
parts like impeller shaft sleeve, wearing-ring etc. shall be of non-corrosive
metal like bronze/brass/gunmetal. The shaft shall be of stainless steel.
The pump shall be provided with mechanical seal.
c) The pump casing shall be designed to withstand 1.5 times the working
pressure.
d) Bearings of pump shall be effectively sealed to prevent loss of lubricant or
entry of dust or water.
23.6

Diesel Engine

23.6.1 Environmental conditions - The engine shall be required to operate under

the conditions of environment as specified.

Vol. II / 180

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

23.6.2 Engine Rating - The engine shall be cold starting type without the necessity
of preliminary heating of the engine cylinders or combustion chamber (for
example, by wicks, cartridge, heater plugs etc). The engine shall be multi
cylinder/vertical 4 stroke cycle, water cooled diesel engine, developing
suitable HP at the operating speed specified to drive the fire pump.
Continuous capacity available for the load shall be exclusive of the power
requirement of auxiliaries of the diesel engine, and after correction for
altitude, ambient temperature and humidity for the specified environmental
conditions as mentioned. This shall be at least 20% greater than the
maximum HP required to drive the pump at its duty point. It shall also be
capable of driving the pump at 150% of the rated discharge at 65% of rated
head. The engine shall be capable of continuous non-stop operation for 8
hours and at least 3000 hours of operation before major overhaul. The engine
shall have 10% overload capacity for one hour in any period of 12 hours
continuous run. The engine shall accept full load within 15 seconds from the
receipt of signal to start. The diesel engine shall conform to BS 649/IS
1601/IS 10002, all amended upto date.
23.6.3 Engine Accessories - The engine shall be complete with the following
accessories:(i)

Flywheel dynamically balanced.

(ii)

Direct coupling for pump and coupling guard.

(iii)

Radiator with hoses, fan, water pump, drive arrangement and

guard.

(iv)

Corrosion Resister

(v)

Air cleaner, oil bath type/dry type

(vi)

Fuel service tank support, semi-rotary pump and fuel oil filter
with necessary pipe work.

(vii)

Pump for lubricating oil and lub. oil filter

(viii)

Elect. starting battery (2x12 v)

(ix)

Exhaust silencer with necessary pipe work

(x)

Governor

(xi)

Instrument panel housing all the gauges, including Tachometer,

hour meter and starting switch with key (for manual staring).

(xii)

Necessary safety controls

(xiii)

Winterisation arrangement, where specified.

Vol. II / 181

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

23.6.4 Starting system - The starting system shall comprise necessary batteries
(2x12 v), 24 volts starter motor of adequate capacity and axle type gear to
match with the toothed ring on the flywheel. By metallic relay protection to
protect starting motor from excessively long cranking runs suitably integrated
with engine protection system shall be included within the scope of the work.
The battery capacity shall be suitable for meeting the needs of the starting
system.
The battery capacity shall be adequate for 10 consecutive starts without
recharging with cold engine under full compression.
The scope shall cover all cabling, terminals, initial charging etc.
23.6.5 Exhaust system - The exhaust system shall be complete with silencer
suitable for outdoor installation, and silencer piping including bends and
accessories needed to be taken out of the building as per statutory
requirement. The Contractors are advised to see the drawing and site to
asses the length of exhaust pipe required and its cost & installation included
with cost of pump. The total backpressure shall not exceed the engine
manufacturers recommendation. The exhaust piping shall be suitably lagged.
23.6.6 Engine shut down mechanism - This shall be manually operated and shall
return automatically to the starting position after use.
23.6.7 Governing System - The engine shall be provide with an adjustable
governor to control the engine speed within 5% of its rated speed under all
conditions of load up to full load. The governor shall be set to maintain rated
pump speed at maximum pump load.
23.6.8 Engine Instrumentation - Engine instrumentation shall include the
following:(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)

Lub. oil pressure gauge.

Lub. oil temperature gauge
Water pressure gauge
Water temperature gauge
Tachometer
Hour meter.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 182

The instrumentation panel shall be suitably residient mounted on the engine.

23.6.9 Engine Protection Devices - Following engine protection and automatic shut
down facilities shall be provided:(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Low lub. oil pressure

High cooling water temp.
High lub. oil temperature
Over speed shut down.

23.6.10 Pipe work - All pipe line with fittings and accessories required shall be
provided for fuel oil, lub. oil and exhaust systems, copper piping of adequate
sizes shall be used for lub. oil and fuel oil. MS piping will be permitted for
exhaust.
23.6.11 Anti Vibration Mounting - Suitable vibration mounting duly approved by
Engineer-in-charge shall be employed for mounting the unit so as to minimize
transmission of vibration to the structure. The isolation efficiency achievable
shall be clearly indicated.
23.6.12 Battery Charger - Necessary float and boost charger shall be incorporated
in the control section of the power and control panel, to keep the battery
under trim condition. Voltmeter to indicate the state of charge of the batteries
shall be provided.
24.0

CABLES

24.1

Contractor shall provide all power control cables from the motor control centre
to various motors, level controllers and other control devices.

24.2

Cables shall conform to IS: 1554 and carry ISI mark.

24.3
24.4

Wiring cables shall conform to IS 694.

All power and wiring cables shall be aluminium conductor PVC insulated
armoured and PVC sheathed of 1100 volts grade.

24.5

All control cables shall be copper conductor PVC insulated armoured and
PVC sheathed 1100 Volt grade.

24.6

All cables shall have stranded conductors. The cables shall be in drums as far
as possible and bear manufacturers name.

24.7

All cables joints shall be made in approved manner as per standard practice.

24.8

The cable jointing shall be Crimping type.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 183

25.0

CABLE TRAYS

25.1

Contractor shall provide G.I. perforated cable trays at locations as shown on

the drawings and of sizes as given in the bill of quantities, with G.I. sheet
thickness of 1.5mm.
Cable trays shall be supported from the bottom of the slab at intervals of
60cms at both ends by welding support rods with insert plates OR Anchor
fasteners.

25.2

25.3

Cost of clips, bolts, nuts, support rods and any other materials required to fix
the trays in proper manner shall be included in the rate for trays.

26.0

EARTHING

26.1

There shall be an independent earthing station. The earthing shall consist of

an earth tape connected to an independent plate made of copper or G.I.
having a conductivity of not less than 100% international standard. All
electrical apparatus, cable boxes and sheath/armour clamps shall be
connected to the main bar by means of branch earth connections of
appropriate size. All joints in the main bar and between main bar and branch
bars shall have the lapping surface properly tinned to prevent oxidation. The
joints shall be riveted and sweated.

26.2

Earth plates shall be buried in a pit of 1.20x1.20M at minimum depth of 3m

below ground. The connections between main bar shall be made by means
of three 10mm brass studs and fixed at 100mm centres. The pit shall be filled
with coke breeze, rock salt and loose soil. A GI pipe of 20mm dia with
perforations on the periphery shall be placed vertically over the plate to reach
ground level for watering.

26.3

A brick masonry manhole 30x30x30xcm size shall be provided to surround

the pipe for inspection. A bolted removable link connecting main bar outside
the pit portion leading to the plates shall be accommodated, in this manhole
for testing.

27.0

MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

27.1

MCC shall be cubical type i.e. one motor feeder completely in one cubicle,
and shall be fabricated from 16 gauge MS sheet with dust & vermin proof
construction. It shall have Powder Coated finish and shall be fitted with
suitable etched plastic identification plates for each motor. The cubicle shall
comprise of the following: a) Incoming main MCCB of required capacity.
Vol. II / 184

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

b) One MPCB for each motor.

c) Fully automatic as specified DOL/Star delta starters suitable for motor HP
with push buttons one for each motor and ON/OFF indicating LED type
lamps.
d) Single phasing preventor of appropriate rating for each motor.
e) Rotary duty selector switch.
f) Panel type ampere meters one for each motor.
g) Panel type voltmeter on incoming main with rotary selector switch to read
voltage between phase to neutral and phase-to-phase.
h) LED type-indicating lamps for in incoming main and ON/OFF indicating
lamps for each motor.
i) Rotary switch for manual or auto operation for each
(manual/auto/off).
j) Fully taped separate aluminium bus bars of required capacity.

pump

k) Space for liquid level controllers as specified.

l) The panel shall be prewired with colour-coded wiring. All interconnecting
wiring from incoming main to switch gear, meters and accessories within
the switchboard panel.
m) Power wiring and Control wiring in MCC to be of copper only and
minimum size 4 & 1.5 mm2 respectively.
27.2

All switchgears and accessories shall be of approved make such as

Siemens, English Electric, Larson & Toubro or equivalent.

27.3

Switchboard cubicles shall be floor or wall mounted type as recommended by

manufacturers.

28.0

VIBRATION ELIMINATORS
All suction and delivery lines shall be provided with double flanged reinforced
neoprene flexible pipe connectors. Connectors should be suitable for a
working pressure of each pump. Length of the connector shall be as per
manufacturers details. Flexible connectors shall be as manufactured by
Relay Corpn., New Delhi.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Vol. II / 185

29.0

PIPING

29.1

Pipes for suction and delivery shall be galvanised/M.S tube (heavy duty)
confirming to IS:1239 upto 150mm dia and as per IS:3589 for dia 200mm and
above or as specified in bill of quantities. The flanges shall be M.S.

29.2

Full way and check valves 65mm dia and below shall be gunmetal tested to
20 kg/cm2 pressure certified and conforming to IS:778.

29.3

Suction strainer or foot valves shall be C.I., confirming to I.S:4038 - 1979, as

specified in bill of quantities.

29.4

Joints
All pipes and fittings shall be provided with flanged joints, with flanges either
screwed or welded complete and jointed with 1.5mm thick gasket complete
with nuts, bolts and washers etc.

29.5

Testing
All M.S. pipes shall be tested to hydrostatically for a period of 30 minutes to a
pressure of 16 kg/cm2 without drop in pressure.

30.0
30.1
30.2
30.3
30.4

MEASUREMENTS
Raw water pumps shall be measured by numbers and shall include all item as
given in the bill of quantities.
Motor control panel and level controllers shall be measured by numbers.
Pipes for suction and delivery header and mains shall be measured per linear
metre along the centre line of the pipe and shall be inclusive of all fittings.
Cable trays and cables shall be measured per linear meter.

30.5

Structural clamps including hangers shall be measured by weight calculated

from sections used. No separate payment shall be admissible for bolts,
anchor bolts, rawl plugs etc.

30.6

No separate payment shall be made for making connections of the existing

service lines to the pumps. Vibration eliminator pads are included in the
scope of this work.

Vol. II / 186

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

31.

COMMISSIONING

31.1

After successful testing of the different items in parts, the Contractor shall
provide all facilities including necessary pipings, labours, tools and
equipments etc. for carrying out testing and commissioning of the entire fire
fighting system complete as per requirement in the presence of Client
representative and during the visit of the Fire Officer whenever and as may be
required. Generally, the following test/inspection has to be carried out:-

32.0
32.1

32.2

(a)

For the automatic operation of the Jockey/main fire pump and diesel
pump as per the sequences required.

(b)

For checking the pressure available at the farthest and highest point in
the fire ring and for the wet riser system.

(c)

For the automatic operation of the Sprinkler System either by a dummy

fire below a sprinkler head by using the Inspection Test Valves. In this
case, the annunciation panel indicating the particular zone and
mechanical Gong valve should work.

GUARANTEE
The contractor shall submit a warranty for all equipment, materials and
accessories supplied by him against manufacturing defects, malfunctioning or
under capacity functioning.
The form of warranty shall be as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

32.3

The warranty shall be valid for a period of one year from the date of
commissioning and handing over.

32.4

The warranty shall expressly include replacement of all defective or under

capacity equipment. Engineer-in-charge may allow repair of certain
equipment if the same is found to meet the requirement for efficient
functioning of the system.

32.5

The warranty shall include replacement of any equipment found to have

capacity lesser than the rated capacity as accepted in the contract. The
replacement equipment shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

32.6

The contractor shall include in his rates the operation of all mechanical
equipment for a period of 12 months from the date of commissioning. No
separate payment will be made on this account.
END OF SECTION - I

Vol. II / 187

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION II

SHOP DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS

1.

The Contractor shall submit to the consultant two copies of Shop drawings for
Fire Fighting works as an Advance copy to the Engineer-in-charge for
approval before start of work. Subsequent to the approval of the shop
drawings, the Contractor shall submit six copies of Shop Drawings for
execution to the Engineer-in-charge. Also the Contractor shall submit four
copies of the Technical Specifications and Catalogues.

2.

Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following conditions:

(a)

Structural supports/hanging/laying and jointing details for all types of

pipes as required.

(b)

Fire Fighting layout plans as required and for any changes in the layout
of Fire Fighting/ Architectural drawings.

3.

The Contractor can only commence the work after the approval of above
documents by Consultant.

END OF SECTION II

Vol. II / 188

Sen & Lall

SECTION 3

Spec/Tender doc.
TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to select the pump/motor to meet

the requirements specified in the tender. Contractor is asked to fill up all the
datas given below.
1. Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System.
1.1
Pumps
Pump

Elec. Driven Fire

/Sprinkler Pump

Pump

1.1.1 Makes
1.1.2 Model No.
1.1.3 Rated Discharge (LPM)
1.1.4 Rated Head (M)
1.1.5 Speed (RPM)
1.1.6 No. of Stages
1.1.7 Efficiency at rates
Capacity & head
1.1.8 KW required at rated
Capacity & head
1.1.9 KW required at 150%
Rated discharge
1.1.10 Shut off head (M)
1.1.11 Material of Construction
a) Body
b) Impeller
c) Shaft
1.1.12 Whether pump is capable
of discharging
150% of rated
capacity at a head not less
than 65% of rated head.
1.1.13 Whether Automatic Priming
Arrangement included.

Vol. II / 189

Diesel Driven

Jockey

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

1.2
Pipes
1.2.1 Make
1.2.2 Standard/Class
1.2.3 Thickness
1.2.4 Painting details
for above ground
& exposed pipes
1.2.5 Wrapping & coating
1.2.6 Whether ISI marked
1.3

Fittings

Forged Fittings
Butt welded Fittings
(up to 50 mm dia) (65 mm dia &

above.)
1.3.1 Type
1.3.2 Make
1.3.3 Material
1.3.4 Type of ends
1.3.5 Pressure rating
1.3.6 Whether ISI marked
1.4

Valves

Butterfly

1.4.1 Make & Type

1.4.2 Type of ends
1.4.3 Material of construction
1.4.4 Test Pressure
1.4.5 Provided with all
Accessories including
gear system as per
relevant IS
1.4.6 Whether ISI marked/
TAC approved

Vol. II / 190

Sluice

Sen & Lall

1.5

Engine/Motors

Spec/Tender doc.

Engine

1.5.1 Make
Type & Model No
1.5.2 Frame Size
1.5.3 Speed (RPM)
1.5.4 Rated Cap. (KW)
1.5.5 Efficiency (%)
1.6

Control Panel (MCC)

1.6.1 Manufacturer
1.6.2 Dimensions
1.6.3 Type of construction
& mounting
1.6.4 Sheet Metal Enclosure
a) Material
b) Thickness
1.6.5 Electrical Rating
1.6.6 Make of starters/
Contactors
1.6.7 Rating of Contactors
1.6.8 Size & material of Bus bar
1.6.9 Annunciation system
1.6.10 Approx. weight
1.6.11 Painting details
1.6.12 Whether all equipment/
Components as per
Specification included

Vol. II / 191

Main Pump Jockey Pump

Sen & Lall

1.7

Spec/Tender doc.

Dual / Disk Type Non Return Valves

1.7.1 Make & Type

1.7.2 Type of ends
1.7.3 Material of construction
1.7.4 Test Pressure
1.7.5 Provided with all
Accessories including
gear system as per
relevant IS
1.7.6 Whether ISI marked/
TAC approved
1.8

G.M. Ball Valve

1.8.1 Make & Type

1.8.2 Type of ends
1.8.3 Whether confirm to
to & marked IS:778
1.9

Hydrant Landing Valve

1.9.1 Make & Type

1.9.2 Material of construction
1.9.3 Details of Flange
O.D. (MM)
P.C.D (MM)
No. of Holes
1.9.4 Whether ISI marked/
TAC approved
1.10

Hose Pipes

C.P. Hose

1.10.1 Make
1.10.2 Test Pressure
1.10.3 Dia (MM)
1.10.4 Length (M)
Vol. II / 192

RRL (Type A)

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

1.10.5 Material of couplings

1.10.6 Where hose &
Couplings ISI marked
1.11 Branch Pipes & Nozzles
1.11.1 Make
1.11.2 Material
1.11.3 Dia. of Coupling
1.11.4 Dia of Nozzle
1.11.5 Where ISI marked
1.12 Hose Cabinet
1.12.1 Size
1.12.2 Material
1.12.3 Thickness of sheet
1.12.4 Thickness of glass
1.12.5 Whether Rubber Gasket
Provided
1.12.6 Painting Details
1.13 First Aid Hose Reel
1.13.1 Make & Material
a) Drum
b) Hose
1.13.2 Size of Drum
(Dia x length)
1.13.3 Size of Hose
(Dia x length)
1.13.4 Hose test pressure
1.13.5 Size & material of
Nozzle
1.13.6 Size & material of
Shut off valve
Vol. II / 193

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

1.13.7 Whether complete unit

strictly confirms to
and marked IS:884
TAC approved
1.14

Pressure Switch

1.14.1 Make & Type

1.14.2 Type of ends
1.14.3 Test Pressure
1.14.4 Electrical Rating
1.14.5 Whether ISI marked/
TAC/UL approved
1.14.6 Whether complete with
gland or other accessories
1.15

Pressure Gauge

1.15.1 Make & Type

1.15.2 Dial size (mm)
1.15.3 Range (kg/cm.sq.)
1.15.4 Whether ISI marked/
TAC/UL approved
1.16

Flow Switch

1.16.1 Make & Type

1.16.2 Pressure Rating
1.16.3 Electrical Rating
1.16.4 Whether ISI marked/
TAC/UL approved

Vol. II / 194

Sen & Lall

2.1

Sprinkler Head Conventional

/ Upright
2.1.1 Make

Spec/Tender doc.

Pendant

2.1.2 Material
2.1.3 Type of sensing
Element & temperature
Rating (C)
2.1.4 Orifice size (MM)
2.1.5 Type (UPRIGHT/PENDENT/
CONVENTIONAL/SIDEWALL
/EXTENDED RANGE)
2.1.6 Whether listed /
Approved by UL/FH
2.2

Wet Alarm Valve

2.2.1 Make
2.2.2 Material
2.2.3 Size (MM)
2.2.4 Whether provided with
electric bell, test valve,
drain valve, & all other
training connections
2.2.5 Whether approved
hydraulic alarm
motor & gong provided
2.2.6 Whether valve & alarm
Motor & gong listed/
approved by
UL/FM/FOC/TAC
-:Vol. II / 195

Side wall

Concealed

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ELECTRICAL WORKS

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ELECTRICAL WORKS

1.0

GENERAL
The electrical Installation work shall be carried out in accordance with Indian
Standard Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring Installation IS 732:1989, Code of
Practice for Fire Safety of Building (General) Electrical Installation IS 1646:1997.
It shall also be in conformity with the current Indian Electricity rules and
regulations and requirements of the Local Electricity Supply Authority and Fire
Insurance regulations, so far as these becomes applicable to the installation.
Electrical work in general shall be carried out as per following CPWD
Specifications.
General Specification for Electrical Works.
-

Internal Work-

External Work

2012

Wherever this specification calls for a higher standard of material and or

workmanship than those required by any of the above mentioned regulations and
specification then the specification here under shall take precedence over the
said regulations and standards.
2.0

MAIN L.T. PANEL / SUB- MAIN PANEL

2.1

GENERAL (Non-Essential)
Main LT Panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply)/ Sub-Main
panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply) shall be indoor
type, metal clad, flood mounted, free standing, totally enclosed, extensible
type, air insulated, cubicle type for use on 415 Volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles
system.
Vol.II / 196

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

2.1.1 STANDARDS
The equipment shall be designed to conform to the requirements of:
i.

IS : 8623 Factory Built Assemblies of switchgear and control

gear.

ii.

IS : 4237 General requirements for switchgear and control

gear for voltages not exceeding 1000 volts.

iii.

IS : 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low

voltage switchgear and control gear.

iv.

IS : 375 Marking and arrangement of busbars.

Individual equipment housed in the Main LT Panel (Non-essential (Normal)

Supply & Essential Supply)/ Sub-Main panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply &
Essential Supply) shall conform to the following specification.
i.

Moulded case circuit breaker IS : 13947 (Part II) & IEC 947 (2).

ii.

Current Transformer IS : 2705.

iii.

Voltage Transformer IS : 3156.

iv.

Indicating Instruments IS : 1248.

v.

Integrating Instruments IS 722.

vi.

Control Switches & Push Buttons IS : 6875.

vii.

Auxiliary Contactors IS : 1347 (Part-4/Sec.-I) & IEC 947 (4/1).

viii.

Relays IS : 3231.

2.1.2 CONSTRUCTION
MAIN L.T. PANEL / SUB-MAIN PANEL SHALL BE:i.

Of metal enclosed, indoor, floor mounted, free standing construction,

extensible type.

ii.

Made up of the requisite vertical sections, which when coupled

together shall form continuous dead front panel.

iii.

Provide dust damp and Vermin protection, the degree of protection

being not less than IP : 54 to IS : 2147.
Vol.II / 197

Sen & Lall

iv.

Spec/Tender doc.
Be readily extensible on both sides by the addition of vertical sections
after removal of the end covers.

Main LT Panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply)/ Sub-Main

panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply) shall be
constructed only of materials capable of withstanding the mechanical,
electrical and thermal stresses, as the effects of humidity, which are likely to
be encountered in normal service.
Each vertical section shall comprise of :
i. A front framed structure of rolled/ folded sheet steel channel section, of
minimum 2mm thickness, rigidly bolted together. This structure shall
house the components contributing to the major weight of the
equipment, such as circuit breaker cassettes, fuse switch units, main
horizontal busbars, vertical risers and other front mounted accessories.
The structure shall be mounted on a rigid base frame of folded sheet
steel of minimum 2mm thickness and 100 mm height. The design shall
ensure that the weight of the components is adequately supported
without deformation or loss of alignment during transit or during
operation.
ii. A side cable chamber in Main LT Panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply &
Essential Supply) / Sub-Main panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply &
Essential Supply) for housing the cable end connections, and power /
control cable terminations, the design shall ensure generous
availability of space for ease of installation and maintenance of cabling,
and adequate safety for working in one vertical section without coming
into accidental contact with live parts in an adjacent section.
iii. A cover plate at the top of the vertical section, provided with a ventilating
hood where necessary. Any aperture for ventilation shall be covered
with a perforated sheet having less than 1 mm diameter perforations to
prevent entry of vermin.
Vol.II / 198

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

iv. Front and rear doors fitted with dust excluding neoprene gaskets with
fasteners designed to ensure proper compression of the gaskets.
When covers are provided in place of doors, generous overlap shall be
assured between sheet steel surfaces with closely spaced fasteners to
preclude the entry of dust.
v. All doors shall be lockable mounted lock.
vi. Gland plate shall be 3 mm thick
The height of the Main LT Panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential
Supply)/ Sub-Main panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply)
should not be more than 2100 mm. the total depth of the panel should be
adequate to cater to proper cabling space and should not be less than 350
mm. Operating handle not higher than 1800 mm.
Doors and covers shall be of minimum 2 mm thick sheet steel. Sheet steel
shrouds and partitions shall be of minimum 2 mm thickness. All sheet panels
shall be smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws. The corners should be
rounded.
The apparatus and circuits in the panel board shall be so arranged as to
facilitate their operation and maintenance and at the same time to ensure the
necessary degree of safety.
Apparatus forming part of the Main LT Panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply
& Essential Supply)/ Sub-Main panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply &
Essential Supply)/ shall have the following minimum clearances.
i.

Between phases

32 mm

ii.

Between phases and neutral

26 mm

iii.

Between phase and earth

26 mm

iv.

Between neutral and earth

26 mm

Vol.II / 199

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

When, for any reason, the above clearances are not available, suitable
insulation shall be provided. Clearances shall be maintained during normal
service conditions.
Creep age distances shall comply to those specified in relevant standards.
All insulating material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of
non-hygroscopic material, duly treated to withstand the effects of the high
humidity, high temperature tropical ambient service conditions.
Functional units such as circuit breakers and fuse switches shall be arranged
in multi-tier formation, except that not more than two air circuit breakers shall
be housed in a single vertical section. Cable entry for various feeders shall be
form the rear/ front. Panel board shall be suitable for termination of cable for
incoming breakers.
Metallic/ insulated barriers shall be provided within vertical sections and
between adjacent sections to ensure prevention of accidental contact with:
i.

Main busbars and vertical risers during operation, inspection or

maintenance of functional units and front mounted accessories.

ii.

Cable termination of one functional unit, when working on those of

adjacent unit/ units.

All doors/ covers providing access to live power equipment/ circuits shall be
provided with tool operated fasteners to prevent unauthorized access.
Provision shall also be made for permanently earthing the frames and other
metal parts of the switchgear by two independent connections.
2.1.3 METAL TREATMENT & FINISH.
All steel work used in the Main LT Panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply &
Essential Supply)/ Sub-Main panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply &
Essential Supply)/ should have undergone a rigorous metal treatment process
as follows:Vol.II / 200

Sen & Lall

i.

Spec/Tender doc.

Effective cleaning by hot alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold

water rinsing to remove traces of alkaline solution.

ii.

Pickling in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales & rust

formation, if any, followed by cold water rinsing to remove traces of
acidic solution.

iii.

A recognized phosphating process to facilitate durable coating of the

paint on the metal surfaces and also to prevent the spread of rusting in
the event of the paint film being mechanically damaged. This again,
shall be followed by hot water rinsing to remove traces of phosphate
solution.

iv.

Passivating in de-oxalite solution to retain and augment the effects of

phosphating.

v.

Drying with compressed air in a dust free atmosphere.

A finishing coat of powder coating paint of Siemens gray colour or as
approved by the ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE.

2.1.4 BUSBARS
The busbars shall be air insulated and made of high conductivity, high
strength copper.
The busbar shall be suitable braced with non-hygroscopic sheet moulded
compound (SMC) supports to provide a through fault withstand capacity of 35
KA RMS symmetrical for one second and a peak short circuit withstand
capacity of 75 KA. The neutral as well as the earth bar should be capable of
withstanding the above level. Ridges shall be provided on the SMC supports
to prevent tracking between adjacent busbars. Large clearances and
creepage distances shall be provided on the busbar system to minimize
possibilities of fault.
Vol.II / 201

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The Main LT Panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply)/ Sub
main panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply)/ shall be
designed that the cables are not directly terminated on the terminals of
breaker, switch disconnector fuse unit etc. but on cable termination links.
Capacity of copper busbars for Main/ Sub Distribution boards shall be
considered as 1.6 A/sq.mm of cross section area of the busbar. The main
busbars shall have continuous current rating throughout the length of Main LT
panel (Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply)/ Sub-Main (Nonessential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply). The cross section of neutral
busbars shall be same as that of phase busbar for busbars of capacity upto
200 A; for higher capacity the neutral busbar shall not be less than half (50%)
the cross section of that the phase busbars. The busbar system shall consists
of main horizontal busbar and auxiliary vertical busbars run in busbar alley/
chamber on either side in which the circuit could be arranged / connected with
front access.
Connections from the main busbars to functional circuit shall be arranged and
supported to withstand without any damage or deformation the thermal and
dynamic stresses due to short circuit currents. Busbars to be colour coded
with PVC heat shrinkable sleeves.
2.1.5 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.1.5.1

GENERAL

Moulded Case Circuit Breaker shall be incorporated in the Main LT Panel

(Non-essential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply)/ Sub-main panel (Nonessential (Normal) Supply & Essential Supply) wherever specified. MCCBs
shall conform to IS : 13947 (Part II) IEC 947(2) in all respects. MCCBs
shall be suitable either for single phase AC 230 volts or three phase 415 volts.
Vol.II / 202

Sen & Lall

2.1.5.2

Spec/Tender doc.
CONSTRUCTIONS

The MCCBs cover and case shall be made of high strength heat treatment
and flame retardant thermo-setting insulating material. Operating handle shall
be quick make/quick break, trip-free type. The operating handle shall have
suitable ON, OFF and tripped indicators. Three phase MCCBs shall
have common operating handle for simultaneous operation and tripping of all
the three phases. MCCBs shall be provided with rotary handle.
Moulded case circuit breaker shall be thermo magnetic or static release type
and shall be of current limiting type. Breaker shall be provided with reset
switch. MCCB shall be of service breaking capacity (Ics). MCCB shall be with
site adjustable thermal release of 80 to 100%. MCCB shall be suitable for site
adjustable thermal release without opening the breaker frame. Thermal
adjustment shall be with single knob for all the three poles. MCCB shall be
line load reversible type. MCCB shall have large terminals suitable copper
bus bars. MCCB shall be provided with adopter terminal to facilitate
termination of cables.

Terminals shall be shrouded with integral phase

barriers.
2.1.5.3

RUPTURING CAPACITY

The Moulded Case Circuit Breaker shall have a service breaking capacity
(Ics) of minimum 35 KA RMS for Main LT Panel (Non-essential (Normal)
Supply & Essential Supply) & 25 KA RMS for Sub-Main panel (Non-essential
(Normal) Supply & Essential Supply) or as inducted in drawings.
2.1.5.4

TESTING

Original test certificate of the MCCB as per relevant Indian Standards (IS)
315-C-8370 shall be furnished.
Vol.II / 203

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

2.1.6 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS, METERING & PROTECTION

2.1.6.1

GENERAL

Direct reading electrical instruments shall be in conformity with IS 1248. The

accuracy of direct reading shall be 1.0 for voltmeter and 1.5 for ammeters.
Other type of instruments shall have accuracy of 1.5. The meter shall be
suitable for temperature shall be limited to a minimum. The meter shall be
suitable for continuous operation between -10 degree centigrade to + 50
degree centigrade. All meters shall be of flush mounting type of 96 mm
square or circular pattern. The meter shall be enclosed in a dust tight
housing. The housing shall be of steel or phenolic mould. The design and
manufacture of the meters shall ensure the prevention of fogging of
instruments glass. Instruments/ meters shall be sealed in such a way that
access to the measuring element and to the accessories within the case shall
not be possible without removal of the seal. The meters shall be provided with
white dials and black scale markings.
The pointer shall be black in colour and shall have zero position adjustment
device which could be operated from outside. The direction of deflection shall
be from left to right. The instrument may be digital type of approved make.
Suitable selector switches shall be provided for all ammeters and voltmeters
intended to be used on three phase supply.
The specifications herein after laid down shall also cover all the meters,
instrument and protective devices required for the electrical work. The ratings
type and quantity of meters, instruments and protective devices shall be as
per the schedule of quantities.

Vol.II / 204

Sen & Lall

2.1.6.2

Spec/Tender doc.
DIGITAL AMMETERS

Ammeters shall be digital type 7 segment LED display. Ammeter shall be

suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.5 VA approx. the ammeters shall
be capable of carrying sustained overloads during fault conditions without
damage or loss of accuracy.
2.1.6.3

DIGITAL VOLTMETERS

Voltmeter shall be digital type 7 segment LED display. Voltmeter shall be

suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.5 VA approx. The range for 3
phase voltmeters shall be 0 to 500 volts. The voltmeter shall be provided with
protection fuse of suitable capacity.
2.1.6.4

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Current transformers shall be in conformity with IS : 2705 (Part I, II, & III) in all
respects. All current transformers used for medium voltage applications shall
be rated for 1KV. Current transformers shall have rated primary current, rated
burden and class of accuracy as required. However, the rated secondary
current shall be 5A unless otherwise specified. The acceptable minimum
class of various applications shall be as given below:
Measuring

Class 0.5 to 1.

Protection

Class 5P10.

Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding without damage,

magnetic and thermal stresses due to short circuit fault of 50 KA on medium
voltage system. Terminals of the current transformers shall be marked
permanently for easy identification of poles. Separate CT shall be provided for
measuring instruments and protection relays. Each C.T. shall be provided with
rating plate.
Vol.II / 205

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are easily accessible
for inspection, maintenance and replacement. The wiring for CTs shall be
copper conductor, PVC insulated wires with proper termination lugs and
wiring shall be bunched with cable straps and fixed to the panel structure in a
neat manner.
2.1.7

MISCELLANEOUS
Control switches shall be of the heavy duty rotary type with escutcheon plates
clearly marked to show the operating position. They shall be semi-flush
mounting with only the front plate and operating handle projecting. Indicating
lamps shall be LED type.
Push buttons shall be of the momentary contact, push to actuate type fitted
with self reset contacts & provided with integral escutcheon plates marked
with its functions.

2.1.8

CABLE TERMINATIONS
Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the Main/ Sub-main panels to
suit the number, type and size of aluminium conductor power cables and
copper conductor control cable specified.
Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables as required.
Generous size of cabling chambers shall be provided, with the position of
cable gland and terminals such that cables can be easily and safely
terminated.
Barriers or shrouds shall be provided to permit safe working at the terminals
of one circuit without accidentally touching that it another live circuit.
Cable risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated
short circuit currents without damage and without causing secondary faults.
Vol.II / 206

Sen & Lall

2.1.9

Spec/Tender doc.
LABELS

Labels shall be anodized aluminium with white engraving on black

background shall be provided for each incoming and outgoing feeder of L.T.
Panel.
2.1.10

TEST AT MANUFACTURES WORK

All routine tests specified in IS : 8623-1977 shall be carried out and test
certificates shall be submitted to Owner/ Engineer-in-charge.

2.1.11

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Commissioning checks and tests shall include all wiring checks and checking
up of connections. Primary/ secondary injection tests for the relays
adjustment/ setting shall be done before commissioning in addition to routine
meggar test. Checks and tests shall include the following.
a) Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.
b) Interlocking function check.
c) Continuity check of wires, fuses etc, as required.
d) Trip tests & protection gear test.

2.2

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

2.2.1 Distribution Board shall be double door type with extended loose wire box at
the top. All distribution boards shall be of three phase or single phase type
with incoming isolator or MCB and/ or RCCB as in Schedule of quantities.
MCB DBs shall be of surface/ recess mounting pattern, dust & vermin proof
conforming to IP42 and shall be fabricated out of CRCA sheet steel 1.6 mm
thick. MCB DBs shall have removable end plates with knock outs at the
bottom and top and shall have hinged cover with locking arrangement. Only
the knobs of the MCBs shall preclude out of the front cover through opening
neatly machine made for the purpose. The bus bars shall be solid electrolytic
copper of appropriate cross section. Din bar shall be provided for mounting
the MCBs . MCB DB shall be with loose wire box as a compartment for the
Vol.II / 207

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

complete width & depth of the board and of minimum height of 125 mm in the
case of TPN DBs and 100 mm in case of SPN DBs. Distribution boards shall
contain plug in or bolted type miniature circuit breaker mounted on bus bars.
Miniature circuit breakers shall be quick make & quick break type with trip free
mechanism; they shall have thermal & magnetic short circuit protection. MCB
shall conform with IS 8828-1978. Neutral bus bars shall be provided with the
same number of terminals as there are single ways on the board, in addition
to the terminals for incoming mains. An earth bar of similar size as the neutral
bar shall also be provided. Phase barrier shall be fitted and all live parts shall
be screened for the front. Ample clearance shall be provided between all live
metal and the earth case and adequate space for all incoming and outgoing
cables. All distribution board enclosures shall have an etched zinc base stove
painted followed by synthetic stoved enamel, colour as approved. A circuit
identification card in clear plastic cover shall be provided for each distribution
board.
2.2.2 Miniature Circuit Breakers for lighting and power circuits shall be B series. All
miniature circuit breakers shall be of 10 KA rated rupturing capacity.
2.2.3 Distribution board shall be provided with isolator or MCB and / or residual
current circuit breaker as mentioned in drawings and BOQ. RCCB shall be
current operated type and of 30 mA sensitivity unless otherwise stated. RCCB
shall be mounted in the DB box Distribution board box, isolator, MCBs used
shall be of one / same manufacturer. Standard size manufactured by
approved manufacturer shall be used. In case size specified in BOQ is not
standard size of manufacturer, in that case next standard size distribution
board box shall be used with incoming & outgoing MCB as specified in BOQ.
Additional cutout/ space for outgoing MCB shall be plugged with blank plates.
No extra cost shall be paid for using bigger/ higher size distribution board box
and blank plates.
Vol.II / 208

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.0

CONDUITING & WIRING SYSTEM

3.1

GENERAL
All conduiting works for Internal Electrical Works shall be carried out in
recessed/ surface system as mentioned in BOQ and drawings. Separate
conduits shall be providing for light/ fan points, power points & telephone
points.

3.2

TYPE AND SIZE OF PVC CONDUIT

All PVC conduits shall be approved gauge (not less than 2 mm thick). PVC
conduit shall be of ISI marked. The maximum number of PVC insulated
650/1100 volts grade copper conductor cable that can be drawn in conduit of
various sizes shall be as per IS code. No PVC conduit less than 20 mm in
diameter shall be used.

3.3
3.3.1

FIXING OF CONDUITS
SURFACE CONDUIT
Conduit pipes shall be fixed by heavy gauge saddles, secured to suitable
plugs or other approved plugs with screws in an approved manner at an
interval of not more than 60 cm but on either side of the bends or similar
fittings, saddles shall be fixed at a distance of 30 cm from the centre of such
fittings. The saddles should not be less than 2 mm thick. Where conduit pipes
are to be laid along the trusses, steel joint etc. the same shall be secured by
means of special clamps made of MS. Where as it is not possible to drill holes
in the trusses members suitable clamps with bolts and nits shall be used.
Where conduit pipes are to be laid above false ceiling, conduit pipes shall be
suspended with suitable supports from the soffit of slab. For conduit pipe run
along with wall, the conduit pipe shall be clamped to wall above false ceiling
in uniform pattern with special clamps shall be used for fixing
Vol.II / 209

3.3.2

RECESS/ CONCEALED CONDUIT

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The chase in the wall shall be neatly made and of ample dimensions to permit
the conduit to be fixed in the manner desired. In the case of building under
construction, conduit shall be buried in the wall before plastering and shall be
finished neatly after erection of conduit. Incase of exposed brick/ rubble
masonry work, special care shall be taken to fix the conduit and accessories
in position along with the building work. Entire work of chasing the wall, fixing
the conduit in chases, and burying the conduit in mortar before plastering
shall form part of point wiring work.
The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of staples or by means of saddles
not more than 60 cm apart or by any other approved means of fixing. Fixing of
standard bends and elbows shall be avoided as far as practicable and all
curves maintained by bending the conduit itself with the long radius which
shall permit easy drawing in of conductors. Suitable inspection boxes to the
barest minimum requirements shall be provided to permit periodical
inspection and to facilitate replacement of wires, if necessary. These shall be
mounted flush with the wall. Suitable ventilating holes shall be provided in the
inspection box covers. Wherever the length of conduit run is more than 10
meters, then circular junction box shall be provided.
3.4

JUNCTION BOXES
The junction box shall be made of metal on all sides except on the front.
Boxes shall be hot dip galvanized mild steel. Up to 20 x 30 cm size M.S. box
shall have wall thickness of 18 SWG and MS boxes above 20 x 30 cm size
shall be of 16 SWG. The metallic boxes shall be painted with anticorrosive
paint before erection. Clear depth of the box shall not be less than 60 mm.
Junction box shall be provided to facilitate the drawing of wires. Size of
Junction box shall be as per the site requirement and phenolic laminated
sheet of approved shade shall be used for junction box covers. Junction box
covers shall be of 3 mm thick synthetic phenolic resin bonded laminated
sheet as base material and conform to grade P-I of IS 2036-1994.
Vol.II / 210

Sen & Lall

3.5

Spec/Tender doc.

WIRING
All PVC insulated stranded copper conductor wires shall conform to relevant
IS Codes. Cable conductor size and material shall be specified in BOQ.
All internal wiring shall be carried out with PVC insulated wires of 650/1100
volts grade. Circuit wiring shall be laid in separate conduit originating from
distribution board to switch board for light/ fan. A light/ fan switch board may
have more than one circuit but shall have to be of same phase. Each circuit
shall have a separate neutral wire. Neutral looping shall be carried out from
point to point or in light/ fan switch boards. A separate earth wire shall be
provided along with circuit wiring for each circuit. For point wiring red colour
wire shall be used for phase and black colour wire for neutral. Circuit wiring
shall be carried out with red, yellow or blue colour PVC insulated wire for RYB
phase wire respectively and black colour PVC insulated wire for the neutral
wires. No wire shall be drawn into any conduit until all work of any nature, that
may cause injury to wire is completed. Care shall be taken in pulling the wires
so that no damage occurs to the insulation of the wire.
Before the wires are drawn into the conduit, the conduits shall be thoroughly
cleaned of moisture, dust and dirt. Drawing & jointing of copper conductor
wires & cables shall be as per CPWD specifications.

3.6

Telephone Wire/Cables
Separate conduits shall be provided for internal telephone wiring of telephone
system commencing from tag block. Each telephone outlet shall be wired with
2 pair telephone cable from the tag block. All telephone wires shall be of 0.61
mm dia annealed tinned high conductivity copper conductor PVC insulated &
PVC sheathed grey conforming to ITD specification SWS 113 B & C. Multipair
PVC insulated cables laid in conduit shall be provided for connecting various
tag block.

Vol.II / 211

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Following number of 2 pair wires/ cables shall be drawn in various sizes of

conduits as listed below.

3.7

20 mm conduit

upto 3 cables.

25 mm conduit

more than 3 upto 6 cables.

Joints
All joints shall be made at main switches, distribution board socket and switch
boxes only. No joint shall be made in conduits & junction boxes. Conductors
shall be continuous from outlet to outlet.

3.8

Sub mains
Sub main cable where called for shall be of the rated capacity and approved
make. Every Sub main shall be drawn into an independent adequate size
conduit. Adequate size draw boxes shall be provided at convenient locations
to facilitate easy drawings of the Sub main Cables. Cost of junction box/
drawn box is deemed to be included in the rates of sub main wiring. As
independent earth wire of proper rating shall be provided for every sub-main.
Single phase sub main shall have single earth wire whereas three phase sub
main shall be provided with two earth wire.
Where sub mains cables are connected to the switchgear, sufficient extra
lengths of sub main cable shall be provided to facilitate easy connections and
maintenance. For termination of cables criping type cable socket/ lugs shall
be provided. Same colour code as for circuit wiring shall be followed.

3.9

Load Balancing
Balancing of circuits in three phase installation shall be planned before the
commencement of wiring and shall be strictly adhered to.

Vol.II / 212

Sen & Lall

3.10

Spec/Tender doc.

Colour Code For Circuit & Sub main Wiring

Colour code for circuit & sub main wiring installation shall be Red, Yellow,
Blue for three phases. Black for neutral and yellow/ green or green only for
earth incase of insulated earth wire.

3.11

Classification of Points
Classification and measurement of point wiring shall be as per CPWD
specification:

3.12

Conductor Size
Wiring shall be carried out with following sizes of PVC insulated stranded
single core copper conductor wire/ cable.

3.13

i.

light point

- 1.5 Sq. mm

ii.

Ceiling / Exhaust Fan Point

- 1.5 Sq. mm

iii.

Call Bell Point

- 1.5 Sq. mm

iv.

Plug Point ( 5 Amp S.S. Outlet)

- 1.5 Sq. mm

v.

Circuit Wiring

- 1.5 Sq. mm

vi.

General Power Point

- 4.0 Sq. mm

vii.

Geyser Point

- 4.0 Sq. mm

Light Fixtures
The light fixtures and fans shall be assembled and installed in position
complete and ready for service in accordance with the detailed drawings,
manufacturers instructions and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Fixtures shall be suspended true to alignment plumb level and capable of
resisting all laterial and vertical forces and shall be fixed as required. All
ceiling fans shall be provided with suspension arrangement in the concrete
slab/ roof members. It shall be the duty of the contractor to make these
provisions at the appropriate stage & locations shown on the drawings. Fan
box with MS hook shall be as per CPWD specifications. Suspended type
fluorescent light fixture shall be fixed to circular junction box with a metallic
Vol.II / 213

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

ball and socket arrangement. Light fixture in general shall be directly fixed to
ceiling slab with rawl plugs. All switch and outlet boxes, shall be bonded to
earth through connector blocks.
3.14

LIGHT & POWER ACCESSORIES (PIANO TYPE)

All switch for control of light shall be of 6 Amp unless otherwise stated. All
switches shall be piano type. The switches shall be of rocker mechanism
type with silver contact. All switches shall be of white finish or as approved
shade.

3.15

6 AMP SWITCH SOCKET OUTLET

Switch socket outlet on lighting circuit shall be of 3 pin 6 amp outlet and shall
have safety shutters. The switch shall be of rocker mechanism type with silver
safety contact. Switch and socket outlet shall be separate unit shall be piano
type and of white finish or as approved shade.

3.16

16 AMP SWITCH SOCKET OUTLET

Switch socket outlet on power circuit shall be of 6 pin 16/ 6Amp outlet and
shall have safety shutters. The switch shall be of rocker mechanism type with
silver contacts. Switch and socket outlet shall be separate unit shall be piano
type and of white finish or as approved shade.

Vol.II / 214

Sen & Lall

4.0

L.T. CABLES

4.1

GENERAL

Spec/Tender doc.

L. T. Cables shall be supplied, inspected, laid tested and commissioned in

accordance

with

drawings,

specifications,

relevant

Indian

Standards

specifications and cable manufacturers instructions. The cable shall be

delivered at site in original drums with manufacturers name clearly written on
the drums. The recommendations of the cable manufacturer with regard to
joining and sealing shall be strictly followed.
4.2

MATERIALS
The L.T. Power cable shall be XLPE insulated PVC sheathed type aluminium
conductor armoured cable conforming to IS : 7098 : 1988 (Part I) with upto
date amendments where as control cable shall be XLPE insulated and PVC
sheathed copper conductor armoured / unarmored cable conforming to
IS:7098 (Part-I)-1988.

4.3

INSTALLATION OF CABLES
Cables shall be laid directly in ground, pipes, masonry ducts, on cable tray,
surface of wall/ ceiling etc. as indicated on drawings and/ or as per the
direction of Engineer-In-Charge. Cable laying shall be carried out as per
CPWD specifications.

4.4

INSPECTION
All cables shall be inspected at site and checked for any damage during
transit.

Vol.II / 215

Sen & Lall

4.4

Spec/Tender doc.

JOINTS IN CABLES
The Contractor shall take care to see that the cables received at site are
apportioned to various locations in such a manner as to ensure maximum
utilization and avoiding of cable joints.

This apportioning shall be got

approved from Engineer-In-Charge before the cables are cut to lengths.

4.5

LAYING CABLES IN GROUND

Cables shall be laid by skilled experienced workmen using adequate rollers to
minimize stretching of the cables. The cable drums shall be placed on jacks
before unwinding the cable. With great care it shall be unrolled on over
wooden rollers placed in trenches at intervals not exceeding 2 meters. Cables
shall be laid at depth of 0.75 meters below ground level. A cushion of sand
total of 250 mm shall be provided both above and below the cable, joint boxes
and other accessories.
The cable shall be laid in excavated trench over 80 mm layer if sand cushion.
The relative position of the cables, laid in the same trench shall preserved. At
all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical planes, the cables shall be
bent smooth with a radius of bent not less than 12 times the diameter of
cables. Minimum 3 meter long loop shall be provided at both end of cable.
Distinguishing marks may be made on the cable ends for identifications of
phases. Insulation tapes of appropriate voltage and in red, yellow and blue
colours shall be wrapped just below the sockets for phase identifications.

Vol.II / 216
4.7

PROTECTION OF CABLES

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The cables shall be protected by bricks laid on the side and top layer of the
sand for the full length of underground cable. Where more than one cables is
laid in the same trench, the bricks shall cover all the cables and shall project a
minimum of approximately 80 mm on either side of the cables. Cable under
road crossings and any other places subject to heavy traffic, shall be
protected by running them through Hume Pipes of suitable size.
4.8

EXCAVATION & BACK FILL

All excavation and back fill required for the installation of the cables shall be
carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the drawings and
requirements laid down elsewhere. Trenches shall be dug true to line and
grades. Back fill for trenches shall be filled in layer not exceeding 150 mm.
each layer shall be properly rammed and consolidated before laying the next
layer.
The contractor shall restore all surface, roadways, side walks, wall or the
works cut by excavation to their original condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-In-Charge.

4.9

LAYING OF CABLES ON CABLE TRAY/ SURFACE OF WALL/ CEILING

Cable shall be laid on perforated M.S. Cable tray. Cable shall be properly
dressed before cable ties/ clamps are fixed. Wherever cable tray is not
proposed, cables shall be fixed on surface of wall or ceiling slab by suitable
MS clamps/ saddles. Care shall be taken to avoid crossing of cable.

4.10

CABLES ON HANGERS OR RACKS

The Contractor shall provide and install all iron hangers racks or racks with
die cast cleats with all fixings, rag bolts or girder clamps or other specialist
fixing as required.
Where hangers or racks are to be fixed to wall sides, ceiling and other
concrete structures, the Contractor shall be responsible for cutting away,
fixing and grouting in rag bolts and making good.
Vol.II / 217

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The hangers or racks shall be designed to leave at least 25 mm clearance

between the cables and the face to which it is fixed. Multiple hangers shall
have two or more fixing holes. All cables shall be saddled at not more than
150 mm centers. These shall be designed to keep provision of some spare
capacity for future development.
4.11

CABLES TAGS
Cable tags shall be made out of 2 mm thick aluminium sheets, each tag 1-1/2
inch in dia with one hole of 2.5 mm dia, 6 mm below the periphery. Cable
designations are to be punched with letter/ number punches and the tags are
to be tied inside the panels beyond the glanding as well as below the glands
at cable entries. Trays tags are to be tied at all bends. On straight lengths,
tags shall be provided at every 5 meters.

4.12

TESTING OF CABLES
Prior to installation, burying of cables, following tests shall be carried out.
Insulation test between phases, phase & neutral, phase & earth for each
length of cable.
a. Before laying
b. After laying
c. After jointing
On completion of cable laying work, the following tests shall be conducted in
the presence of the Engineer-In-Charge.
a. Insulation Resistance Test (Sectional and overall).
b. Continuity Resistance Test.
c. Earth Test.
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Indian Standard code
of practice and Indian Electricity Rules. The Contractor shall provide
necessary instruments, equipments and labour for conducting the above tests
& shall bear all expenses of conducting such tests.
Vol.II / 218

5.0

CABLE TRAY

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The cable tray shall be fabricated out of slotted/ perforated MS sheets as

channel, sections, single or double bended. The channel sections shall be
supplied in convenient lengths and assembled at site to the desired lengths.
These may be galvanized or painted to the desired lengths. Alternatively,
where specified, the cable tray may be fabricated by two angle irons of 50
mm 50mm 6 mm as two longitudinal members, with crossed bracings
between them by 50 mm 5 mm flats welded/ bolted to the angles at 1 m
spacing. 2 mm thick MS perforated sheet shall be suitably welded/ bolted to
the base as well as on the two sides.
Typically, the dimensions, fabrication details etc. are shown in CPWD
General Specification for Electrical Works 2012.
The jointing between the sections shall be made with coupler plates of the
same material and thickness as the channel section. Two coupler plates,
each of minimum 200 mm length, shall be bolted on each of the two sides of
the channel section with 8 mm dia round headed bolts, nuts and washers, in
order to maintain proper earth continuity bond, the paint on the contact
surfaces between the coupler plates and cable tray shall be scraped and
revoked before the installation.
The maximum permissible uniformly distributed load for various sizes of
cables trays and for different supported span are as per CPWD General
Specification of Electrical Work 2012. The sizes shall be specified
considering the same.
The width of the cable tray shall be chosen so as to accommodate all the
cable in one tier, plus 30 to 50% additional width for future expansion. This
additional width shall be minimum 100 mm. The overall width of one cable
tray shall be limited to 800 mm.
Factory fabricated bends, reducers, tee/ cross junctions, etc. shall be
provided as per good engineering practice. Details are typically shown in
figure 3 of CPWD General Specification of Electrical Work 2012. The radius
of bends, junctions etc. shall not be less than the minimum permissible radius
of bending of the largest size of cable to be carried by the cable tray.
Vol.II / 219

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The cable tray shall be suspended from the ceiling slab with the help of 10
mm dia MS rounds or 25 mm 5 mm flats at specified spacing as per of
CPWD General Specification of Electrical Work Part-II 2007. Flat type
suspenders may be used for channels up to 450 mm width bolted to cable
trays, Round suspenders shall be threaded and bolted to the cable trays or to
independent support angles 50 mm 50 mm 5 mm at the bottom end as
specified, these shall be grouted to the ceiling slab at the other end through
an effective means, as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge, to take the
weight of the cable tray with the cables.
The entire tray (except in the case of galvanized type) and the suspenders
shall be painted with two coats of red oxide primer paint after removing the
dirt and rust, and finished with two coats of spray paint of approved make
synthetic enamel paint.
The cable tray shall be bonded to the earth terminal of the switch bonds at
both ends.
The cable trays shall be measured on unit length basis, along the center line
of the cable tray, including bends, reducers, tees, cross joints, etc, and paid
for accordingly.
Cable laid on cable tray shall be clamped on the tray at suitable intervals as
per CPWD specifications.
6.0

CONDUITING & WIRING OF TELEPHONE SYSTEM

6.1

GENERAL
Contractor shall supply & install conduit & wiring including Telephone Tag
Blocks, telephone outlet, cover plate, outlet boxes etc. complete as required.

6.1.1 CONDUITING
Conduiting for telephone system shall be carried out in PVC conduit.
Separate conduit shall be provided for Telephone cables. Conduiting shall be
carried out as per Clause NO 3.0 of this specification.
Vol.II / 220
6.1.2 WIRING

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Each telephone outlet shall be wired in conduit with 0.61 mm or 0.5 mm dia
annealed tinned copper conductor PVC insulated and PVC sheathed
unarmourd cable from Block wise Telephone Tag Block. From floor wise main
telephone tag block to block wise telephone tag block shall be wired with
multipaird unarmourd 0.61 m dia annealed copper conductor PVC insulated &
PVC sheathed cables. From main telephone tag block to floor wise main
telephone tag block shall be wired with multicore telephone armourd cable. A
provision quantity shall be kept for main incoming telephone cable which shall
be armourd.
6.1.3 OUTLETS
All telephone outlet shall be modular type accessories with RJ 11 Jack outlet.
Cover plate shall match in shape & finish with other light and power
accessories.
6.1.4 TELEPHONE DISTRIBUTION BOARD
Telephone Tag Block shall be fabricated from 2 mm thick M.S. sheet duly
powder coated after metal treatment. Telephone Distribution Board shall be
equipped with krone type tag block if size as mentioned in BOQ. Tag block
shall be double jumpering type and shall be suitable for termination of extra
pair provided in wiring/ cabling of each outlet. Box shall have hinged cover
and finish shall match with aesthetic finish of the building.
7.0

LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Lighting Protection System shall be installed in accordance with CPWD
General specification for Electrical Work 2012 and IS 2309-1989.
The system shall consist of fixing of 20 mm 3 mm galvanized iron strip on
parapet wall as horizontal conductor. Vertical drops shall be also of 20 mm
3mm Copper/ G.I. strip fixed to surface of the wall. Conductors shall be
securely attached to the building and shall be of galvanize steel with suitable
Vol.II / 221
precautions to avoid corrosion. Steel thoroughly protected against corrosion

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

by a zinc coating shall be used. The lightning conductor shall be secured at

not more than 1.2 meter apart for horizontal run and 1 meter apart for vertical
run.
Each vertical Down Conductor shall be provided with test joint clamp which
shall be located 1 meter above outside ground level. From test joint 32 mm
6 mm thick Copper / G.I. strip shall be fixed/ laid up to earth electrode. Care
shall be taken to have as few joints as possible in the system. No joint shall
be permitted below ground level. All joints shall be mechanically and
electrically effective.
Each vertical down conductor shall be connected to independent earth
electrode. Earth electrode shall be 600 mm 600 mm 6 mm G.I. plate.
Earth electrode shall be installed as described in earthing specifications. The
whole of the Lightning Protection System shall have a combined resistance to
earth not exceeding 1.0 ohms. Earthing shall be carried out as per the
specification described under Earthing section.
8.0

EARTHING

8.1

General
All the non-current metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed
properly. Main LT Panels, Sub-main panel, Distribution Boards, switch boxes,
outlet boxes, and all other parts made of metal shall be bonded together and
connected by means of specified earthing conductors to an efficient earthing
system. Earthing work shall conform to CPWD General Specifications for
Electrical Work 2012 and Indian Standard specification IS : 3043-1987 and
relevant Indian Electricity Rules 1956 amended up to date and in the
regulations of the local Electricity Supply Authority.

Vol.II / 222

Sen & Lall

8.2

Spec/Tender doc.

Earthing conductor
Earth continuity conductor along with sub-main wiring from Main LT Panel to
Sub-main panel shall be of GI or copper whereas Sub-main panel to final
distribution boards shall be of copper. Earth continuity conductor from
distribution board onward up to outlet point shall also be of copper. Earth
continuity conductor connecting Main LT Panels to earth electrode shall be
with galvanized M.S. or copper wire/ strip.

8.3

Sizing of Earthing Conductor

All light fixtures, fans, fan regulators, 6 and 16 Amp outlet points, switch
boxes shall be earthed with copper earth wire of size specified elsewhere.
Separate insulated earth wire shall be drawn along with each circuit. Single
phase distribution board shall have one earth continuity conductor while three
phase distribution board shall be provided with two earth continuity
conductors.

8.4

Pipe Earth Electrode

GI pipe shall be of medium class 40 mm dia and 4.5 meter in length.
Galvanishing of the pipe shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. GI pipe
electrode shall be cut tapered at the bottom and provided with holes of 12 mm
dia drilled not less than 7.5 cm from each other upto 2 meter of length from
bottom. The electrode shall be per detail enclosed. Earth electrode shall not
be situated less than 2 meters from the building. The location of the earth
electrode will be such that the soil has reasonable chance of remaining moist
as far as possible. Masonry chamber of size 300 300 300 mm shall be
provided with water funnel arrangement a cast iron or MS frame & cover
having locking arrangement at the top.

Vol.II / 223

Sen & Lall

8.5

Spec/Tender doc.

PLATE EARTH ELECTRODE

Earthing shall be provided with G.I. plate electrode as mentioned in BOQ of
following:
i. G.I. plate Electrode

600 mm 600 mm 6 mm thick

or
(ii) Cooper plate Electrode :

600 mm 600 mm 3 mm thick

The electrode shall be buried in ground with its faces vertical and not less
than 3 meters below ground level. 20 mm dia medium class GI pipe shall be
provided and attached to the electrode. A funnel with mesh shall be provided
on the top of this pipe for watering and earth electrode. Earth electrode the
watering funnel attachment shall be housed in masonry enclosure of not less
than 300 300 300 mm deep. A cast iron MS frame with cover having
locking arrangement shall be provided at top of chamber. Earth electrode may
not effect the column footing or foundation of the building. In such cases
electrode may be further away from the building.
8.6

Artificial Treatment of Soil

If the earth resistance is too high and the multiple electrode earthing does not
give adequate low resistance to earth, then the soil resistivity immediately
surrounding the earth electrodes shall be reduced by addition of sodium
chloride, calcium chloride, sodium carbonates copper sulphate, salt and soft
coke or charcoal in suitable proportions.

8.7

Resistance to Earth
The resistance of earthing system shall not exceed one ohm.

Vol.II / 224

GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR EXTERNAL ELECTRICAL

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 1
GENERAL
.1

SCOPE
These general specifications cover the details of Sub Station Equipments
(Transformers, HT Panels, Bus Trunkings/ Rising Mains and other related
items) to be supplied, the inspection as may be necessary before
dispatch, delivery at site, installations, testing, commissioning, putting into
operation and handing over in working condition of the equipment for substations for working voltage of 11000/433 volts. The general specifications
are subject to revision from time to time. The tender specifications for a
particular job shall clearly indicate the applicable version of these
specifications.
(Where Licensee is supplying power at 33KV/6.6KV etc. Voltages, substation equipments of suitable specification and capacity shall be
provided).
These specifications do not cover sub- station installation in mines,
quarries and installation of similar nature, having hazardous atmosphere.
These however do not bind the NIT approving authority from incorporating
better and new, technologically superior, products judiciously.

1.1.1

Related Documents
These technical specification shall be read in conjunction with the
standard conditions of the contract with correction slips, as are relevant for
commercial aspects, as well as schedules and drawing and requirements
under these specifications.
In the event of any discrepancy between these specifications and inter
connected documents, the technical requirements as per the contract
specifications shall be followed and deemed to be having over -riding
value.

1.2

DEFINITIONS
The definitions of terms are in accordance with relevant Indian standards.
Extra Low Voltage (ELV)

: Not exceeding 50 Volts

Low Voltage (LV)

Normally exceeding 50 Volts but not

exceeding 250 Volts.

Medium Voltage (MV)

Normally exceeding
exceeding 650 V.
Vol.II /225

250

but

not

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

High Voltage (HV)

Normally exceeding
exceeding 33 KV.

650

but

not

Extra High Voltage (EHV) : Normally exceeding 33 KV.

(Source: NBC, 2005, Part-8, Section 2.1.75 to 2.1.79)
1.3

SYSTEM ENGINEERING

1.3.1

General
A sub- station installation is a combination of a number of major
equipments like Transformers, High Voltage Panel, Medium Voltage (MV)
Panels, Inter-connecting Cables, Bus Ducts, and Protection, Metering etc.
individually engineered in each case depending upon the requirements,
size and capacity of sub-station and in coordination with the licensee of
the area concerned. Generally supply at 230/415 or 433 subject to
verification Volts is provided for loads up to 100 KVA, 11 KV for loads
up to 5MVA and 33/ 66KV for loads more than 5MVA. While selecting
the Transformer (s) for a substation it will be desirable to provide at
least one standby Transformer, so that a certain amount of
redundancy is built in the system.
It may also be necessary to install capacitor banks/other modern systems
to improve power factor, simultaneously controlling the Harmonics, for
economy consideration as well as to comply with the requirements of local
utility. Metering aspects as well as protection arrangements will also
depend upon the Licensees requirements.

1.3.2

Items of Work :
A sub-station installation work shall generally comprise of supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of the following:
(a)

High Voltage Panels.

(b)

Step down Transformers, complete with associated auxiliaries as

specified.

(c)

High voltage cable for inter-connection between the H.V. panel and
transformers including terminations.

(d)

M.V. Panel(s).

(e)

L.T. cable , for upto 400KVA Transformers and Bus trunking for
higher than 400KVA transformers, inter-connection between
transformers M.V. terminals and the M.V. Panel as specified.

(f)

Power factor improvement capacitors/ Power Conditioner Savers.

(g)

Earthing system.
Vol.II / 226

Sen & Lall

(h)

Safety Equipments
(i) Emergency M.V. Panel if required.
(j)

1.4

Spec/Tender doc.

Miscellaneous items.

CONFORMITY WITH STATUTORY ACTS, RULES, REGULATIONS,

STANDARDS AND SAFETY CODES :

1.4.1

Indian Electricity Act and Rules:

All electrical works in connection with installation of electric sub-stations
shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Indian Electricity
Act, 2003 and the Indian Electricity Rules 1956 amended upto date.
Wherever I.E. rule numbers have been indicated, they are based on I.E.
rules 1956 amended upto date.

1.4.2

CPWD Specifications
The electrical works shall also conform to CPWD. General Specifications
for Electrical Works Part I (Internal) 2013 and Part II (External) 1994 as
amended upto date wherever relevant and applicable.

1.4.3

Indian Standards
The sub-station equipments and their installation shall conform to relevant
Indian standards.

1.4.4

Other Acts and Rules

The installation shall also comply with the following:-

1.4.5

(i)

Factories Act wherever applicable.

(ii)

Any other Act or Rules in force.

Safety Codes and Labour Regulations :

In respect of all labour employed directly or indirectly on the work, the
tenderer, here in after called the contractor, at his own expense will
arrange for the safety provision outlined in section 9 of these
specifications to comply with the statuary regulations, ISI
recommendations and CPWD codes.
In case of default, the department shall be at liberty to make arrangements
and provide facilities as aforesaid and recover the cost from the
contractor.
The contractor shall provide necessary barriers warning signals and other
safety measures to avoid accidents. He shall also indemnify CPWD
Vol. II /227

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

against claims for compensation arising out of negligence in this respect.

Nothing in these specifications shall be construed to relieve the contractor
of his responsibility for the design, manufacture and installation of the
equipment with all accessories in accordance with applicable statutory
regulations and safety codes in force from the safety angle.
1.5

INFORMATIONS AND DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE DEPTT.

1.5.1

Specification Drawing:
The tender specifications shall indicate, for a particular job, the reference
drawings to help the contractor to work out the tender. The drawings shall
also indicate the schematic of main connections and shall form part of the
specifications. All the drawings specified and issued with the tender are for
purpose of tendering only and shall be deemed to be specification
drawings.

1.5.2

Schedule of Work:
The department shall supply a schematic diagram and a schedule of work
as per format in Appendix II detailing the equipments; materials required
type and anticipated quantity/numbers in respect of each item.

1.6

WORKS TO BE ARRANGED BY THE DEPATMENT:

Unless otherwise mentioned in the tender specifications the following
works shall be carried out by the department.
(i)

Construction of sub-station building. The contractor should select

such equipment for installation as can be properly installed in the
spaces shown in specification drawings. While no guarantee can be
given minor modification required by the contractor if mentioned in
the tender or intimated immediately after the receipt of tender shall
be carried out if structurally possible.

(ii)

Cable trench, entry pipe for cable, manholes for drawing of cables,
manhole covers etc. as per requirements.

(iii) Construction of necessary soak pits, drainage arrangement for soak

pit etc, if required.
(iv) Provision of storage space at site during the contract period free of
cost.
1.7

WORKS TO BE DONE BY THE CONTRACTOR:

In addition to supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all
equipments as per schedule of work in accordance with 1.6.2 the following
work shall be deemed to be included within the scope of work, to be
executed by the contractor.
Vol.II / 228

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

(i)

All minor building works, such as equipments foundation if required

cutting and making good holes, grouting of channels belts as
required. Cutting and making good damages etc.

(ii)

Provision of supports / clamps for equipments, cables etc. wherever

required.

(iii) Small wiring, inter-connection etc. inclusive of all materials and

accessories, necessary to comply with the regulations as well as
proper and trouble free operation of the equipment.
(iv) Closing of the cable entry points in sub-station against seepage of
water, rodents etc.
(v)

Tools and tackles required for handling and installation.

(vi) Necessary testing equipments for commissioning.

1.8

(vii) Watch and Ward of materials and/or installation and equipments till
their handing over to the department.
SITE CONDITIONS:
All the equipments and their installation shall be suitable for the
environmental conditions encountered at the location as indicated in
Appendix II.

1.9

INSPECTION OF SITE AND COLLECTION OF DATA:

The contractor shall be deemed to have examined the tender documents,
detailed specification, data etc. and to have visited the site or ascertained
all relevant details for offering suitable equipments/installation.

1.10

INTER CHANGEABILITY:
All similar equipments, materials, removable parts of similar equipments
etc. shall be inter-changeable with each other

1.11

INTERFERENCE WITH COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT:

Suppressors or other protection devices shall be provided, if required as
per schedule of quantities, wherever the sub-station installation is likely to
interfere during the operation with any other electric or electronic
equipment.

1.12

EXTENT OF WORK:
The scope of work shall consist of cost of all materials, labour i/c
supervision, installation, calibration, adjustments as required for
commissioning of the sub-station. The term complete installation shall
mean, not only, major item of the plant and the equipments covered by
these specifications, but also, incidental sundry components necessary for
complete execution and satisfactory performance of installation with all
labour charges, whether or not specifically mentioned in the tender
documents, which shall be provided by the contractor at no extra cost.
Vol. II / 229

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

1.13

COMPLETENESS OF TENDER:
All fittings, unit assemblies accessories, hardware foundation bolts,
terminals blocks for connections, cable glands and miscellaneous
materials and accessories of items of work which are useful and
necessary for efficient assembly and working of the equipment shall be
deemed to have been included within the scope of the work in the tender
and within the overall details for complete item whether they have been
specifically mentioned or not.

1.14

DATA MANUALS
CONTRACTOR:

1.14.1

After Award of Work

AND

DRAWINGS

TO

BE

FURNISHED

BY

The contractor shall submit the following drawing within a fortnight of the
award of the work or as specified in tender document which shall prevail,
for approval by the department.
(i)

General arrangement or location drawing of the equipment complete

with dimensions and clearances.

(ii)

General arrangement drawing of H.V. Panel, Transformers, M.V.

panels, Earthing, Cable route etc. including details of grouting of
channels / bolts of various equipments.

(iii) All panels schematics & wiring diagram including control wiring.
(iv) Bar chart indicating general programme for supply, installation,
testing and commissioning and handing over.
(v)

Any other drawing or data that may be necessary for the job.

1.14.2

Before Commencement of Installation:

The contractor shall also furnish 3 copies of detailed installation, operation
and maintenance manuals of manufacturers for all items of equipment
together with all relevant data sheet, spare parts catalogues, repairs,
assembly and adjustment procedure etc., in triplicate.

1.15

QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:

All parts of equipment shall be of such design, size and material so as to
function satisfactorily under all rated conditions of loading and operation.
All components of the equipment shall have adequate factors of safety.
Materials/components which are not conforming to standards laid down by
Bureau of Indian standards (BIS) shall be got approved from the
department before use on the work.

Vol.II / 230

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The entire work of fabrication, assembly and installation shall conform to

sound engineering practice and on the basis of fail safe design. The
mechanical parts subject to wear and tear shall be of easily replaceable
type.
The construction shall be such as to facilitate ease of operation,
inspection, maintenance and repairs. All apparatus shall also be designed
to ensure satisfactory operation under working conditions as specified.
1.16

INSPECTION, TESTING AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS.

The contractor will be required to furnish such facilities as will be
necessary for inspection of the equipment before dispatch at the
manufacturers works and also for witnessing such tests, at the works, if
so required by the department. The contractor shall furnish information for
this purpose and will also give sufficient notice regarding the dates
proposed for such test to Inspection agency.

1.17

TEST CERTIFICATE
Copies of all documents for routine, acceptance and type test certificates
of the equipment carried out at the manufacturers premise shall be
furnished to the department alongwith supply of the equipment.

1.18

DISPATCH OF MATERIALS AND STORAGE

The contractor shall commence work as soon as the drawings submitted
by him are approved. The contractor should dispatch all materials to site in
consultation with the department where suitable storage accommodation
may be made available to him temporarily. For this purpose the
programme of dispatches of materials shall be framed keeping in view the
building progress so that suitable storage accommodation could be made
available to the contractor. Safe custody of all machinery and equipment
supplied by the contractor shall be his own responsibility till the final taking
over by the CPWD.

1.19

COORDINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES

The contractor shall coordinate his work and cooperate with other
agencies by exchange of all technical information like details of foundation
if required, weight, over all dimensions, clearance and other technical data
required for successful and proper completion of his portion of the work in
relation to the work of others without any reservation. No remuneration
should be claimed from the department for such technical cooperation.
Care shall be taken not to damage the water proofing done in the case of
substations constructed below ground level. If any unreasonable
hindrance is caused to other agencies and any completed portion of the
works has to be dismantled and redone for want of the cooperation and
coordination by the contractor during the course of work, such expenditure
incurred will be recovered from the contractor during the course of work, if
the restoration work to the original condition of specification of the
dismantled portion of the work was not under taken by the contractor.
Vol. II / 231

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

1.20

CARE OF BUILDINGS
Care shall be taken, while handling/installing the equipment to avoid
damage to the building. On completion of the installation, the contractor
shall arrange to repair all damages to the building caused during plant
installation so as to bring to the original condition. He shall also arrange to
remove all unwanted waste materials from substation room and other
areas used by him.

1.21

PAINTINGAND PROTECTION
All damages to painting during transport and installation shall be set right
to the satisfaction of the department before handing over. All structural
frame work for support of various items of equipment shall be given the
final coat of paint of approved shade at site after erection is complete.
Additional protection measures against corrosion shall be provided when
installed in special environment.

1.22

TRAINING OF DEPARTMENTAL PERSONNEL

The operation and maintenance staff of the CPWD shall be associated
with the contractors personnel during the installation, testing and
commissioning of the equipments.

1.23

1.24

COMPLETION DRAWING
Three Sets of completion drawings comprising the following shall be
submitted by the contractor while handing over the installation.
(a)

Equipments layout drawing (s) giving complete details of the entire

equipments.

(b)

Electrical drawings for the entire electrical equipments showing cable

sizes, equipment capacities, switch-gears ratings, control
components, control wiring etc.

(c)

Schematic diagram of the entire sub-station installation.

FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING

When the installation is complete, the contractor shall arrange for
inspection and testing of the installation. Test results obtained shall be
recorded. The installation shall not be accepted until it complies with the
requirement of these Specifications. The Sub Station installation shall be
got inspected by the contractor from local licensee and/or CEA and their
clearance taken before energizing the Sub Station. All the observations/
deficiencies pointed out by the inspecting authorities shall be complied
with by the contractor on priority.
The department shall render all help and pay mandatory charges to CEA
and local licensee, if any, in this regard.
Vol. II / 232

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

1.25

DATE OF ACCEPTANCE
The contractor shall operate the sub station for a period of fifteen days
after it is energized. The date of taking over of the sub station shall be
reckoned after its trouble free operation during the running in period.

1.26

GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire sub-station installation as per
specifications. All equipments shall be guaranteed for one year from the
date of acceptance against unsatisfactory performance or break down due
to defective design, manufacture and installation. The installation shall be
covered by the conditions that whole installation or any part there of found
defective within one year from the date of taking over shall be replaced or
repaired by the contractor free of charge as decided by the department.
The warranty shall cover the followings:-

1.27

(a)

Quality, strength and performance of materials used.

(b)

Safe mechanical and Electrical stress on all parts under all specified
conditions of operation.

(c)

Satisfactory operation during the maintenance period.

(d)

Performance figures and other particulars as specified by the

tenderer under schedule of guaranteed technical particulars.

AFTER SALES SERVICES

The contractor shall ensure adequate and prompt after sales services in
the form of maintenance personnel and spares as and when required with
a view to minimizing the break down period. Particular attention shall be
given to ensure that all spares are easily available during the normal life of
installation.

Vol. II / 233

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 2
HIGH VOLTAGE PANEL
2.1

SCOPE
These specifications cover the detailed requirements for supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of High Voltage Panels.

2.2

TYPE OF PANELS:
(a)

Vacuum circuit breaker.

(b)

Gas filled Circuit Breaker: These breakers are new in the market and
are being used for 33KV and above in power distribution. These may
used on selective basis based on their availability, serviceability and
cost.

(c)

Gas insulated compact Switchgears with Vacuum Circuit Breakers .

These are recently introduced and may be used in cases of space
crunches judiciously . However the discussions shall be limited to
only Vacuum Circuit Breakers.

(A)

VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER

2.3
2.3.1

H.V. PANEL
The Panel board shall be of indoor type, having the incoming
sectionalisation and outgoing switch gears as per IS 13118-1991 of VCB,
IEC 62271-100 for Breakers and -200 for Panels/IS 3427 of switch board.
The degree of enclosure protection shall be IP-4X.
Detailed requirements shall be in accordance with the schedule of works
at Appendix-II.

2.3.2

Rating: All panels assembled to form a board shall be suitable for the
nominal operation voltage and rupturing capacity as specified. They
should be rated as specified with a minimum of 630 Amps. And suitable for
operation on 11 KV, 3 phase 50 Hz system. Type test certificate for the
breaking capacity of the panel shall be supplied. A circuit breaker for a
given duty in service is best selected by considering the individual rated
values required by load conditions and fault condition.

2.3.3

Type: The HV panel Board shall be metal clad, indoor, floor mounting, free
standing type. It shall be totally enclosed dust, damp and vermin proof.

2.3.4

General Construction: Separately earthed compartments shall be provided

for circuit breakers, bus bars, relay & instruments, CT&PT and cable
boxes, fully and effectively segregating these from one another so that
fault in any one compartment do not cause damage to equipment(s) in
other compartment(s).
Vol. II / 234

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

The housing shall be of bolted construction to ensure compact and rigid

structure, presenting a neat and pleasing appearance. The sheet steel
used should not be less than 2mm thick.
The panels shall be bolted together to form a continuous flush front switch
gear suitable for front operation of board and for extension at both ends.
2.3.5

General Design Aspects: The HV panel board shall be designed such that
the switchgear, instruments, relays, bus bars, small wiring etc. are
arranged and mounted with due consideration for the followings:(i)
(ii)

Facility for inspection, maintenance and repairs of testing terminals

and terminal boards for ease of external connection.
Minimum noise and vibrations.
-

Risk of accidental short circuits and open circuits.

Secured and vibration proof connections for power and control

circuits.

(iii) Risk of accidental contact and danger to personnel due to live

connections.
(iv) Mountings at approachable height.
2.4
2.4.1

CIRCUIT BREAKER:
General Arrangements: The circuit breaker panels shall be complete with
the following:
(a)

Racking in / Racking out mechanism.

(b)

Isolating plugs and sockets.

(c)

Mechanical inter-locks and safety shutters.

(d)

Mechanical ON/OFF indicator.

(e)

Minimum of 4 NO and 4 NC Auxiliary contacts directly operated by

the circuit breaker. Additional NO & NC contacts can be provided with
auxiliary contactors.

(f)

Anti condensation space heaters suitable for operation on 240V, 1

50 Hz A.C. for each panel wherever specified.

(g)

Suitable tripping arrangement

(h)

Mechanical counter to assess the total number of operations of the

breaker (if asked for specifically).
Vol. II / 235

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

2.4.2

Type: The circuit breaker shall be of horizontal/ vertical isolation,

horizontal draw out pattern.

2.4.3

Breaker Truck: The breaker carriage shall be fabricated from steel,

providing a sturdy vehicle for the circuit breaker and its operating and
tripping mechanism. The carriage shall be mounted on wheels, moving on
guides, designed to align correctly and allow easy movement of the circuit
breaker and for removing the carriage for inspection and maintenance
purposes. Vacuum interrupters shall be hermetically sealed and shall be
designed for minimum contact erosion, fast recovery of dielectric strength,
maintenance free vacuum interrupter, suitable for auto-reclosing. The
drive mechanism shall preferably be provided with facility for pad locking
at any position namely, Service, Test and Fully Isolated. It should be
possible for testing the circuit breaker for its operation without energizing
the power circuit in the Testing position. The contacts shall be made only
after the breaker is inserted into service position .Interlocking should
prevent contacts from being disconnected if circuit breaker is tried to be
moved from service position.

2.4.4

General Features: Single break contacts are provided in sealed vacuum

interrupter.

2.4.5

Rating: The circuit breakers shall be continuously rated as specified with a

minimum rated current of 630 Amps. With voltage rating and breaking
capacity as specified.

2.4.6

Operating Mechanism: The operating mechanism shall be one of the

following as specified:Manually operated spring charged / motor wound spring charged with both
mechanical and electrical release for closing. The operating mechanism
shall be trip free.

2.4.7

External auxiliary supply shall be made available for charging motors &
heaters operation.

2.5

BUS BAR SECTION:

2.5.1

General Requirement: The switch board shall be single bus bar pattern
with air insulated encapsulated bus bars housed in a separate
compartment, segregated from other compartments.
Material: The bus bars shall be of high conductivity electrolytic copper
rated as specified with a minimum rated current of 630 Amps. The bus
bars shall be sized for carrying the rated and short circuit current without
over-heating. Maximum bus bar temperature shall not exceed 95 degree
C.
Vol. II / 236

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

2.6
2.6.1

CURRENT TRANSFORMER:
General Requirements: Accommodation shall be provided in the circuit
breaker panel to mount one set of three numbers dual core dual ratio CTs
for metering and protection purposes. Access to the CTs for cleaning,
testing or changing shall be from the front, back or top of the panel.

2.6.2

Rating: Dual core & dual ratio CTs of suitable burden (but not less than 15
VA) shall be preferred with 5 Amps secondary. The ratio shall normally be
one of the following as specified:
(a)

400/200/5/5

(b)

300/150/5/5

(c)

200/100/5/5

(d) 100/50/5/5

(e)

such other as required

Note: CT ratio shall be compatible with the loading pattern on HV

side.
The CTs shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. The design and
construction shall be robust to withstand thermal and dynamic stresses
during short circuits. Secondary terminals of CTs shall be brought out
suitably to a terminal block which will be easily accessible for testing and
terminal connections. The protection CTs shall be of accuracy class 5 P 10
of IS 2705- Part III-1992.
The metering CTs shall conform to the metering ratio and accuracy class
0.5 of IS 2705-1992 for incomer and class 1 for outgoing Panels.
2.7

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER:

2.7.1

General Requirements: A voltage transformer of burden not less than 100

VA and of proper ratio as specified shall be provided at the incoming
panel.
The accuracy class for the VT shall be class 0.5 as per IS 3156 parts I to
III for incomer and class 1 for outgoing Panels.
The transformer shall be of cast epoxy resin construction. It shall be
fixed /withdraw able type. HRC fuses/MCBs shall be provided on both HV
and LV sides.

2.8
2.8.1

PROTECTION AND TRIPPING ARRANGEMENT:

Protection: The Relays shall be microprocessor based numerical relays
with O/L,E/F and S/C protection Tripping relay shall be used for tripping
signal to the Shunt Trip Coil of Circuit Breaker operating on 24V/30V D C
supply / Power pack / 110 V VT supply.
Vol. II / 237

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Note: - 24V/30V DC shall be provided through 2 No. SMF batteries of

12/15 volts of minimum 26 AH capacity with a battery charger as per
recommendation of the manufacturer both for protection as well as
indications.
Alternatively Power Pack converters fed through PT/230V externally could
be provided with 2 Nos., 12/15 volt, 7 AH SMF batteries (Power pack with
condenser / capacitor backup are also available which do not need
batteries, these should not be used) for tripping. In cases where tripping is
fed through PT, VA burden of PT shall be suitably increased (say 200 VA)
as recommended by the manufacturer depending upon the number of
panels and connected controls. In addition external 24 volt / 30 volt DC
supply shall be provided for indications etc. through 2 No. SMF batteries
of 12/ 15 volts of minimum 26 AH capacity with a battery charger as per
recommendation of the manufacturer.
2.8.2

Relays: Over current Relays shall have adjustable setting for current from
50% to 200% and earth fault from 10% to 40% or 20% to 80%. These
should be of manual reset type. All relays shall have a LED indicator which
will indicate operation for each function. It shall be possible to reset it only
by manual operation. The number and types of relays shall be as
specified.

2.9

SMALL WIRING
The small wiring shall be carried out with minimum1.5sq. mm FRLS/HFFR
insulated copper conductor cables. CT wiring shall be done with minimum
2.5 sq mm wires with colour code: RYB, Gray for auxiliary DC circuits and
Black for auxiliary AC circuits The wiring shall be securely fixed and neatly
arranged to enable easy tracing of wires. Identification tags shall be fitted
to all wire terminals to render identification easy and to facilitate checking
in accordance with IS 375. Necessary terminal blocks and cable entries
shall be provided for RTD relay wiring, power supply etc.

2.10

METERING INSTRUMENT, PANEL ACCESSORIES (DIGITAL):

2.10.1

Metering: Energy metering shall be done either on the incomers or on the

feeders as specified in Appendix II.

2.10.2

Voltage Selection Scheme: Where a bus coupler is incorporated and

only one incomer feeder (out of two available) is intended to be operated
at a time, a VT Transfer Relay shall be incorporated to provide necessary
potential for metering. This will be necessary when energy metering is
done on individual feeders or where VT supply is used for trip circuits.
Alternatively PTs shall be provided on both the bus sections (incomers)
with individual metering on each incomer.
Vol. II / 238

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

2.10.3

Instrument Panels: The instrument panel shall form part of the housing.
Relays, meters and instruments shall be mounted as per general
arrangement drawings to be submitted by the tenderer. They shall be
preferably of flush mounting type at a maximum height of 1800 mm.

2.10.4

Instrumentation:
(a)

A voltmeter of class 1.5 accuracy as per IS-1248 shall be provided at

each incomer panel, with selector switch. The instrument shall be
calibrated for the ranges specified.

(b)

Energy meters of class 1.0 conforming to IS. 722 (Part IX) and power
factor meter of class of accuracy of 2 shall be provided, if specified.

(c)

Ammeter of specified range of class 1.5 accuracy as per IS-1248

shall be provided at both incomer and outgoing panels alongwith
necessary selector switches.

(d)

The panel assembly shall also take care of the following

requirements:
(i)

Lamp indication shall be provided to indicate ON/OFF (BY red

green respectively) of switch gear.

(ii)

Panel illuminating lamp.

(iii) Mechanical indication for spring charged status. If possible an

indicating lamp could be provided.
(iv) Lamp indicating tripping at fault status.
(v)

Healthy trip supply shall be indicated by clear lamp.

(vi) Separate fuses/MCBs shall be provided for lamps, heaters,

voltmeters and other instrumentation etc. on each panel.
(vii) Anti-condensation space heaters shall be provided, and shall be
suitable for operation on 240 V, 1 phase, 50 Hz A.C. for each
panel if specified.
(viii) Where there is more than one incomer and bus sections, these
shall be castle key interlocked as per interlocking scheme as
specified.

Vol. II / 239

Sen & Lall

2.11

Spec/Tender doc.

CABLE BOXES
Cable boxes shall be situated in a compartment at the rear / side of the
housing as specified.

2.12

Cable Entry: provision for top (bus ducts preferred for top entry) / bottom
or such other side entry shall be made as per requirement with sufficient
head room for cable termination. 3mm thick removable gland plate shall
be provided for cable termination.

2.13

Earthing: The earthing of the breaker body and moving portion shall be so
arranged that the earthing of the non-current carrying structure to the
frame earth bar is completed well before the main circuit breaker plugs
enter the fixed house sockets.
The entire panel board shall have a common tinned copper earth bar of
suitable section with 2 earth terminals for effectively earthing metallic
portion of the panels. The frame earthing of panel shall be in accordance
with Section 7 of this specifications.

2.14

Installation: The installation work shall cover assembly of panels lining up,
grouting the units etc. In the case of multi panels switch boards after
connecting up the bus bar all joint shall be insulated with HV insulation
tape or with approved insulation compound. A common earth bar shall be
run preferably at the back of the switch board connecting all the sections
for connecting the earth system. All protection, indications & metering
connections and wirings shall be completed.
Where trip supply battery is installed the unit shall be commissioned,
completing initial charging of the batteries. All relay instruments and
meters shall be mounted and connected with appropriate wiring.
Calibration checks of units as necessary and required by the licensee like
CTs , VTs Energy Meters etc. shall be completed before pre-commission
checks are undertaken.

2.15

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Procedure for testing and commissioning of relay shall be in general
accordance with good practice.
Commissioning checks and tests shall include in addition to checking of all
small wiring connections, relays calibration and setting tests by secondary
injection method and primary injection method. Primary injection test will
be preferred for operation of relay through CTs. Before panel board is
commissioned, provision of the safety namely fire extinguishers, rubber
mats and danger board shall be ensured. In addition all routine megger
tests shall be performed. Checks and test shall include following.
Vol. II / 240

Sen & Lall

(a)

Spec/Tender doc.

Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.

(b)

Interlock function checks.

(c)

Continuity checks of wiring, fuses etc. as required.

(d)

Insulation tests.

(e)

Trip test and protection gear tests.

(f)

The complete panel shall be tested with 5000V megger for insulation
between poles and poles to earth. Insulation test of secondary of CTs
and VT to earth shall be conducted using 500V megger.

(g)

Any other tests as may be required by the Licensee / Inspector shall

be conducted.

(h)

Where specified, the entire switch board shall withstand high voltage
test after installation.

(i)

Any other test required by the consignee/inspecting officer.

Vol. II / 241

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION-3
TRANSFORMERS
3.1

SCOPE
This section covers the detailed requirements regarding supply,
installation, testing, commissioning and handing over of transformers
required for the sub-station.
Conventionally oil cooled transformers were being used for electrical
substation. However due to presence of oil for cooling of transformers, an
inherent fire risk is involved in the use of oil cooled transformers.
After repeated fire accidents due to burning of oil in oil cooled
transformers, I.E. Rules have been amended to provide for use of only dry
type transformers where a substation is planned inside the main building
while oil cooled transformers can continue to be used if the substation is
located in an independent building.
There are two types of dry type transformers viz. vacuum pressure
impregnated (VPI) dry type transformers and cast resin dry type
transformers. This section provide for use of both the type of dry type
transformers where individual capacity of transformer does not exceed
400 KVA. Only cast resin dry type transformers shall be used for higher
capacity.

3.2

OIL COOLED TRASFORMERS

Oil filled transformers may be used only in substations located in separate
single or two storied service buildings outside the main building structure
and there shall at least be 6 meter clear distance between the adjoining
buildings and substation such that fire tender is able to pass between the
two structures. (NBC-2005 Part-8, Section 2 clause 4.2.1 j).

3.2.1

General Construction
The oil filled Transformers shall comply with the following Indian
Standards as amended upto date:
(i)

IS 2026 - Part I to V power transformers.

(ii)

IS 335 - Transformer oil

(iii) IS 10028 (Part II & III) - Installation and Maintenance of

Transformers.
(iv) IS 2099 - Bushings
(v)

IS 2705 - Current Transformers.

(vi) IS 6600 - Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers.

Vol. II / 242

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.2.2

Insulation Oil Insulation oil shall conform to IS 335. Transformer oil to be

supplied with initial fill of filtered oil.

3.2.3

General Requirements
The transformer shall be indoor or outdoor type as specified. Unless
otherwise specified the transformer in addition shall have thermal and
dynamic ability to withstand external short-circuit as per clause 9 of IS
2026 (Part I) 1977.
Capacity and Rating

3.2.4

The KVA ratings for three phase transformers are given below: 100

250

630

1600

125

315

800

& higher

160

400

1000

200

500

1250

Continuous rating specified shall be irrespective of tapping position.

TEMPERATURE RISE
The reference ambient temperatures assumed for the purpose of this
specification are as follows: (a)

Maximum ambient air temperature 500C.

(b)

Maximum daily average ambient air temperature 40 0C.

(c)

Maximum yearly weighted average ambient temperature 32 0C.

(d)

Minimum yearly weighted average ambient temperature (-)5 0C.

The temperature rise at the above conditions and at the altitude not
exceeding 1000 meters shall be as follows: By resistance method 550C (maximum temperature being 950C).
By thermometer 500C.
If the site conditions indicated for a particular job is more severe than the
refereed ambient temperature mentioned above, the temperature rise
shall be suitably scaled down such that the hot spot temperature shall not
exceed the values for the reference conditions.

Vol. II / 243

Sen & Lall

3.2.5

Spec/Tender doc.

Tap Changing Device

Tap changing device shall be provided on H.V side, circuit type, externally
hand operated with necessary indications for tap position and locking
arrangement at any of the tapping positions. It shall be designed for bidirectional operation and shall be of self positioning type and shall have
the following steps: 2.5%

5%

-7.5%

-10% (if required)

Note: Tap changing device shall normally be off load type. However NIT
approving authority may use on load type Tap Changing Devices
judiciously.
3.2.6

Voltage Ratio
Unless otherwise specified, the transformer shall be suitable for a voltage
ratio of 11 KV/433 V.
VECTOR GROUP
In case of step down transformers, the winding connections shall conform
to vector group dy. 11 unless otherwise specified.
In case of step up transformer the vector group unless otherwise specified
shall be star/ delta.

3.2.7

Cooling
Unless otherwise specified, the transformer shall be oil immersed natural
air-cooled type (ONAN).

3.2.8

Accessories
The transformer shall be a single tank type with termination on bushings
or cable end box as specified both on HV and MV side. The MV side shall
be suitable to receive bus bar trunking or MV cable inter-connection
suitable for full load current of the transformer.
FITTINGS
The transformer shall be complete with the following fittings: (a)

Oil conservator with oil level indicator, minimum level marking and
drain plug for all transformers of capacity 50 KVA and above.

(b)

Off circuit type tap changer with position indicator and locking
arrangement for all transformers.
Vol. II / 244

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

(c)

Thermometer pocket with plug for all transformers of capacity 100

KVA and above.

(d)

100 mm dial type /stem type thermometer with metal guard Dial type
thermometer may have max. temperature indicator and resetting
device for all transformers of capacity 250 KVA and above.

(e)

Lifting lugs for all transformers.

(f)

Bi-directional /Unidirectional Rollers to be specified.

(g)

Rating diagram and terminal marking plate for all transformers.

(h)

Explosion vent for all transformers of capacity 400 KVA and above.

(i)

Additional Neutral separately brought out on a bushing for earthing

for all transformers.

(j)

Earth terminals (2 Nos.) for body earthing for all transformers.

(k)

Valves for filtration, drainage and filling etc. with necessary plugs for
all transformers.

(l)

Radiator assembly for all transformers.

(m) Silica gel breather for all transformers.

(n)

Air release plug for all transformers.

(o)

First filling of oil to IS 335/1993 including make-up fill during

installation for all transformers.

(p

Facility to connect up Buchholtz relay for all transformers of capacity

800 KVA and above.

(q)

Inspection covers on tank cover for access to terminal connections

for all transformers.

(r)

Bushing terminations or cable box terminations as specified.

(s)
3.2.9

Necessary hardware, clamps, lugs etc. for termination on HV/MV etc.

for all transformers.
Explosion Vent
Explosion vent or pressure relief device shall be provided of sufficient size
for rapid release of any pressure that may be generated within the tank
and which might result in damage to the equipment. The device shall
operate at a static pressure less than the hydraulic test pressure for
transformer tank. Means shall be provided to prevent the ingress of
moisture and of such a design to prevent gas accumulation.
Vol. II / 245

Sen & Lall

3.2.10

Spec/Tender doc.

Accommodation for Auxiliary Apparatus

Where specified, such as, for restricted earth fault protection, facilities
shall be provided for the mounting of a neutral current transformer.
RATING AND DIAGRAM PLATES
The following plates shall be fixed to Transformer in a visible position.

3.2.11

(a)

A rating plate of weather proof material bearing the data specified in

the appropriate clauses of IS: 2026/1977.

(b)

A diagram plate showing the internal connection and also the voltage
vector relationship of the several windings in accordance with IS:
2026-1977 and a plan view of the transformer giving the correct
physical relationship of the terminals.

Joints and Gaskets

All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of proven material such
as granulated cork bonded with synthetic rubber gaskets or synthetic
rubber or such other good material.
GAS AND OIL ACTUATED (BUCH HOLTZ) RELAYS
Buchholtz Relay shall be provided for transformers of capacity 800 KVA
and above. The design of the relay mounting arrangements, the
associated pipe work shall be such that mal-operation of the relays shall
not take place under normal service. The pipe work shall be so arranged
that all gas arising from the transformer shall pass through the gas and oilactuated relay. The oil circuit through the relay shall not form a delivery
path in parallel with any circulating oil pipe, nor shall it be tied into or
connected through the pressure relief vent, Sharp bends in the pipe work
shall be avoided.
All wiring connections, terminal boards, fuses and links etc. connected
with gas actuated relays shall be suitable for tropical atmosphere. Any
wiring liable to be in contact with oil shall have oil resistant insulation and
the bared ends of stranded wire shall be sealed together to prevent
seepage of oil entering connection boxes used for cables or wiring.

3.2.12

Cable Box
Cable box shall not be mounted on the tank covers. It shall be feasible to
remove the tank covers for inspection during maintenance etc. without
recourse to breaking the joints or disturbing the cables already terminated.
Necessary removable links in oil approachable through inspection cover in
tank cover etc. after lowering oil shall be provided for test purpose.
Vol. II / 246

Sen & Lall

3.2.13

Spec/Tender doc.

Parallel Operation
For parallel operation of transformers, the transformers shall have the
same percentage impedance, same voltage ratio, same vector group,
phase sequence etc.

3.2.14
Tests
3.2.14.1 Tests at Works
All routine and other tests prescribed by IS 2026 shall be carried out at the
manufacturers works before dispatch of the transformer in the presence
of inspecting officer if required. Copies of the test certificates shall be
furnished to the department. In addition to the prescribed routine tests,
temperature rise test shall be invariably done on one transformer of each
design. A copy of the impulse test certificate done on the same
type/design of the transformer shall be furnished in accordance with IS for
purpose of record. If no impulse test was done in an earlier unit of the
same design and capacity, one transformer will be subjected to impulse
test in consultation with the Inspector at the firms cost.
Copies of the certificates for pressure test, test for bushings, and type test
for short circuit shall be supplied to the Department.
3.2.14.2 Tests at Site
In addition to tests at manufacturers premises, all relevant
precommissioning checks and tests conforming to IS code of practice No.
10028 (Part II & III) shall be done before energization. The following tests
are to be particularly done before cable jointing or connecting up the bus
bar trunking.
(a)

Insulation test between HV to earth and HV to MV with 5000 volts

Megger.

(b)

Insulation test between MV to earth with 500 volts Megger.

(c)

Di-electric strength Test on oil.

(d)

Buchholtz relay operation by simulation test when fitted.

All test results are to be recorded and reports should be submitted to the
department.
3.2.15

Installation and Commissioning

3.2.15.1 The transformer shall be installed in accordance with IS 10028 (Part II &
III)-Code of practice for Installation and maintenance of transformer.
Necessary support channels shall be grouted in the flooring.
Vol. II / 247

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.2.15.2 The Transformer shall be moved to its location and shall be correctly
positioned. Transformer wheels shall be either locked or provided with
wheel stoppers. All parts of the transformers which are supplied loose,
such as conservator, radiator banks, Buchholtz relay, dial thermometer,
bushing etc. shall be fitted on the transformer. Transformer oil supplied in
drums shall be topped up into the transformer after duly testing/filtering
upto the correct level required.
3.2.15.3 Wiring of devices such as Buchholtz relay, dial thermometer etc. shall be
carried out as per drawings, Earthing of neutral and body of the
transformer shall be done in accordance with section (7) of these
specifications.
3.2.15.4 Drying out of transformer winding will be necessary when the di-electric
strength of the oil is lower than the minimum value as per IS-10028 or the
transformer has not been energized within 6 months of leaving the works
or where the radiator assembly is done at site. The transformer shall be
dried out by one of the methods specified in IS -10028. Drying out with
centrifugal or vacuum type filters will, however, be preferred. The
contractor shall carry out the process of drying without interruption and
shall maintain a log sheet indicating time, oil temperature and insulation
resistance.
3.2.15.5 After complete drying out of the transformer, oil sample shall be collected
by the contractor and shall be tested for dielectric strength as specified in
IS:335-1993 with approved test kit. 3.2.15.6 All devices such as dial type
thermometers, Buchholtz relays and main alarm and trip contacts shall be
checked for satisfactory operation.
3.2.15.7 All tests specified in 3.2.14 of these specifications shall be carried out by
the contractor in the presence of inspecting officer/consignee free of cost.
3.2.16

Maximum Allowable Power Transformer Losses

Power transformers of the proper ratings and design must be selected to
satisfy the minimum acceptable efficiency at 50% and full load rating. In
addition, the transformer must be selected such that it minimizes the total
of its initial cost in addition to the present value of the cost of its total lost
energy while serving its estimated loads during its respective life span.

Vol. II / 248

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Total losses for oil filled transformers should conform as per the following
table:
Maximum allowable losses for oil filled distribution transformer
with highest voltage for equipment 36 kV, at 50% and 100% of the
load
Transformer
Capacity (kVA)

3.2.17

Maximum Allowable
losses at full losses at
50% kVA or load

Maximum
Allowable load /
Rated kVA

100

1.04%

1.80%

160

0.96%

1.38%

200

0.93%

1.35%

250

0.89%

1.27%

400

0.79%

1.12%

500

0.75%

1.05%

630

0.70%

0.99%

1000

0.70%

0.98%

1600

0.65%

0.98%

2000

0.64%

0.98%

Guaranteed Technical Data

Guaranteed technical particulars shall be supplied vide Schedule C of
Appendix III.

3.3

DRY TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

3.3.1

General Construction

3.3.1.1

The Transformers shall comply with the following Indian Standards as

amended upto date:
(i)

IS 11171 : 1985 - Dry type power transformers.

(ii) IS 10028 (Part II & III) - Installation and Maintenance of

Transformers.
(iii) IS 2099 - Bushing
(iv) IS 2705 - Current Transformers.
Vol. II / 249

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.3.1.2

Constructional Features: All the MS parts shall be either Hot dipped

galvanized or cold galvanized to make them corrosion free. The core shall
be made up of high grade low loss cold rolled grain oriented silicon steel.
Both low & high voltage windings shall be made of copper conductor. The
class of winding insulation shall correspond to class F. The construction
of the windings of the transformer shall be such that. no creepage path is
found even in dusty & corrosive ambient conditions. The core coil
assembly shall be housed in a prefabricated enclosure. The enclosure
shall be fabricated with mild steel CRCA sheets with adequate provision
for ventilation. The enclosures shall under go the seven tank process.
Finally the external and internal surfaces of the enclosure shall be powder
coated with the required paint shade.

3.3.2

General Requirements: The transformer shall be indoor or outdoor type

as specified. Unless otherwise specified the transformer in addition shall
have thermal and dynamic ability to withstand external short-circuit as per
clause 9 of IS 2026 (Part I) 1977 and clause 5 of IS 11171-1985.

3.3.3

Capacity and Rating: The KVA ratings for three phase transformers are
given below: 250
315
400
500

630
800
1000
1250

1600
& higher

Continuous rating specified shall be irrespective of tapping position.

3.3.4

Indoor transformers shall be suitable for IP-23 protection; out door

transformers shall confirm to IP-33 protection.

3.3.5

Temperature Rise: The reference ambient temperatures assumed for the

purpose of this specification are as follows: (a)

Maximum ambient air temperature

500C.

(b)

Maximum daily average ambient air temperature

400C.

(c)

Maximum yearly weighted average ambient temperature

(d)

Minimum yearly weighted average ambient temperature (-) 50C.

(e)

Class of insulation

320C.

The temperature rise limit at the above conditions and at the altitude not
exceeding 1000 meters shall be as specified.
If the site conditions indicated for a particular job is more severe than the
Vol. II / 250

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

referred ambient temperature mentioned above, the temperature rise

above ambient shall be suitably scaled down such that the hot spot
temperature shall not exceed the values for the reference conditions 90 0C
(F class insulation).
3.3.6

(A) Tap Changing Device: Preferred tapping range is +5% to -7.5% in 2.5
percent steps by means of off load tap changing links or tap switch. The
device shall be provided on HV for HV Voltage to keep LV Voltage
constant.
(B) Terminal Markings Connections: Relevant provisions of IS:2026
(Part-IV)-1977 shall be applicable.

3.3.7

Voltage Ratio: Unless otherwise specified, the transformer shall be

suitable for a voltage ratio of 11 KV/433 V.

3.3.8

Vector Group: In case of step down transformers, the winding

connections shall conform to vector group Dy 11 unless otherwise
specified. In case of step up transformer the vector group unless
otherwise specified shall be star /delta.

3.3.9

Cooling: Unless otherwise specified the transformer cooling shall be air

and naturally cooled (AN)

3.3.10

Accessories: The transformer shall be with enclosure or without

enclosure with HV and MV terminations as specified both on HV and MV
side. The MV side shall be suitable to receive bus bar trunking or MV
cable inter-connection suitable for full load current of the transformer.

3.3.11

Fittings: The transformer shall be complete with the following fittings: (a)

Off load type tap changing link or tap switch.

(b)

RTD temperature controller.

(c)

Lifting lugs for all transformers.

(d)

Bi-directional /Unidirectional Rollers to be specified.

(e)

Rating diagram and terminal marking plate for all transformers.

(f)

Additional Neutral separately brought out on a bushing for earthing

for all transformers.

(g)

Earth terminals (2 Nos.) for body earthing for all transformers.

(h)

Necessary hardware, clamps, lugs etc. for termination on HV/MV etc.

for all transformers.
Vol. II / 251

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.3.12

Rating Plates : A rating plate of weather proof material bearing the data
specified in clause-8 of IS: 11171: 1985

3.3.13

Joints and Gaskets: All gaskets used for making gas tight joints shall be
of proven material.

3.3.14

Parallel Operation : For parallel operation of transformers, the

transformers shall have the same percentage impedance, same voltage
ratio, same vector group, phase sequence etc.
Where ever more than one Transformer is to be installed in the same SubStation, capacity of each Transformer shall preferably be same.

3.3.15

Tests:

3.3.15.1 Tests at Works: All routine and other tests prescribed in IS 11171 : 1985
shall be carried out at the manufacturers works before the dispatch of the
transformer in the presence of inspecting officer. Copies of the test
certificates shall be furnished to the department. In addition to
theprescribed routine tests, temperature rise test shall be invariably done
on one transformer of each design. A copy of the impulse test certificate
done on the same type/design of the transformer shall be furnished in
accordance with IS 11171 : 1985 for purpose of record. If no impulse test
was done in an earlier unit of the same design and type, one transformer
will be subjected to impulse test in consultation with the Inspector at the
firms cost. Copies of the certificates of type test for short circuit shall be
supplied to the Department.
3.3.15.2 Tests at Site: In addition to tests at manufacturers premises, all relevant
precommissioning checks and tests conforming to IS code of practice No.
10028 shall be done before energization. The following tests are to be
particularly done before cable jointing or connecting up the bas bar
trunking.
(a) Insulation test between HV to earth and HV to MV with a 5000 volts
Megger.

3.3.16

(b)

Insulation test between MV to earth with 500 volts Megger.

(c)

All test results are to be recorded and reports should be submitted to

the department.

Installation and Commissioning:

3.3.16.1 The transformer shall be installed in accordance with IS 10028-Code of

practice for Installation and maintenance of transformer. Necessary
support channels shall be grouted in the flooring.
Vol. II / 252

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.3.16.2 The Transformer shall be moved to its location and shall be correctly
positioned. Transformer wheels shall be either locked or provided with
wheel stoppers.
3.3.16.3 Wiring of devices shall be carried out as per drawings; Earthing of neutral
and body of the transformer shall be done in accordance with section (7)
of these specifications.
3.3.16.4 All devices shall be checked for satisfactory operation.
3.3.16.5 All tests specified in 3.2.14 of these specifications shall be carried out by
the contractor in the presence of inspecting officer/consignee free of cost.
3.3.17

Maximum Allowable Power Transformer Losses

Power transformers of the proper ratings and design must be selected to
satisfy the minimum acceptable efficiency at 50% and full load rating. In
addition, the transformer must be selected such that it minimizes the total
of its initial cost in addition to the present value of the cost of its total lost
energy while serving its estimated loads during its respective life span.
Total losses for dry type distribution transformers should conform as per
the following table:

Vol. II / 253

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Maximum allowable losses for dry type distribution transformer

with highest voltage for equipment 24 kV, at 50% and 100% of the
load
Transformer
Capacity (kVA)

Maximum Allowable
losses at full losses at
50% kVA or load

Maximum
Allowable load /
Rated kVA

100

1.88%

2.44%

160

1.61%

2.07%

200

1.50%

1.90%

250

1.36%

1.73%

400

1.19%

1.51%

500

1.12%

1.45%

630

1.06%

1.40%

1000

0.90%

1.20%

1600

0.79%

1.05%

2000

0.75%

1.00%

Vol. II / 254

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 4
M.V. PANELS
4.1

Scope
This Section covers the detailed requirements of medium voltage switch
Panel for 433V, 3 phase 50Hz 4 wire system. These shall be branded
and/or assembled/ fabricated from a factory of repute. All switchgears
shall be fully rated at an ambient of 400C.

4.2

Type of Panel
The medium voltage switch board panel shall comprise of any one of the
following types of switchgears or combination thereof as specified.
(a)

Air Circuit breakers draw out or fixed type.

(b)

Switch Disconnector Fuse Units fixed type, MCCBs of suitable Ics

ratings. MCCBs shall invariably be Current Limiting type. Features
like Double Break, Positive Isolation functions shall be preferred.

The Panel shall be indoor type having incoming sectionalization and

outgoing switchgears as specified. The design shall be cubical type. The
degree of enclosure protection shall be IP 42 as per IS:13947 (Part-I).
4.3
4.3.1

M.V Panel
General Construction
The switchboard shall be floor mounted free standing totally enclosed and
extensible type. The switch board shall be dust & vermin proof and shall
be suitable for the climate conditions as specified. The design shall
include all provisions for safety of operation and maintenance personnel.
The general construction shall conform to IS: 8623/1993 for factory
assembled switch board.

4.3.2
4.3.2.1

Cubical Type Panels

Cubical type panels shall be fabricated out of sheet steel not less than 2.0
mm thick. Wherever necessary, such sheet steel members shall be
stiffened by angle iron frame work. General construction shall employ the
principle of compartmentalization and segregation for each circuit. Unless
otherwise approved, incomer and bus section panels or sections shall be
separate and independent and shall not be mixed with sections required
for feeders. Each section of the rear accessible type panel shall have
hinged access doors at the rear. Overall height of the panel shall not
exceed 2.4 meters. Operating levers, handle etc. of highest unit shall not
be higher than 1.7 meters. Multi-tier mounting of feeder is permissible.
The general arrangement for multi tier construction shall be such that the
horizontal tiers formed present a pleasing and aesthetic look. The general
arrangement shall be approved before fabrication. Cable entries for
various feeders shall be either from top or bottom. Through cable alleys
Vol. II / 255

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

located in between two circuit sections ,either in the rear or in the front of
the panel. All cable terminations shall be through gland plates. There shall
be separate gland plate for each cable entry so that there will not be
dislocation of already wired circuits when new feeders are added. Cable
entry plates shall therefore be sectionalized. The construction shall include
necessary cable supports for clamping the cable in the cable alley or rear
cable chamber.
Cubicle panels with more than 1000 Amps BUS shall be made of tested
structural modular sections.
4.3.2.2

Bus Bar and Connections The bus bars shall be of Copper of high
conductivity electrolytic quality and of adequate section. Current density
shall not exceed 160 amps for Copper /sq. cm. The bus bar system may
comprise of a system of main horizontal bus bars and ancillary vertical bus
bars run in bus bar alleys on either side of which the circuit could be
arranged with front access cable entries. In the case of rear access,
horizontal bus system shall run suitably either at the top or bottom. All
connections to individual circuits from the bus bar shall preferably be solid
connections; however flexible connections shall also be permitted as per
recommendations of the Panel Manufacturer. All bus bars and connections
shall be suitably sleeved / insulated in approved manner.

4.3.2.3

Incomer / Termination
Incomer termination shall be suitable for receiving bus trunking
/underground cables. Cable terminations shall invariably be through
terminal blocks (Polyamide or superior) or brought out solid terminals.

4.3.2.4

Instruments
All voltmeters and ammeters shall be flush mounted of size minimum 96
mm conforming to class 1.5 of IS:1248 for accuracy. All voltmeters shall be
protected with MCB.

4.3.2.5

Indicating Lamps
On all the incomers of M.V panels, ON/OFF indicating LED lamps shall be
provided and shall be suitable for operation on AC supply. Phase
indicating LED lamps shall be associated with necessary ON/OFF toggle
switch.

4.3.2.6

Small Wiring
All small wiring for Controls, Indication etc. shall be of with suitable
FRLS/HFFR (halogen free fire retardant) copper conductor cables. Wiring
shall be suitably protected within switch board. Runs of wires shall be
neatly bunched, suitably supported and clamped. Means shall be provided
for easy identifications of the wires. Where wires are drawn through steel
Vol. II / 256

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

conduits, the works shall conform to CPWD General Specifications for

Electrical works (Part I- Internal) - 2013 and IS:732 as the case may be.
Identification ferrules shall be used at both ends of the wires. All control
wiring meant for external connections are to be brought out of terminal
board.
OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The indoor type MV panel shall conform to the following: (a)

The panel shall comprise of incomers, outgoing feeders and bus

coupler as specified. The incomer shall be either a double break /
contact repulsion MCCB or an Air Circuit Breaker. The bus coupler
shall be either a circuit breaker or a double break / contact repulsion
MCCB or switch disconnector fuse unit as specified. The outgoing
feeders shall be circuit breakers/MCCBs as specified.

(b)

Bus bars for phase and neutral shall have a rating as specified in the
format of Appendix II.

(c)

The entire switch panel shall be cubical type generally conforming to

IS:8623/1993 for factory assembled switch board.

(d)

The incomer panel shall be suitable for receiving bus trunking or MV

cable of size specified either from top or from bottom.

(e)

All incoming AIRCIRCUIT BREAKER/MCCB shall have suitable

adjustable tripping current and the time delay settings.

(f)

The entire panel shall have a common earth bar of size as specified
with two terminals for earth connections.

4.5

Rating and Requirements

4.5.1

Air Circuit Breaker

All Air Circuit Breakers shall be 3/4 pole with minimum 50 KA breaking
capacity (35 MVA at 433V) conforming to IS: 13947 (Part-II). Rated current
shall be as per capacities specified. The equipment shall be complete with
the following: (a)

Necessary circuit breaker carriage with 3 position (isolate, test,

service) draw-out mechanism.

(b)

Necessary isolating plugs and sockets.

(c)

Necessary mechanism interlock and automatic safe shutters gear

with arrangement for pad locking.
Vol. II / 257

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

(d)

Necessary independent manual spring mechanism with mechanical

On/Off indication as well as electrical On/Off indication.

(e)

Necessary bus bars with bolted type neutral links.

(f)

ACB shall be provided with microprocessor based releases having

built in over load, short circuit & earth fault protection. Microprocessor
release shall be EMI(electro magnetic induction)/EMC(electro
magnetic compatible) certified.

(g)

Necessary set of auxiliary switches.

(h)

Necessary set of CTs with ratios as specified.

(i)

Necessary identification, metering requirements as specified i/c. ON/

OFF indication lamps, selector switches, fuses, ammeter, voltmeter
etc.

(j)

In case of 4 pole breaker neutral shall be fully rated with adjustable

settings from 50% to 100% of In.

(k)

ACB terminals shall be suitable/suitably brought out for direct

aluminum termination as per IS 13947 Part-II.

Note: Wherever fixed type circuit breakers are required, it shall be clearly
specified in Appendix II. Also refer Appendix V for further guidelines.
4.5.2

Switch Disconnector Fuse Units /MCCB:

4.5.2.1

Switch Disconnector Fuse Units: All SDF units for feeders or outgoing
circuits shall be suitable for a Breaking capacity of 80 KA (57 MVA 433V)
capacity at 433V 3 phase 50 Hz AC system conforming to IS: 4064. The
number of units and rated current shall be as per detailed requirements
specified. Switch Disconnector Fuse unit shall be double break front
operated type. The units shall be complete with following: (a)

Necessary HRC cartridge fuses conforming to IS:9224 (Part-II).

(b)

Necessary operating mechanism quick break make type.

(c)

Necessary set of CTs together with an ammeter and selector switch

as specified.

(d)

Necessary interconnections to bus bars.

(e)

Necessary neutral link inside the SDF unit.

(f)

All SDF units shall be AC23A utilization category.

Vol. II / 258

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

4.5.2.2

MCCB : All MCCBs shall be current limiting type with features of load line
reversibility and suitable for Horizontal/Vertical mounting without any
derating. Beyond 300Amps capacity MCCBs shall have positive isolation
and preferably double break / contact repulsion & double insulation
features. The MCCBs shall invariably be used with terminal spreaders.

4.6

TEST AT MANUFA CTURERS WORK

All routine tests shall be carried out and test certificates produced to the
department.

4.7

INSTALLATION
The installation work shall cover assembly of various sections of the
panels lining up, grouting the units etc. In the case of multiple panel switch
boards after connecting up the bus bars etc., all joints shall be insulated
with necessary insulation tape or approved insulation compound. A
common earth bar as per section 7 of these specifications shall be run
inside at the back of switch panel connecting all the sections for
connection to frame earth system. All protection and other small wirings
for indication etc. shall be completed before calibration and commissioning
checks are commenced. All relays, meters etc. shall be mounted and
connected with appropriate wiring.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Commissioning checks and tests shall include all wiring checks and
checking up of connections. Relay adjustment/setting shall be done before
commissioning in addition to routine Megger tests. Checks and tests shall
include the following: (a)

Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.

(b)

Interlock function checks.

(c)

Continuity checks of wiring, fuses etc. as required.

(d)

Insulation test: When measured with 500V Megger the insulation

resistance shall not be less than 100 mega ohms.

(e)

Trip tests and protection gear test.

Vol. II / 259

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 5
CABLE WORKS
5.1

SCOPE
This section covers supply, laying and jointing as required and testing and
energizing all cable work.

5.2

SPECIFICATION OF CABLE

5.2.1

11 KV grade XLPE insulated PVC sheathed armoured Aluminum/Copper

cable shall be 3 core earthed of sizes as specified. The cable shall
conform to IS-1554, Part II

5.2.2

1.1 KV grade XLPE insulated PVC sheathed armoured Aluminum /

Copper cable shall be 3 /4 core of sizes as specified. The cable shall
conform to IS:1554 Part I.

5.2.3

All control wires shall be 650V grade copper conductor Halogen free fire
retardant or FRLS PVC insulated, conforming to IS:1554 Part I. The
minimum size of the control wires shall be 1.5 sq. mm.

5.3

INSTALLATION
Cable shall be laid in ground, trenches, cable trays and on walls as
specified. Installation shall include all supports and clamps as required.
The complete work shall be in accordance to CPWD General
Specifications for Electrical works - Part II (External) 1994 amended upto
date. As far as possible cables shall not be fixed on walls directly but laid
on cable trays.

5.4

JOINTING FOR 11 KV GRADE CABLE GLANDS

Jointing work shall be carried out only by licensed experienced cable
jointer and shall be in accordance to CPWD General Specifications for
Electrical works Part-II (External) 1994 amended upto date.

5.5

EARTHING FOR 11 KV GRADE CABLE GLANDS

All HV cable glands shall be connected to the earth with 2 Nos. 38.6 mm
copper or equivalent G.I conductors.

5.6

Selection shall be made as per tables given under table-V of CPWA

General Specification for Electrical Works Part-II (External)- 1994
amended upto date.

Vol. II / 260

Sen & Lall

5.7

Spec/Tender doc.

TESTING
Testing of the complete cable installation shall be as per clause 2.8.2 and
2.8.3 of CPWD General Specifications for Electrical works - Part II
(External) 1994 amended upto date.

5.8

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM LOSSES

The power cabling shall be adequately sized as to maintain the distribution
losses not to exceed 1% of the total power usage. Record of design
calculation for the losses shall be maintained.
The cables be designed as per the voltag drop regulations at peak load,
and the losses be calculated on the basis of the assessed load during the
day, week and year and should not be limited to the peak load.

Vol. II / 261

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 6
BUS TRUNKING
Scope
This section covers manufactures, supply installation, testing and
commissioning of enclosed type bus ducts indoor type tor connection
between the Transformer and MV panels. Bus Trunking shall be used for
all sub-stations to capacity 500 KVA and more. These may be used even
for smaller sub- stations judiciously.
A : CONVENTIONAL BUS TRUNKING
6.1

Provisions for such works in this regard given under GENERAL

SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS PART-1 INTERNAL 2013
amended up to date should be referred to.
B : COMPACT BUS TRUNKING

6.2

SCOPE
This section deals with two types of compact BUS TRUNINGs available
commercially: (1) Air Insulated and (2) Sandwitch insulated. These are
described as given below:
(1)

6.3

AIR INSULATED COMPACT BUS TRUNKING / RISING MAINS:

SCOPE
The Bus Trunking/ Rising Mains are suitable for distributing 3 phase,50 hz,
415/ 450 volts A.C. supply. These are available with Aluminum as well as
Copper Conductors.

6.4

STANDARD FOR COMPLIANCE

IS : 8623 / 1993 Part I & II.

6.5

CONSTURCTION
Enclosure will be manufactured from CRCA sheet steel powder coated to
shade RAL 7032 (or such other specified) or GI. Enclosure will be
rectangular in shape. Busbars will be placed over insulators (Class F)
located every 250mm (Such other suitable length) along its length. On
front face of the enclosure, tap off points for inserting plug in boxes will be
provided at regular interval (500mm or so). Each plug in point will have
provision for closing with shutted assembly which is integral part of
enclosure. When not occupied by plug in box.

Vol. II / 262

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Bus bars will be aluminum conductor 63401 / WP grade aluminum alloy or

copper conductor ETP grade with 99.9% pure copper, with radicalised
edges. For ease in handling, length of largest section will be restricted to 3
Mtrs nominally (floor to floor height). Neutral cross section unless specified
for reduced cross section will be same as phase cross section unless
specified for reduced cross section. Bus bars will not be drilled and so
placed in insulators that when placed vertically they do not slide out of
enclosure.
Joints between bus bars of one section to adjacent section will be through
Uniblock Joint assembly operated by single bolt or clamped connections
located in an insulated housing operated by single screw. Uniblock joint
system will be removable and inserted as a separate sub-assembly to
isolate adjacent sections without disturbing or moving bus bars.
Fire barriers of two hours rating will be provided at each floor crossing as
per UL 1479 or as per IEC 60439 and test certificate provided.
The enclosure will have protection degree IP-54 as per IEC.
6.6

PLUG IN BOXES
These are required for Rising Mains. Plug in boxes will be of draw out
type. Contacts will be of silver plated copper and spring loaded. Earth
connection will be the first to make and last to break during insertion and
withdrawal. Plug in box will be made from 1.6mm CRCA sheet steel
powder coated or GI. Inside the plug in boxes MCCB or SFU with fuses
will be located as per requirements. The operating handle will be
interlocked with plug in box cover so that MCCB can be operated only with
suitable cover in closed position. If required the plug in box will be
interlocked with bus bar trunking so that it could be inserted or removed
with the plug in box lid opened. MCCB/SFU will be of 4 pole type unless
otherwise specified in BOQ. Short circuit breaking capacity of MCCB in
PIB should preferably be same as short circuit withstand for one second of
bus bar trunking.

6.7

END FEED UNIT

The End feed unit will be manufactured from 1.6mm thick sheet steel with
powder coating to shade RAL 7032 or of GI. Inside the End feed unit
MCCB of required rating and specifications or SF unit with HRC fuses will
be located. End feed units at top will be connected to Bus bars of Rising
Mains through solid connections. Terminals at the bottom will be provided
to accept cable connections as required. The operating handle of MCCB /
SFU will be interlocked so that the door can be opened only when MCCB
or SRU are in off position. The current rating of MCCB should correspond
with current rating of bus bar trunking and short circuit breaking capacity
with one second short circuit withstand of bus bar trunking .
Vol. II / 263

Sen & Lall

6.8

Spec/Tender doc.

BRACKETS
Mounting Brackets, which can be shifted anywhere on Bus Bar Trunking
should be provided to fix bus bar trunking on to assembly grouted in will
where these brackets rest.

6.9

EARTH STRIP
Earth strip of copper or aluminum are to be provided, one on each side all
along the Rising Mains of size dependent on short circuit withstand for one
second of Rising Mains specified as per derivation given below (IEC
60439/I). Earth strip should be firmly fixed to the body of Rising Main at
regular intervals.
SP = I2t / K
SP is cross sectional area in sqmm (total for both strips)

6.10

= Rms value of A.C. fault current in amperes.

= Operation time of operating / disconnecting device which may be

taken as one second.

= Factor depending on material of conductor. For aluminum it is 116

for copper it is 176.

SHORFT CIRCUIT WITHST AND

Bus bars offered should be tested for short circuit withstand specified.
Generally specified in KA RMS for one second.

6.11

Bus bar system should be designed for an ambient temperature of 40 deg.

C and temperature rise restricted to 45 deg. C max.

6.12

Other technical parameters to be met are:

6.13

Max operating voltage : 1000Volts.

Insulation voltage : 1000 Volts.

Expansion joints will be provided after length of 30 Mtrs. For aluminum

conductor Bus trunking and after 40 Mtrs. For copper conductor bus
trunking.
(2)

SANDWITCH INSULATED BUS- TRUNKING AND RISING MAINS

Vol. II / 264

Sen & Lall

6.14

Spec/Tender doc.

SUPPLY VOLTAGE
For 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 cycles AC supply, operation voltage 415/440 volts.

6.15

STANDARD FOR COMPLIANCE

IS : 8623/1993 I &II and IED 60439 / I & II.

6.16

CONSTRUTION
The enclosure will be made from 16 SWG GI/ CRCA sheet steel powder
coated to shade RAL 7032 (or such other shade). Bus bars would be in
Sandwitch construction and the conductors will be individually insulated
with 4 layers of insulation film. Inner layer will be of glass MICA and outer
layer of polyester material Class F. alternatively extrusion of Class F
material in form of epoxy insulation may be provided. No drilling of bus
bars is permitted. Aluminium conductors will be of 19501 grade and
copper conductor of 99.9% purity and ETP grade with radialised edges.
Length of section will be limited to max 3 Mtrs. Bus bars of one section will
be connected to bus bars of adjacent section by uniblock joint system
removable as separate sub-assembly, So that it can inserted or removed
with out disturbing the adjacent sections.
Installation: Normally manufacturers recommendations should be
followed.
For installation as Rising Mains / Vertical installation, at each floor, a set
consisting of two Spring Hangers will be provided for fixing it on channels
grouted in wall. At the start of run, Hangers without springs may be used
for rigid support. In addition Horizontal supports will be provided (2 Nos.
per floor) to hold bus bars in position. On Rising Mains, on front face of the
bus bar trunking tap off points will be provided for inserting plug in boxes.
Number of tap off points at each floor will be as per requirement given in
BOQ but minimum distance between tap off points may be kept around
500mm. Each Tap off opening will be closed by insulated shutters forming
part of BBT, when not occupied by Plug in Boxes. Neutral cross section
will be same as phase cross section.
Enclosure will be tested for protection degree IP 54.
Necessary Vertical / Horizontal bends / Tees will be provided as required
by layout.
Bus bars turnking will be rigidly fixed to the side walls or suspended from
ceiling by supports as per requirement detailed in the layout.
At the termination either on the transformer side or on generator end or on
Vol. II / 265

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

switchgear panel, busduct will be provided with flange ends, adopter Box
and copper flexible (preferably multispeed types) to connect Bus bars of
bus duct to busbars of switchgear panel or transformer terminals or
generator terminals.
All the components like Busbar ducting, Bends, hanger ends, Adopter
Boxes etc. will be made from CRCA or GI sheets. Two earth strips of
copper or aluminum of size as mentioned in IEC 60439, dependent on
short circuit withstand capacity required will be provided throughout the
length.
Expansion units are to be installed after every uninterrupted run of 50
Mtrs. For composite expansion of complete Bustrunking run.
6.17

6.21

TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR COMPLIANCE:

1.

Bus trunking will be designed to withstand short circuit current for one
second.

2.

Bus bar system should be designed for an ambient temperature of 40

deg. C and temperature rise restricted to 55 Deg. C max above
ambient on conductors above ambient. Temperature rise of the
enclosure 40 deg. C maximum. Temperature rise at terminals 70
Deg. C max.

3.

Maximum operating voltage = 1000 Volts. (600 Volts)

4.

Insulation voltage = 1000 Volts.

5.

Bus trunking will be suitably chosen to give permissible voltage drop.

6.

Rated impulse withstand voltage 12 KV at 1000 V (600 Volts)

PLUG IN BOXES
Plug in Boxes will be of draw out type. Contacts will be of silver plated
copper and spring loaded. Earth connection will be the first to make and
last to break during insertion and withdrawal. Plug in Box will be made
from 1.6mm CRCA sheet steel powder coated or GI. Inside the plug in
Boxes MCCB or SFU with fuses will be located as per requirements. The
operation handle will be interlocked with plug in Box cover so that MCCB
can be operated only with suitable cover in closed position. If required the
plug in Box will be interlocked with Bus bar trunking so that it can not be
inserted or removed with the plug in Box lid opened. MCCB / SFU will be
of 4 pole type unless otherwise specified in BOQ. Short circuit breaking
capacity of MCCB in PIB should preferably be same as short circuit
withstand for one second of Bus Bar Trunking.

Vol. II / 266

Sen & Lall

6.22

Spec/Tender doc.

LIST OF TEST TO BE CARRIED OUT

Type Tests : Copies of the following certificates should be submitted.

6.23

1.

Verification of Temperature Rise limits.

2.

Verification of dielectric properties.

3.

Verification of short circuit strength.

4.

Verification of degree of protection.

ROUTINE TESTS
1.

Verification of insulation. Resistance.

2.

Inspection of assembly, interlocks, locks etc.

3.

Check on wiring if provided.

4.

Dielectric test.

Note:- Refer Appendix VI for additional guide lines.

Vol. II / 267

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
7.1

SCOPE
This section covers the general requirements of the earthing system for
Sub-station installation. G.I. plate earthing with G.I. strip for sub-stations of
500 KVA capacity and copper plate earthing for sub-stations of higher
capacity shall preferably be used.

7.2

SYSTEMS
Earthing system shall comprise earth electrodes in accordance with
clause 8.2.1 of General specifications for Elect. Works (part I Internal )
2013. For every additional transformer 2 more separate and distinct earth
electrodes shall be provided for neutral earthing. The body earthing for
transformers, HV & MV panels shall be done to a common earth bus
connected to two separate and distinct earth electrodes.
Note: For a single transformer Sub-station, the total number of earth
electrodes shall be 4 (2 for neutral and 2 for connection to a common
earth bus for body earthing). For a two transformer sub- station total
number of earth electrodes shall be 6 (4 for neutral earthing, two each for
two transformers, and 2 for connection to a common earth bus for body
earthing )

7.3

ELECTRODES
The earth electrodes shall be as per CPWD General Specifications for
Electrical Works (Part I Internal ) 2013.

7.4

LOCATION OF EAFRTH ELECTRODES

Normally an earth electrode shall not be situated less than 1.5m from any
building. Care shall be taken that the excavation of earth electrode may
not affect the column footings or foundation of the building. In such cases
electrodes may be farther away from the building.
The location of the electrode earth will be a place where the soil has
reasonable chance of remaining moist. As far as possible, entrances,
pavements and road ways, are to be definitely avoided for locating the
earth electrode.

7.5

WATERING ARRANGEMENT
Method of watering arrangement shall comply with CPWD general
specifications.

Vol. II / 268

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

7.6

SIZE OF EARHT LEAD

The recommended sizes of copper earth bus lead in case of sub-stations
shall be accordance with clause 8.2.2 of general specifications for
electrical works (PartI Internal) 2013 amended upto date. The minimum
size of earth lead shall be 25 mm x 5 mm copper of equivalent GI strip.

7.7

INSTALLATION
All joints shall be riveted and sweated. Joints in the earth bar shall be
bolted and the joints faces tinned. Where the diameter of the bolt for
connecting earth bar to apparatus exceeds one quarter of the width of the
earth bar, the connection to the bolt shall be made with a wider piece of
flange of copper jointed to earth bar. These shall be tinned at the point of
connection to equipment and special care taken to ensure a permanent
low resistance contact to iron or steel. All steel bolts, nuts, washers etc.
shall be cadmium palated, main earth bars shall be spaced sufficiently on
the surface to which they are fixed such as walls or the side trenches to
allow for ease of connections. Copper earthing shall not be fixed by
ferrous fittings. The earthing shall suitably be protected from mechanical
injury by galvanized pipe wherever it passes through wall and floor. The
portion within ground shall be buried at least 60 cm deep. The earthing
lead shall be securely bolted and soldered to plate or pipe as the case
may be. In the case of plate earthing the lead shall be connected by
means of a cable socket with two bolts and nuts. All washers shall be of
the same materials as the plate or pipe. All iron bolts nuts and washers
shall be galvanized.

7.8

TESTING
After installation, the tests as specified in CPWD General Specifications
for Electrical work (Part I Internal ) 2013 shall be carried out and results
recorded.

Vol. II / 269

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 8
POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT
8.1

SCOPE
This section covers the specification for supply. Installation, testing and
commissioning of 433 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz capacitor banks and other
such devices.

8.2

REQUIREMENTS
Capacities of the capacitor banks/RLC panels shall be indicated in the
format vide Appendix II.

8.3

CONSTRUCTION

8.3.1

The capacitor bands shall generally conform to IS: 13341-1992, 133401993.

8.3.2

The capacitor units shall be indoor type, air cooled with low viscosity
impregnated paper dielectric hermitically sealed. The impregnation used
shall be non- inflammable, non- oxidizing, lower freezing point type
synthetic compound. Each individual cell shall be provided with pressure
sensitive disconnectors / devices.

8.3.3

Main connections from the active element shall be brought out through
porcelain bushing. Care shall be taken to solder the bushing to the cover
to ensure perfect hermetic sealing.

8.3.4

Capacitor units shall be provided with externally mounted discharge

resistors to reduce the residual voltage to less than 50 volts in one minute
of switching off.

8.3.5

Individual unit shall be provided with HRC fuses/ adequate capacity of

MCBs/MCCBs, contactors (capacitor duty) bus bars and terminal
chambers to make bank of required KVAR. Terminal chamber shall be
suitable for bottom/top cable entry. Two earth terminals shall be provided
to each capacitor bank.

8.4

TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORK

All routine and type tests as per IS: 2834 relevant to capacitor banks as
amended upto date shall be carried out at manufacturers works and test
certificates shall be furnished to the department.

Vol. II / 270

Sen & Lall

8.5

Spec/Tender doc.

INSTALLATION
Capacitor banks shall be installed at least 30CM away from the walls on
suitable metal frame work of welded construction. The earth terminals
provided on the body of capacitor bank shall be bonded to the main
capacitor panel earth bus with 2 Nos. 8 SWG copper or 6 SWG GI earth
wires.

8.6

TESTS AT SITE
Insulation resistance with 500V DC Megger shall be carried out test
results recorded.

8.7

POVER CONDITIONER SAVERS

Recently RLC circuit operated power factor improvement panels (power
correction & saver system) are available in the market. These are more
suitable for installations with electronic equipments (computers, servers,
medical equipments, electronic ballasts etc.). Capacitor banks are prone
to introduce additional harmonics at such installations and therefore their
use should be restricted at such installations.
The equipments are called power conditioner savers. These are waveform
correction and power factor improvement devices using Rapid Instruction
Semi Conductor (RISC) micro controllers / capacitor duty contactor
switching.
These work on principle of using low loss continuously variable reactance
& adjustable phase wise capacitance to provide optimum impedance to
the circuit for transfer efficiently.
Technical Features:
1.

A micro controller & RISC processor.

2. Intelligent switching operation, fast response, high break relays

(imported).
3.

Polarity reversal indication.

4.

Phase wise dynamically reactive compensation.

5.

Operating power factor 0.6 0.99Lag.

These devices may save upto 30% energy &provide pure near true,
quality power.

Vol. II / 271

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

SECTION 9
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
9.1

SCOPE
This section covers the requirements of items to be provided in the substation for compliance with statutory regulations. Safety and operational
needs.

9.2

REQUIREMENTS
Safety provisions shall be generally in conformity with appendices (A) and
(C) of CPWD General Specifications of Electric Works (Par I Internal)
2013. In particular following items shall be provided:
(a)

Insulation mats
Insulation mats conforming to IS: 15652-2006 shall be provided in
front of main switch boards as well as other control equipments as
specified.

(b)

Firs Aid Charts and First Aid Box

Charts (one in English, one in Hindi, one in Regional language),
displaying methods of giving artificial respiration to a recipient of
electrical shock shall be prominently provided at appropriate place.
Standard first aid boxes containing materials as prescribed by St.
John Ambulance brigade or Indian Red Cross should be provided in
each sub-station.

(c)

Danger Plate
Danger Plates shall be provided on HV and MV equipments. MV
danger notice plate shall be 200 mm x 150 mm made of mild steel at
least 2mm thick vitreous enameled white on both sides and with the
descriptions in signal red colour on front side as required. Notice
plates of other suitable materials such as stainless steel, brass or
such other permanent nature material shall also be accepted with the
description engraved is signal red colour.

(d)

Fire Extinguishers
Portable Co2 conforming to IS: 2878-1976/ chemical conforming to
IS:2171-1976 extinguishers, HCFC Blend A (P-IV) shall be installed
in the sub-station at suitable places. Other extinguishers
recommended for electric fires may also be used.

(e)

Fire Buckets
Fire buckets conforming to IS: 2546-1974 shall be installed with the
suitable stand for storage of water and sand.
Vol. II / 272

Sen & Lall

(f)

Spec/Tender doc.
Tool Box
A Standard tool box containing necessary tools required for operation
and maintenance shall be provided in the sub-station.

(g)

Caution Board
Necessary number of caution boards such as Man on Line Dont
Switch on etc. shall be available in the sub-station.

(h)

Key Board
A keyboard of required size shall be provided at a proper place
containing castle keys, and all other keys of sub-station and allied
areas.

Vol. II / 273

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
SEFCTION 10
UNITISED / COMPACT SUB-STATION

10.1

SCOPE
These sub-stations shall be used for locations covering long distances &
wide areas where standby transformers are not installed. There use shall
normally be restricted to 250KVA. They shall be preferred where ring main
High voltage distribution is planned in open space.

10.2

Compact Sub-station shall consist of 11KV SF6 Insulated compact

switchgear with VCB as protection to Transformer, Transformer and
L.T. Switchgear with all connection accessories, fitting & auxiliary
equipment in a pre- fabricated enclosure to supply Low-voltage energy
from high-voltage system as detailed in this specification. The complete
unit shall be installed on a substation plinth (base) as Outdoor
substation 11KV Load Break Cable Switches control incomingoutgoing
feeder cables of the 11KV ring/ radial distribution system. The Vacuum
Circuit Breaker shall be used to control and isolate the Distribution
transformer. The transformers L.T. side shall be connected to L.T.
Switchgear. The connection cables to consumer shall be taken out from
the L.T. switchgear (s).
The pre fabricated compact substation shall be designed for
(a)

Compactness,

(b)

Fast installation,

(c)

Maintenance free operation,

(d)

Safety for worker/ operator & public.

10.3
10.3.1.

OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE:
The enclosure shall be made of Galvanized Sheet Steel or such other
material tropicalised to meet Indian weather condition.

10.3.2

The base of the enclosure shall ensure rigidity for easy transport &
installation.

10.3.3

The structure of the substation shall be capable of supporting the gross

weight of all the equipment & the roof of the substation compartment shall
be designed to support adequate loads.

10.3.4

There shall be proper / adequate ventilation inside the enclosure so that

hot air inside enclosure is directed out by help of duct. Louvers apertures
shall be provided so that there is circulation of natural air inside the
enclosure.
Vol. II / 274

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

10.3.5

The complete design shall be modular in design i.e. small sheets shall be
joined together to make a big sheet. This helps in avoiding skewing,
bending, bending of the single sheets on doors and sides due to its own
load under service. The doors shall be provided with proper interlocking
arrangement for safety of operator.

10.3.6

Public Nuisance Protection

There shall be no bolting arrangement on the doors and sides (periphery)
so that there is no access of water, dust inside. This also ensures that unit
is well protected from outside from public nuisance owing to its being
located in a crowded and compact places. Hinges and locks on the door
shall be so designed that they are either not accessible to public from
outside or can not be tampered with.

10.3.7

Interconnection
The connection of HT switchgear to Transformer shall be with the help of
suitable size of cables from Transformer to LT switchgear with the help of
suitable size of Copper/ Aluminum bus bars. The interconnection inside to
unit shall be the responsibility of the supplier.

10.3.8

Internal Fault
Failure within the unitized substation due either either to a defect, an
exceptional service condition or mal operation may initiate an internal
arc. Such event may lead to the risk of injury, if persons are present. It is
desirable that the unit shall be tested for Internal Arc fault test as per latest
IEC 61330.

10.3.9

Covers & Door

Covers & doors are part of the enclosure. When they are closed, they
shall provide the degree of protection specified for the enclosure.
Additional wire mesh may be used with proper Danger board for safety of
the operator. All covers, doors or roof shall be provided with locking facility
or it shall not be possible to open or remove them before doors used for
normal operation have been opened. The doors shall open outward at an
angle of at least 90 & be equipped with a device able to maintain them in
an open position. The top cover shall be slightly inclined so that there is no
accumulation of water during rainy season or otherwise. Proper
padlocking facility shall be provided for doors of each compartment.

Vol. II / 275

Sen & Lall

10.3.10

Spec/Tender doc.

Earthing:
All metallic components shall be earthed to a common earthing point. It
shall be terminated by an adequate terminal intended for connection to the
earth system of the installation, by way of flexible jumpers/strips & Lug
arrangement. The continuity of the earth system shall be ensured taking
into account the thermal & mechanical stresses caused by the current it
may have to carry. The components to be connected to the earth system
shall include:

10.3.11

(a)

The enclosure of substation,

(b)

The enclosure of High voltage switchgear & control gear from the
terminal provided for the purpose,

(c)

The metal screen & the high Voltage cable earth conductor,

(d)

The transformer tank or metal frame of transformer,

(e)

The frame &/ or enclosure of low voltage switchgear,

Internal Illumination
There shall be arrangement for internal lighting activated by associated
switch oan doors for HV, Transformer & LV compartments separately.

10.3.12

Labels
Labels for warning, manufacturers operating instructions etc. & those
according to local standards & regulations shall be pasted/ provided inside
and shall be durable & clearly legible.

10.3.13

Painting and Fabrication process

(a) The paints shall be carefully selected to withstand tropical heat &
rain. The paint shall not scale off or crinkle or be removed by
abrasion due to normal handling. For this purpose poly- urethane (or
such other suitable) paint shall be used.
(b)

Special care shall be taken by the manufacturer to ensure against

rusting of nuts, bolts and fittings during operation. All bushings and
current carrying parts shall be cleaned properly after final painting.

(c)

The fabrication process shall ensure that there are no sharp edges
on the GI sheets used. For modular structure the two smaller units
shall be joined together by Clinching Technology so that is on
piercing to the material being joined. This type of joint shall ensure
robust mechanical strength to the complete structure so made.
Vol. II / 276

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

10.4

11KV SWITCHGEAR (Gas insulated Compact Switchgear)

10.4.1

Extensible SF6 Insulated Compact Switchgear as required shall consist of

following items:

10.4.2

Load Break Cable Switch

Load Break Cable Switch with integral earth switch both having full making
capcity shall be used for Incoming and Outgoing cables if used in a ring.
Suitable arc proof tested cable covers shall be provided for each cable
switch. the cable covers accessible from front shall be mechanically
interlocked to its corresponding earth switch shall be mechanically
interlocked to its corresponding cable switch for safety of the operator.

10.4.3

Vacuum Circuit Breaker

Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall be used for distribution network of HT
switchgear. Vacuum Circuit Breaker complete with operating mechanism,
self powered microprocessor based protection relay with associated
Current Transformers shall be used for control and protection of
Transformer. The VCB being fixed type shall be provided with an Isolator
in series for isolation purpose for maintenance. An integral cable earthing
switch with full making capacity shall be provided. The arc proof cable
covers accessible from front shall be mechanically interlocked to the
earthing switch, which in turn shall be interlocked to the isolator for safety
to the operator.

10.4.4

The above Load Break Cable Switches, vacuum circuit breakers, Bus bars
should be mounted inside a robotically welded sealed for life, stainless
steel tank of 3 mm thick sheet metal. The operating mechanism of the
switches and breakers shall be outside the SF6 tank and accessible from
front. The tank should be filled with SF6 gas at adequate pressure. The
degree of protection for gas tank should be IP67. There shall be provision
for filling the SF6 gas at site. Moreover the Stainless Steel Gas Tank shall
confirm to the sealed pressure system as per IEC and ensure the gas
leakage upto 0.1% per year as per IEC.

10.4.5

The VCB is required to control distribution Transformer and relay settings

and Current Transformers shall be selected accordingly.

10.4.6

General Finish
Totally enclosed, metal enclosed, vermin and dust proof suitable for
tropical climate use as detailed in the specification.

Vol. II / 277

Sen & Lall

10.4.7

Spec/Tender doc.

Ratings
The bus bars shall have continuous rating of 630 Amps. The isolator shall
have a continuous rating of 630 Amps. VCB breaker shall have a
continuous rating of 200 Amps in accordance with relevant IS/ IEC
standard.

10.4.8

Breaking &Making Capacity

The Load Break Cable Switches shall be capable for breaking rated full
load current. The same along with its earthing switch shall also be suitable
for full making capacity of the system as specified. The complete
switchgear shall be suitable for breaking capacity of 21 KA symmetrical at
11000 volts three phase.

10.4.9

Busbar:
Switchgear shall be complete with all connection bus-bars etc. Copper bus
bars continuous ration shall be 630 Amps. The bus bars should be fully
encapsulated by SF6 gas inside the steel tank.

10.4.10

Protection
The Circuit Breaker shall be fitted with microprocessor based self powered
relay inside the front cover to avoid any tampering. The same shall be
used in conjunction with suitable Current Transformer and Tripping Coil for
fault tripping of the Circuit Breakers.

10.4.11

Cable Termination
Each Cable compartment shall be provided with three bushings of
adequate sizes to terminate the incoming and outgoing 11Kv 3 Core
cables. There shall be enough height (Minimum 450mm) from the base to
the mounted switchgear so that the cables can be bent and taken
vertically up to the bushings. The Cable termination shall be done by Heat
shrinkable Termination method so that adequate clearances shall be
maintained between phases for Termination. Access to all the cables
should be possible form the front of panel. Cable Termination boots shall
be supplied by the switchgear manufacturer.

104.12

Locking Arrangement : Suitable padlocking arrangements shall be

provided as stated below:
(a)

CB manual operating handle in the OFF position.

(b) Each feeder Panel operation handles in Closed Open or Earth

position.
(c)

Each isolator operating handle in Closed, Open, or Earth position.

Vol. II / 278

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Ratings:
Extensible radial compact switchgear with
VCB
Switchgear Data
(a)

Service

Outdoor but inside Enclosure

(b)

Type

Metal Enclosed

(c)

Number of phases

(d)

Voltage

1l000V

(e)

Rated Frequency

50 Hz

(f)

Rated Current

630 Amp (isolator)

(g)

Short Circuit rating

(1) Breaking

21 KA rms for Breaker

(2) Short time withstand for 3 21 Kamps

Sec.
(3) Rated Sic making

52.5 KA peak for Breaker

(h)

Short duration power freq.

28 Kv

(i)

Insulation Level

75 Kv peak

(j)

System earthing

Solidly earthed at substation

Breaker

For load

(a)

Type

VCB in SF6 tank

(b)

Rated voltage

11 Kv

(c)

Breaking current
(1) Load breaking

21 KA rms.

(d)

Making current

52.5 KA peak

(e)

Rated current

630 Amps.

(f)

No. of poles

(g)

Operating mechanism

Trip free & free handle type with mechanically

operated indication & pad locking.

Isolators

Loop-in & Loop out.

(a)

Type

Load breaking and fault making in SF6 tank

(b)

Rated current

630 Amps.

(c)

Rated breaking capacity

630 Amps.

(d)

Fault making capacity

52.5 KA peak

(e)

No. of poles

(f)

Operating mechanism

Operating handle with ON, OFF, Earth

positions with arrangement for padlocking in
each position.

Bus bars:
(a)

Material

Copper

(b)

Type

SF6 insulated

(c)

Rated Current

630 Amps

Vol. II / 279

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
10.4.14

Testing

Each type of 11Kv Switchgear shall be completely assembled, wired,

adjusted and tested at the factory as per the relevant standards i.e. IS :
9920, IS:3427, IS: 13118, IEC : 265, IEC:298 during manufacturing and on
completion.
10.4.15

Routine Test
The tests shall include but not necessarily limited to the following.
(a)

Operation under simulated service condition to ensure accuracy of

wiring, correctness of control scheme and proper functioning of the
equipment.

(b)

All wiring and current carrying part shall be given appropriate High
Voltage test.

Vol. II / 280

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Appendix -I
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS

I.

ELECTRO TECHNICAL VOCABULARY:

(1)

Fundamental definition

(2)

Secondary cells and batteries (Superceding IS: 1885 (Part-VIII) 1986

IS: 1147-1957)

(3)

Electrical power system protection

IS: 1885 (Part-X) 1993

(4)

Electrical Measurement

IS: 1885 (Part-XI) 1966

(5)

Switchgear and control gear (First revision) IS: 1885 (Part-XVII) 1979

(6)

Overhead transmission and distribution of

electrical energy

(7)

Cables, conductor and accessories for Electrical

1993
supply (Superseding IS : 1591-1960)

(8)

Transformers (First revision)

II.

GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS USED IN ELECTRO TECHNOLOGY :

(1)

Guide for preparation of diagrams, charts & IS: 8270 (Part-I) 1976
tables for electro technology. Defenitions and
classification (Superceding IS: 2032 (Part-I) 1962

(2)

Item designation

IS: 8270 (Part-II) 1976

(3)

General requirements for diagrams

IS: 8270 (Part-III) 1977

(4)

Circuit diagrams

IS: 8270 (Part-IV) 1977

(5)

Inter connection diagrams and table

IS: 8270 (Part-V) 1976

III.

CONDUCTOR AND POWER CABLES :

(1)

PVC insulated cable for working voltages IS: 694/1990

upto and including 1100 volts (Second revision)
(Superceding IS: 3035 Part I 1965)

IS: 1885 (Part-I) 1961

Vol. II / 281

IS: 1885 (Part-XXX) 1971

IS: 1885 (Part-XXXII)

IS: 1885 (Part-XXXVIII) 1993

Sen & Lall

(2)

(3)

Spec/Tender doc.

(i)

PVC insulate (Heavy duty) working

IS:1554 (Part-I)/ 1988
dielectric cables for voltage upto & i/c.
1100 volts (Second revision)

(ii)

For working voltage from 3.3 KV upto IS: 1554 (Part II)/1988
and including 11KV

(i)

Recommended current ratings for cables:

Paper insulated lead sheathed cables.

IS:3961 (Part I) 1967

(ii)

PVC insulated and PVC sheathed heavy

duty cables.

IS: 3961 (Part II) 1967

(4)

Application guide for non linear resistor typeIS: 15086 (Part-5).

Surge arrester for alternating current system
(First revision)

(5)

Recommended short circuit ratings of high IS: 5819-1970

voltage PVC cable

(6)

Conductors for insulated electric cables and IS: 8130/1984

flexible cords.

(7)

Busbar trunking system (Air insulated &

IS: 8623 Part I & II/ 1993,
sand witch insulated type) IS: IEC 60439-Part I & II

IV.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CODE OF PRACTICES :

(1)

Installation and maintenance of transformers

(2)

Insulation oil in service, maintenance and

supervision code of practice for

IS: 1866/2000

(3)

Earthing

1S : 3043/1987

(4)

Guide for short circuit calculations

IS: 13234

(5)

Electrical wiring installation (system voltage IS: 732/1989

not exceeding 650 volts)

(6)

Paper insulated power cables (Upto and

including 33KV (first revision)

V.

SWITHC GEAR AND CONTROL GEAR :

(1)

Degree of protection provided by the

(enclosure for low voltage switchgear and
control gear)
Vol. II / 282

IS: 10028 (Part-II & III)

IS: 1255/1983

IS: 13947 (Part-I)

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

(2)

HRC cartridge fuse links upto 650 volts.

(3)

(i)

Circuit breaker AC requirements & tests

for voltages not exceeding 1000 Volts a.c
or 1200 volts d.c.

(ii)

General and definition. Section 2

Voltages above 1000 volt a.c.

(iii) Type tests & Routine test for voltage

above 1000 Volt a.c.

IS: 9224 (Part-II)

IS:13947 (Part -II)

IS: 13118-1991
IS: 13118-1991

(4)

Heavy duty air break switches and composite

units of air break switches & fuses for voltages
not exceeding 1000 volts.

IS: 4064

(5)

General requirements for switch gear, control

gear for voltage not exceeding 1000 volts.

IS: 13947 (Part-I)

(6)

(i)

Factory built assemblies of switch gearIS:1000 V AC or 8623/1993

and control gear for voltages upto &
including 1200 V DC.

(ii)

Particular requirements for bus bar

trunking system (Bus ways)

IS: 8623 (Part II)/1993

(7)

High Voltage alternating current circuit

breakers IEC : 60056

(8)

High Voltage Switches Part I : Switches forIS: 9920-2002

Rated Voltages Above I Kv and Less Than 52Kv

(9)

A.C Metal Enclosed Switchgear and ControlIS : 3427-1997

gear for Rated Voltages Above I Kv and UP
to and Including 52 Kv
Electrical Measuring Instruments and their IS: 1248
Accessories

(10)
VI.
(1)
(2)

IS: 13118-1991

TRANSFORMERS ANDF REACTORS :

Dry type power transformer
Power transformer

IS: 11171-1985

(i)

General

IS:2026 (Part-I) - 1977

(ii)

Temperature rise

IS: 2026 (Part-II)-1977

(iii) Insulation level and di-electric tests

Vol. II / 283

IS: 2026 (Part-III)/1981

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

(3)

Distribution transformers

IS: 1180/1989

(4)

Gas operated relays

IS: 3637/1966

(5)

Power transformers fittings and accessories IS: 3639/1966

(6)

Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers

(7)

(i)

Current transformers Part I to III

IS: 2705/1992

(ii)

Voltage transformers Part I to III

IS: 3156/1992

IS: 6600/1972

(8)

Outdoor type three- phase distribution transformers

VII.

CHEMECALS:

(1)

Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels

(Third revision)

(2)

Ready mixed paint brushing zinc chrome

priming (IInd revision)

(3)

Enamel, synthetic exterior (a) under coating IS: 2932/2003

(b) finishing (Ist revision)

VIII.

INSULATING LIQUIDS :

(1)

Specific resistance (resistively) or electrical IS: 6103/1971

insulating liquids, methods of tests for

(2)

Electric strength of insulating oils, methods IS: 6792/1992

for determination of

(3)

New insulation oils for transformers and

switchgears (2nd revision)

IS: 335/1993

(4)

Insulating Mats

IS: 15625/2006

IX.

SAFETY EQUIPMENTS:

(1)

CO2 based Fire Extinguisher

IS: 2878/1976

(2)

Chemical based Fire Extinguishers

IS: 2171/1976

(3)

HCFC Blend- A Extinguishing System

IS: 15505-2004

(4)

Insulating Mats

IS: 15625-2006
Vol. II / 284

IS: 2099/1986

IS: 5/1994

IS: 104/1979

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Appendix II

MODEL NIT
(FOR SUB STATION)
(Note: The NIT approving authority may make changes in the Model NIT
depending upon the contingency of work)

Vol. II / 285

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

NIT PART I
TECHNICAL CUM COMMERCIAL BID
(No prices to be quoted)

Vol. II / 286

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
INDEX

S.
No.
1.

Item

Page No.

Remarks

NIT CPWD 6

To be attached
approving authority

by

NIT

2.
3.

Press Notification
CPWD 7/8 Schedule along
with
upto
correction slips
Commercial
and
Additional Conditions
Table of Mile Stone (S)
Technical
Specifications,
certificate of deviations
Schedule of Work
Technical particulars
Acceptable makes
Schematic Diagram & LOP of Sub-station

To be attached
approving authority

by

NIT

to be attached by
approving authority.

NIT

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Certified that this NIT part I ( Technical cum- Commercial Bid) contain
topages
Note : Commercial and additional conditions shall be amended as per latest
provisions of e-tendering

Vol. II / 287

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
PRESS NOTIFICATION

To be Attached by NIT Approving Authority

As per CPWD Works Mannual

Vol. II / 288

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

COMMERCIAL AND ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS

1.0
1.1

GENERAL
This specification covers manufacture, testing as may be necessary
before dispatch, delivery at site, all preparatory work, assembly and
installation, commissioning putting into operation of sub-station
equipments consisting of HT panels, transformers, bus ducts, LT panels,
HT cabling etc. and final testing of sub-station equipments at
..

1.2

Location: The sub- station equipments will be installed in the newly

constructed
sub-station
building
in
the
.

1.3

The work shall be executed as per CPWD General Specifications for

Electrical Works Part-I, II & IV, as amended up to date, relevant I.E. Rules,
BIS/IEC and as per directions of Engineer-in charge. These additional
specifications/ conditions are to be read in conjunction with above and in
case of variations, specifications given in these additional conditions shall
apply. However, nothing extra shall be paid on account of these additional
specifications and conditions, as the same are to be read along with
schedule of quantities for the work.

1.4

The tendered should in his own interest visit the site and get familiarize
with the site conditions before tendering.

1.5

No T&P shall be issued by the Department and nothing extra shall be paid
on account of this.

2.0

COMMERCIAL CONDITIONS

2.1

Type of Contract : The work be awarded by this tender shall be treated

as indivisible works contact.

2.2

Submission and opening of Tenders:

2.2.1

The tender is in two parts:

2.2.2

(a)

Part-I Technical cum Un priced commercial Bid

(b)

Part-II Price bid

The tender shall be submitted duly completed in two separate sealed

envelopes as below:

Vol. II / 289

Sen & Lall

2.2.2.1

Spec/Tender doc.

Envelope A
This envelope shall be superscribed as Technical and Unpriced
commercial Bid on top and name of work. This envelope should
contain:

2.2.2.2

(i)

The terms and conditions and technical specifications of this tender

as purchased from CPWD including the schedule of work (with out
indication the price) and tender documents duly stamped and signed
on form CPWD-7/8 in token of acceptance of tender conditions
without making any changes.

(ii)

Make and model of all equipments offered along with technical

catalogues/ pamphlets showing complete specification of the
equipment.

Envelope B
he envelope shall be superscribed as Price Bid and name of work shall
contain he price did document exactly in the same format as the schedule
of quantities iven in the tender documents but with rates filled up both in
figures and words and he amounts in figures.

2.2.3

The tenderers are advised not to deviate from the technical

specifications/items, commercial terms and conditions of NIT like terms of
payment, guarantee, arbitration clause, escalation etc.

2.2.4

Envelope A containing technical cum unpriced commercial bid only

shall be opened on the due date and time in the presence of tenderers or
their authorized representatives who wish to remain present.

2.2.5

Scrutiny/ evaluation of the technical- cum commercial bid shall be done

by the department. In case it is found that the technical com-commercial
bid of a tenderer is not in line with NIT specifications/requirements and / or
contains too many deviations, the department reserves the right to reject
the technical bid of such firms (s) without making any reference to the
tenderer (s).

2.2.6

Necessary clarifications required by the department shall have to be

furnished by the tenderer within the time given by the department for the
same. The tenderer will have to depute his representative to discuss with
the officer(s) of the department as and when so desired. In case, in the
opinion of the department a tenderer is taking undue long time in
furnishing the desired clarifications. His bid will be rejected without making
any reference.
Vol. II / 290

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

2.2.7

After obtaining clarifications from all the tenderers, the department will
intimate the Tenderers whose technical cum commercial bids are
acceptable.

2.2.8

The price bids of only those tenderers shall be opened whose technical
bids are found to be technically acceptable. The time and date of
opening of price bid shall be fixed after the technical cum unpriced
commercial bid is accepted and intimated to them by post / Fax.

2.2.9

The department reserves the right to reject any or all the price bids and
call for fresh price bids / tenders as the case may be without assigning any
reason.

3.0

TERMS OF PAYMENTS
The following percentage of contract rates for the various items included in
the contract shall be payable against the stage of work shown herein.

3.1

85% after initial inspection and delivery at site in good condition on prorata basis.

3.2

10% after completion of installation in all respects.

3.3

Balance 5% will be paid after testing, commissioning & handing over to

the department for beneficial use.

3.4

SECURITY DEPOSIT
Security Deposit shall be deducted from each running bill and the final bill
to the extent of 10%of the gross amount payable subject to a maximum
amount of 5% of the tendered value. The earnest money deposited shall
be adjusted against this security deposit. The security deposit shall be
released on the expiry of guarantee period stipulated in the contract. Bank
guarantee will not be accepted as security deposit.

3.5

PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The successful tenderer shall submit an irrevocable performance
guarantee of 5% of the tendered amount in addition to other deposits
mentioned elsewhere in the contract for his proper performance of the
contract agreement within 15 days of issued of letter of acceptance of
tender. this guarantee shall be in the form of Demand darft/Pay order or
irrevocable bank guarantee bond of any scheduled bank or the State bank
of India in the specified format or in the form of Government security, fixed
deposit receipt pledged in favour of Executive Engineer or as specified in
the letter of acceptance of tender. The performance guarantee shall be
initially valid up to stipulated date of completion plus 60 day beyond. This
bank guarantee shall be kept valid till the recording of completion
certificate for the work by the competent authority.
Vol. II / 291

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

3.6

Income Tax, Vat, work contract tax, labour cess & Other statutory
deduction etc. shall be made at source as per the prevalent laws. The
deductions of security deposit, income- Tax, works contract Tax etc. shall
be done after calculation of the above due payments as per clauses 3.1 to
3.3 and net payment shall be reduced accordingly.

4.0

Rates

4.1

The rates quoted by the tendered, shall be firm and inclusive of all taxes
(including works contract tax, VAT, labour cess & service tax), duties
levies, octroi etc. and all charges for packing, forwarding, insurance,
freight and delivery, installation, testing, commissioning etc. at site
including temporary construction of storage, risks, over head charges,
general liabilities /obligations and clearance from CEA, However, the fee
for the CEA inspections shall be borne by the department.

4.2

The department will not issue Octroi exemption certificate.

4.3

The contractor has to carry out maintenance as per manufacturers

standards for a period of 12 months from the date of handing over.
Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

5.0

Completeness of Tender
All sundry equipment, fittings, unit assemblies, accessories, hardware
items, foundation bolts, termination lugs for electrical connections, and all
other items which are useful and necessary for efficient assembly and
installation of equipment and components of the work shall be deemed to
have been included in the tender irrespective of the fact whether such
items are specifically mentioned in the tender documents or not.

6.0

Storage and Custody of Materials

The transformer rooms & HT panel rooms, if available, may be used for
storage of sundry materials and erection equipments or else the agency
has to make his own arrangements. No separate storage accommodation
shall be provided by the department. Watch and ward of the stores and
their safe custody shall be the responsibility of the contractor till the final
taking over of the installation by the department.

7.0

Care of The Building :

Care shall be taken by the contractor while handling and installing the
various equipments and components of the work to avoid damage to the
building. He shall be responsible for repairing all damages and restoring
the same to their original finish at hit cost. He shall also remove at his cost
all unwanted and waste materials arising out of the installation from the
site of work.
Vol. II / 292

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

8.0

Completion Period
The completion period indicated in the tender documents is for the entire
work of planning, designing, approval of drawings etc., arrangement of
materials & equipments, delivery at site including transportation,
installation, testing, commissioning and handing over of the entire system
to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

9.0
9.1

Guarantee
All equipments shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months, from the
date of taking over the installation by the department, against
unsatisfactory performance and/or break down due to defective design,
workmanship or material. The equipments or components, or any part
thereof, so found defective during guarantee period shall be forthwith
repaired or replaced free of cost, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-inCharge. In case it is felt by the department that undue delay is being
caused by the contractor in doing this, the same will be got done by the
department at the risk and cost of the contractor. The decision of the
Engineer-in-charge in this regards shall be final & binding on the
contractor.

9.2

The tender shall guarantee among other things, the following :

10.0

(a)

Quality, strength and performance of the materials used as per

manufacturers standards.

(b)

Safe mechanical and electrical stress on all parts under all specified
conditions of operation.

(c)

Satisfactory operation during the maintenance period.

Power Supply :
A temporary three phase power supply of 15KW shall be provided during
expectation of work, at single point inside the campus. Further
arrangements for tapping power connection from this point shall be made
by the contractor. Electricity shall be provided free of coast.

11.0

Water Supply :
Water supply shall be made available by the department at one point in
Campus free of coast.

12.0

Acceptable makes of Various Equipments :

The Acceptable makes of various equipments/ components/accessories
have been indicated in Acceptable Makes at page No
The tenderer shall work out the cost of the offer on this basis. Alternate
makes are not acceptable.
Vol. II / 293

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

13.0
13.1

Data Manual and Drawings to be furnished by the Tender :

With Tender : The tenderer shall furnish alongwith the tender, detailed
technical literature, pamphlets and performance data for appraisal and
evaluation of the offer.

13.2

After award of work

The successful tendere would be required to submit the following
drawings within 15 days of award of work for approval before
commencement of installation.
(a)

General arrangement drawing of the equipments like HT panels

transformers, bus duct, LT panel etc. in the sub-station building, with
complete dimensions for LT Panel & Bus Duct. The tenderer shall
also give dimensions, details of LT Panels and Bus Duct got tested at
CPRI successfully for fault withstand capacity of 31 MVA for 1 Sec.

(b)

Details of foundations for the equipments and the weigthts of

assembled equipments.

(c)

Cable/bus duct layout between HT panel boards, transformers & LT

panel etc.

(d)

Any other drawings necessary for the job.

14.0

The successful tenderer should furnish well in advance three copies of

detailed instructions and manuals of manufacturers for all items of
equipments regarding installation, adjustments operation and
maintenance including preventive maintenance & trouble shooting
together with all relevant data sheets, spare parts catalogue etc. all in
triplicate.

15.0
15.1

Extent of Work
The work shall comprise of entire labour including supervision and all
materials necessary to make a complete installation and such tests and
adjustments and commissioning, as may be required by the department.
The term complete installation shall not only mean major items of the plant
and equipments covered by the specifications but all incidental sundry
components necessary for complete execution and satisfactory
performance of installation with all layout charts whether or not those have
been mentioned in details in the tender document in connection with this
contract as this is a turnkey job.

15.2

The overhead bus duct as per schedule is to connect.

Nos.. KVA transformers to main LT panel. Similarly HT cable is to
be laid inside the proposed sub-station in open duct between HT panel
board and___ Nos. transformers. The HT cable shall be brought at site
after taking correct measurements since no joint shall be permissible in
between HT panel & transformer.
Vol. II / 294

Sen & Lall

15.3

16.0

Spec/Tender doc.

In addition to supply, installation, testing and commissioning of sub station

equipments, following works shall be deemed to be included within the
scope of work to be executed by the tenderer as this is a trunkey job(a)

Minor building works necessary for installation of equipments,

foundation, making of opening in walls or in floors and restoring them
to their orginal condition / finish and necessary grouting etc. as
required.

(b)

All supports for over head bus ducts, cables and MS channels for
erection of panels & transformers etc. as are necessary.

(c)

Testing of PTs/ CTs for metering & protection purpose & relay
calibration & setting.

(d)

Getting CEA inspection done & obtaining approval for energizing the
installation. However, necessary fees for inspection shall be borne by
the Department.

Exclusion and work to be done by other agencies :

The following shall be excluded from the scope of the work :
(a)

Major dismantling of any existing building work.

(b)

Electricity supply in sub-station building.

17.0

Inspection and Testing

17.1

All major equipments i.e. HT panel, transformers, bus duct, LT panel etc.
shall be offered for initial inspection at manufacturers works. The
contractor will intimate the date of testing of equipments at the
manufacturers works before dispatch. The Successful tenderer shall give
advance notice of minimum two weeks regarding the dates proposed for
such tests to the departments representative to facilitate his presence
during testing. The Engineer-in-charge may witness such testing. The cost
of the Engineers visit to the factory will be borne by the department.
Equipments will be inspected at the manufacturer/Authorised dealers
premises, before dispatch to the site by the contractor if so desired by the
Engineer-in-charge.

17.2

Copies of all documents of routine and type test certificates of the

equipment, carried out at the manufacturers premises shall be furnished to
the Engineer-in-charge and consignee.

17.3

After completion of the work in all respects the contractor shall offer the
installation for testing and operation.
Vol. II / 295

Sen & Lall

18.0

Spec/Tender doc.

Validity
Tenders shall be valid for acceptance for a period of .........days from the
date of opening.

19.0

COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS AND INDIAN STANDARDS.

19.1

All works shall be carried out in accordance with relevant regulation, both
statutory and those specified by the Indian Standards related to the works
covered by this specification. In particular, the equipment and installation
will comply with the following:
(i)

Factories Act.

(ii)

Indian Electricity Rules.

(iii) B.I.S. & other standards as applicable.

(iv) Workmens compensation Act.
(v) Statutory norms prescribed by local bodies like CEA, Power Supply
Co., etc.
19.2

After completion of the installation, the same shall be offered for

inspection by the representatives of the Central Electricity Authority. The
contractor will extend all help including test facilities to the representatives
of CEA. The observations of CEA will be attended by the contractor. The
installation will be commissioned only after getting clearance from CEA.

19.3

Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the successful

tendered of his responsibility for the design, manufacture and installation
of the equipment with all accessories in accordance with currently
applicable statutory regulations and safety codes.

19.4

Successful tenderer shall arrange for compliance with statutory provisions

of safety regulations and departmental requirements of safety codes in
respect of labour employed on the work by the tenderer. Failure to provide
such safety requirement would make the tender liable for penalty of Rs.
../- for each default. In addition, the department will be at liberty
to make arrangement for the safety requirements at the cost of tenderer
and recover the cost thereof from him.

Vol. II / 296

Sen & Lall

20.0

Spec/Tender doc.

Indemnity :
The Successful tenderer shall at all times indemnify the department,
consequent on this works contract. The successful tenderer shall be liable,
in accordance with the Indian Law and Regulations for any accident
occurring due to any cause and the contractor shall be responsible for any
accident or damage incurred or claims arising there from during the period
of erection, construction and putting into operation the equipments and
ancillary equipments under the supervision of the successful tenderer in
so far as the latter in responsible. The Successful tenderer shall also
provide all insurance including third party insurance as may be necessary
to cover the risk. No extra payment would be made to the successful
tenderer on account of the above.

21.0

Erection Tools :
No tools and tackles either for unloading or for shifting the equipments for
erection purposes would be made available by the department. The
successful tenderer shall make his own arrangement for all these facilities.

22.0

Cooperation with other Agencies :

The Successful tenderer shall co-ordinate with other contractors and
agencies engaged in the construction of buildings, if any, and exchange
freely all technical information so as to make the execution of this
work/contract smooth. No remuneration should be claimed from the
department for such technical cooperation. If any unreasonable hindrance
is caused to other agencies and any completed portion of the work has to
be dismantled and re-done for want of cooperation and coordination by
the tenderer during the course of work, such expenditure incurred will be
recovered from the successful tenderer if the restoration work to the
original condition or specification of the dismantled portion of the work was
not undertaken by the tenderer himself.

23.0

The work will be carried out with least disturbance during shifting & shut
down taken in consultation with the client department.

24.0

Mobilization Advance :
No mobilization advance shall be paid for this work.

25.0

Insurance and Storage :

All consignments are to be duly isured upto the destination from
warehouse at the cost of the contractor. The insurance covers shall be
valid till the equipment is handed over duly installed, tested and
commissioned.
Vol. II / 297

Sen & Lall

26.0

Spec/Tender doc.

Verification of Correctness of Equipment at destination :

The contractor shall have to produce all the relevant records to certify that
the genuine equipments from the manufacturers has been supplied and
erected.

27.0

Painting :
This shall include cost of painting of the entire installation. The major
equipments like HT panel, transformers, LT panel, bus duct, cable trays
etc. shall be factory final finish painted. The agency shall be required to do
only touching to the damages caused to the painting during transportation,
handling & installation at site, if there is no major damage to the painting.
However hangers, supports etc. of bus trunking & cable tray etc. shall be
painted with required shade including painting with two coats of
anticorrosive primer paint at site.

28.0

Training
The scope of works includes the on job technical training of two persons of
department at site. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

29.0

Maintenance :

29.1

Sufficient trained and experienced staff shall be made available to meet

any exigency of work during the guarantee period of one year from the
handing over of the installation.

29.2

The maintenance, routine as well as preventive, for one year from the date
of taking over the installation as per manufacturers recommendation shall
be carried out on quarterly basis.

30.0

Interpreting Specifications :
In interpreting the specifications, the following order of decreasing
importance shall be followed in case of contradictions :
(a)

Schedule of quantities

(b)

Technical specifications

(c)

Drawing (if any)

(d)

General specifications

(e) Relevant BIS or other international code in case BIS code is not
available.
Vol. II / 298

Sen & Lall

31.0

Spec/Tender doc.

Pre-BID Conference
It is proposed to hold a pre-bid conference with the prospective tenderers
to enable them to seek clarification on the technical specification and in
tender documents that they may consider necessary for submission of
tenders (technical bid & price bid). All clarifications sought for will be
finalized during the pre-bid conference and confirmatory minutes for the
pre-bid conference will be circulated among all tenderers who have been
issued the tender documents irrespective of the fact they have attended
the pre bid conference or not. The date and time of pre-bid conference will
be informed to the tenderers at the time of issue of the tenders. It is upto
the prospective tenderers to take part in the pre-bid conference. Non
attendance of prebid conference does not debar the prospective tenderer
from participating & submission of tender. No separate pre-bid conference
will be conducted for the firms who do not attend the pre-bid conference
on the date & time fixed for the purpose.

Vol. II / 299

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Technical Specificaiton
For
Electric Lifts

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
Technical Specification For
Electric Lifts (13 Passengers )

Lift well size :

Load Kgs
Speed mps
Travel mtrs
Stops & Openings
Power Supply
Control
Operation
Machine
Hoistway Available
Car Enclosure
Car Panels
Handrails on three sides
False Ceiling
Flooring
Car Entrance
Hoistway Entrances
Door Operation
Signals (Design)
Details

2.50 m x 1.80 m
( 13 Persons)
1.0
Basement, Ground Floor to 4 th Floor, 18.60 m
5 Stops, 5 Openings (All openings on the same side)
400 Volts 3 Phase 50 Hertz. Alternating Current
A.C. Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (with close loop)
Simplex Full Collective (with/without Attendant)
Geared placed directly above the hoistway
About 2500 mm wide x 1800 mm deep Finished Dimensions
IND-160
Stainless Steel
Stainless steel mirror finish
Stainless Steel
Vinyl Tiles
Protected by centre opening sliding steel door in Stainless
Steel, with vision glass panel
Protected by centre opening sliding steel doors in Stainless Steel
Automatic with ACVVVF Door Operator & Multi-Ray Electronic
Door Detector System
S-60
1. Combined luminous hall button with seven segment digital
hall position indicator at all floors
2. Car operating panel with luminous buttons, seven
segment digital car position indicator combined with direction
arrows, overload warning indicator
3. Battery Operated Alarm Bell & Emergency Light
4. Firemans switch at main lobby
5. Voice Synthesizer
6. Automatic Rescue Device
7. Fire rating
Stainless Steel in hairline
Rectangular

Face Plate Finish

Face Plate Shape
Term & Condition
1. Free Maintenance for 12 months from the date of installation & Final inspection.
Vol.II / 300

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

List of Approved Makes / Agencies

(Within Agreement items)
for
Civil Works

List of Approved Makes / Agencies

(Within Agreement items)
for Civil Works
The BCD/Consultants reserves the right to select any of the brands indicated in the
list of approved makes .
Sl.
No.

Materials

Brand Name

Sen & Lall

1..

Spec/Tender doc.

GREY CEMENT

ACC, Ambuja, ULTRA TECH,

LAFARGE, Birla Gold OR ANY
OTHER BRAND WITH
APPROVALOF ENGINEER
INCHARGE

2..

WHITE CEMENT

BIRLA, JK OR EQUIVELENT

3.

REINFORCEMENT/STRUCTURAL
STEEL

TATA TISCON, SAIL, SHYAM, RINL/

VIZAG

4.

PRESSED STEEL DOOR FRAMES

T.I . FRAMES, MADRAS; AGREW,

AHMADABAD, CHANDAN METAL
WORKS
BARODA, SHIRKE POLYNORM

5.

FLUSH DOORS

GREEN, DURO, CENTURY, KIT PLY

6.

PANELLED DOORS

JOINERY MFG. CO., KOLKATA,

DOORS INDIA, ALPLY AGENCIES,
KOLKATA, M/S ASCU HICKSON
LTD, M/S AMBIKA TIMBERS

7.

PLYWOOD / BLOCK BOARD

GREEN, CENTURY, DURO, KITPLY

Vol.II /301

Sl.
No.

Materials

Brand Name

8.

PRELAMINATED PARTICLE BOARD

GREEN, NOVAPAN, BISON

PANEL, MERINO, CENTURY

9.

LAMINATES

CENTURY, GREENLAM, MERINO,

Sen & Lall

10.

Spec/Tender doc.

DOOR FITTINGS

GODREJ, EVERITE,
DORSET,SIGMA

11.

LOCKS

EVERITE, GODREJ, HARRISON

12.

FLOAT GLASS

MODI GUARD, SAINT GOBAIN,

ASAHI, PILKINGTON

13.

STEEL WINDOW/VENTILATOR

METALMART, MULTIWIN,
MODERN FABRICATOR

14.

ANGLES, CHANNELS, GIRDERS

STANDARD, STANDARD WT.

ROLLED SECTION OF SAIL, TATA
VIZAG,

15.

ROLLING SHUTTERS
COLLAPSIBLE GATE

M/S HARDMAN, M/S BENGAL,

M/S MARSHAL

16.

CERAMIC/GLAZED TILES

SOMANY, KAJARIA, ASIAN,

JHONSON

17.

CEMENT CONCRETE FLOOR TILES

KAMPILYA, MODERN,UNISTONE

18.

VITRIFIED TILES

KAJARIA,SOMANY ,MARBONITE,
ASIAN, JHONSON

19.

TERRAZO TILES

PODDAR

20.

PAINT

JENSON & NICHOLSON, BERGER,

ASIAN PAINTS, ICI

21.

TEXTURE FINISH

SPECTRUM
Vol.II /302

Sl.
No.
22.

Materials
WATER PROOF CEMENT PAINT

Brand Name
SNOWCEM, BERGER, ASIAN
PAINTS, JONSONS & NIELSON

23.

OIL BOUND DISTEMPER/

PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT

BERGER, ICI, DULUX, ASIAN,

JENSON & NICHOLSON, I-Can Nano

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

24.

PRIMERS

BERGER, NEROLAC, DULUX,

ASIAN

25.

PLASTER OF PARIS

JK, BIRLA

26.

CEMENT BASED LIQUID

CICO, SIKA, PIDILITE, CHOKSEY

WATERPROOFING COMPOUND
27.

WATER PROOFING TREATMENT

M/S
TO ROOF & SUNKEN FLOOR
CO.,

1. M/S INDIA WATER PROOFING CO.,

OVERSEAS

WATER

PROOFING

2.
M/S
KOLKATA
WATER
PROOFING CORPORATION
3. M/S TECHNO CONSTRUCTION
& WATER PROOF
4. Fosroc chemicals(India) Pvt. Ltd.
28.

ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS

29.

UPVC DOORS, WINDOWS

DOMAL,GODREJ, ALUMILITE,
STANDARD ALUMINIUM,
BENGAL ROLLING SHUTTERS &
ENGG. WORKS.
REHAU, WINTECH, DUROPLAST,
FINISTA

Vol.II /303

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

List of Approved Makes / Agencies

(Within Agreement items)
for
Plumbing & Sanitary Works

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS

BCD/Consultants reserves the right to select any particular make from the list given
below to be used in the project work without any extra cost adjustment. Owners
decision will be binding on the contractor.
List of Internal & External Plumbing Approved makes
S.
Manufacturer Address /Approved
Material
IS No.
Brand Name
No.
Dealer
GMGR Sanitary & Allied Pvt. Ltd. ,
3371, Hauz Qazi, Delhi- 110006,
1.0 Sanitary ware
771
PARRYWARE
Contract Person: Mr. Mallav
Khandelwal, Ph: 011-23263380,
23264483

HINDWARE

2.0

CP Fittings

HSIL Limited III Floor, Unit no. 301 &

302, Park Centra, Sector-30, N.H.-8,
Gurgaon-122001, Contract Person: Ms.
Bhawana Srivastava, Ph: 9560103233,
0124-4779200

CERA

Cera Sanitaryware Limited

6, Satya Niketan, New Delhi-110021,
Contract Person: Mr. Kundan Kumar
Pandey, Ph: 9313724108, 01132013404, 26884232

RYBO

International Sales Corporation

H.O. E-46/12,Okhla Industrial area,
Phase-II
New Delhi-110020,
Contract Person: Mr. Askandh Kumar.
Ph: 9312878463, 01130884888/30884889-92

JAQUAR

Jaquar & Company Pvt. Ltd., Plot No.

306, Udyog Vihar, Gurgaon, Harayana122016, Contract Person: Mr. Ashish,
Ph: 0124-4746800 (60 Lines)

KINGSTON

Plastocraft Sanitary India Pvt. Ltd.

B-59, Mayapuri Industrial area, Phase-I
New Delhi-110064, Contract Person:
Mr. Prakash Gupta, Ph: 8750055975,
011-43594444,28115535

Vol.II /304

Sen & Lall

S.
No.

Material

4.0

Concealed
Cistern &
Concealed
Flush Valve
with Flush
Plate

5.0

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

Kitchen Sink

6.0

WC Pan
Connector

7.0

SCI Pipes,
Fitting & Trap

3989 /
1729

Brand Name

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer

SCHELL

SCHELL Gmbh & Co. KG

1003 Mercantile House 15 Kasturba
Gandhi Marg, New Delhi-110001,
Contract Person: Mr. Anindya Roy, Ph:
9953554435, 011-45652320-26

JAQUAR

Jaquar & Company Pvt. Ltd., Plot No.

306, Udyog Vihar, Gurgaon, Harayana122016, Contract Person: Mr. Ashish,
Ph: 0124-4746800 (60 Lines)

JAYNA

Jain Brothers Sanitation Pvt. Ltd. 12,

S.S.I. Industrial Area G.T. Karnal Road,
New Delhi -33, Contract Person: Mr.
Deepak Joshi, Ph: 9350513076, 01127693301/2/3

NEELKANTH

Neelkanth Sinks Pvt. Ltd. , B-57,

Mayapuri Industrial Area, Phase - I,
New Delhi -110064, Ph: 011-45096115

McAlpine

Products Unlimited F-14, Unit No 7,

1st floor, Kalkaji, New Delhi- 110019,
Contract Person: Mr. Yogesh Chawla,
Ph: 9312290968, 01141675560/41675570/41675580

BIS
SKF

NECO

Vol.II / 305

Bengal Iron Corporation , 2B,

Tarachand Dutta Street, Kolkata700073, Ph: 033 22353820
Singhal Iron foundry pvt. Ltd.
D 63 -64 Shri Radhapuram, Mathura
(U.P) Phone : 9837042988
Jayaswal NECO Industries Ltd. , F-8,
MIDC Industrial area Hingna Road ,
Nagpur- 440016, Contract Person: Mr.
Rajeev Chaturvedi, Ph: 9312669994,
07104-235002, 236251, 237276

Sen & Lall

S.
No.

8.0

Material

UPVC Pipes &

Fittings

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

Brand Name

13592
/ 4985

SFMC

RAKSHA

9.0

HDPE Pipe

FINOLEX

Finolex Industries Ltd. , 14th Floor, 'A'

Wing, Statesman House, 148,
Barakhamba Road, New Delhi
110001, Ph: 011- 23324748/23319744

JAIN

Jain Irrigation System Limited, Jain

House, D-75, Panchsheel Enclave, New
Delhi -110017, Contract Person: Mr. Anil
Upadhyay, Ph: 9971004355, 01126493159, 26493160

ORI-PLAST

Ori-Plast Ltd. , 9A, Wood Street,

Kolkata 700016, Contract Person: Mr.
Karsh V. Agarwal, Ph: 22839054-58,
40013832

JAIN

10.0 GI & MS Pipes

1239 /
3589

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer
Savoir-Faire Manufacturing Co. Pvt.
Ltd. 2161/T6, Lal Ratan building, West
Patel Nagar, Near Satyam Cinema,
New Delhi -110008, Contract Person:
Mr. Mahesh Agarwal, Ph: 9810008219,
011-30159600
Desana Poly Plastic Industries
Gitanjali Apartment C-306, 78, Vikas
Marg Exten. Near Kadkadduma Court,
New Delhi -92, , Contract Person: Mr.
Deepak Katyal, Ph: 9311588839

TATA

Vol.II / 306

Hindustan Pipe, H.O.-319, Syndicate

House, Inderlok, New Delhi -110035,
Contract Person: Mr. Nitin Gupta, Ph:
9810079112,9810042537, 01123659349, 23658087, 65909169

Sen & Lall

S.
Material
No.
11.0 CPVC Pipes

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

Brand Name

ASHIRWAAD

SFMC

12.0 Air Vent

13.0

GI Fittings
(Malleable)

14.0

Hot Water
Heater

Ashirvad Pipes Pvt. Ltd., 4-B, Attibele

Industrial Area, Hosur Road, Banglore 562107
Savoir-Faire Manufacturing Co. Pvt.
Ltd. 2161/T6, Lal Ratan building, West
Patel Nagar, Near Satyam Cinema,
New Delhi -110008, Contract Person:
Mr. Mahesh Agarwal, Ph: 9810008219,
011-30159600

RAKSHA

Desana Poly Plastic Industries

Gitanjali Apartment C-306, 78, Vikas
Marg Exten. Near Kadkadduma Court,
New Delhi -92, Contract Person: Mr.
Deepak Katyal, Ph: 9311588839

STUDOR

Products Unlimited F-14, Unit No 7,

1st floor, Kalkaji, New Delhi- 110019,
Contract Person: Mr. Yogesh Chawla,
Ph: 9312290968, 01141675560/41675570/41675580

DRP-M

1879

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer

DRP Malleables Pvt. Ltd., Alawalpur 144304, (Distt.) Jalandhar. Delhi

Office : 32, U.P. Block Pitam Pura, Delhi
-110088

UNIK

Unique Manufacturing Company,

Bulandpur Road,Tpt Nagar, Bye Pass,
Jalandhar-144004

RACOLD

Racold Thermo Limited, C-42, Okhla

Industrial Area, Phase-II, Delhi-110020

HAVELLS

15.0 Stop Cock

AO-SMITH

Om Sai Enterprisec, F-27, Lajpat

Nagar-II, New Delhi-110024, Contract
Person: Mr. Kunwarjit Singh, Ph:
9910166117, 011-29824366

SANT

Sant Valves Pvt. Ltd. G.T. Road, Bye

Pass, Jalandhar-144012, Contract
Person: Mr. Vishal Kakar, Ph:
9910156772, 011-23269840

Vol.II / 307

Sen & Lall

S.
No.

Material

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

Brand Name
KARTAR

Cast Iron
Valves above
16.0
65 Dia CI Sluice
Valve

780

SKS

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer
Juneja Metal Works, D-154, Fateh
Nagar, Jail Road, New Delhi 110018,
Contract Person: Mr. Aman Sethi, Ph:
8860146799, 011-45606986
Pipe Line Products, 3374, Hauz Qazi,
Delhi-110006, Contract Person: Mr.
Ashish Seth, Ph: 9891017454, 01143211999 (20 Lines)

NEC
SKF
KARTAR

Cast Iron
Butter Fly
17.0 Valves & Slim
Type (Wafer)
NRV

13095

Juneja Metal Works, D-154, Fateh

Nagar, Jail Road, New Delhi 110018, ,
Contract Person: Mr. Aman Sethi, Ph:
8860146799, 011-45606986

SANT

Sant Valves Pvt. Ltd. G.T. Road, Bye

Pass, Jalandhar-144012, Contract
Person: Mr. Vishal Kakar, Ph:
9910156772, 011-23269840

SKS

Pipe Line Products, 3374, Hauz Qazi,

Delhi-110006, Contract Person: Mr.
Ashish Seth, Ph: 9891017454, 01143211999 (20 Lines)

NECO

Ferrules,
Ballcocks,
18.0
Water Level
Fittings

KARTAR

Juneja Metal Works, D-154, Fateh

Nagar, Jail Road, New Delhi 110018,
Contract Person: Mr. Aman Sethi, Ph:
8860146799, 011-45606986

SANT

Sant Valves Pvt. Ltd. G.T. Road, Bye

Pass, Jalandhar-144012, Contract
Person: Mr. Vishal Kakar, Ph:
9910156772, 011-23269840

SANT

Sant Valves Pvt. Ltd. G.T. Road, Bye

Pass, Jalandhar-144012, Contract
Person: Mr. Vishal Kakar, Ph:
9910156772, 011-23269840

Vol.II / 308

Sen & Lall

S.
No.
19.0

Spec/Tender doc.

Material
Pressure Reducing
Valve (PRV)

Brand Name
TIEMME

SKS

KARTAR

QINN

20.0

Motorised
Valve

TIEMME

QINN

21.0

Hot Water
Insulation

THERMAFLEX

KAIFLEX
VIDOFLEX

22.0 PVC Tank

SHEETAL

USHA
Vol.II / 309

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer
Tiemme Raccordderie S.P.A. Itlaly
Opp:Acme Industrial Estate, Sewri
Bunder Rd. Sewri (East),Mumbai400015, Contract Person: Mr. Jitendra
Misra, Ph: 9810475768
Pipe Line Products, 3374, Hauz Qazi,
Delhi-110006, Contract Person: Mr.
Ashish Seth, Ph: 9891017454, 01143211999 (20 Lines)
Juneja Metal Works, D-154, Fateh
Nagar, Jail Road, New Delhi 110018,
Contract Person: Mr. Aman Sethi, Ph:
8860146799, 011-45606986
V.H. Shah & Bros., 3632, Chawri Bazar
Delhi -110006, Contract Person: Mr.
Vinit Sharma
Tiemme Raccordderie S.P.A. Itlaly
Opp:Acme Industrial Estate, Sewri
Bunder Rd. Sewri (East),Mumbai400015, Contract Person: Mr. Jitendra
Misra, Ph: 9810475768
V.H. Shah & Bros., 3632, Chawri Bazar
Delhi -110006
GMGR Sanitary & Allied Pvt. Ltd. ,
3371, Hauz Qazi, Delhi- 110006,
Contract Person: Mr. Mallav
Khandelwal, Ph: 011-23263380,
23264483
Kaiflex Insulation Systems, 102,Usha
Kiran Bld. Comml.Complex, Azadpur,
Delhi 110 033
Polybond Organics (P) Ltd. 4-5,4th
floor, Narang Chambers, 99/3, NR
Road, Bangalore 02
Sheetal Group of Companies NIMS,
3rd Floor, Netaji Subash Palace,
Pitampura, New Delhi-110034, Contract
Person: Mr. Davendra Shukla, Ph:
9312653250, 011-27351170/72

Sen & Lall

S.
No.

Material

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

Brand Name
SINTEX

Garden
23.0 Irrigation
Sprinklers

JAIN

PREMIER
Pipe Protection
Anti Corrosive
24.0
Tape /
Treatment

PYPCOTE

HIND
Stoneware
25.0 Pipes & Gully
Traps

PERFECT

ANAND
26.0

27.0

Stoneware Pipe
& Gully Traps

SFRC Manhole Covers

& Grating

DI Manhole
28.0 Covers &
Grating

PRAGATI

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer
Sintex Industries Ltd. A-38, Second
Floor, Mohan Co-operative Industrial
Estate Main Mathura Road, New Delhi110044
Jain Irrigation System Limited, Jain
House, D-75, Panchsheel Enclave, New
Delhi -110017
Premier Irrigation , C-4, Commercial
Cente, Safdarjung Dev. Area, New Delhi
-110016
IWL Ltd., 508, Jyoti Shikhar, 8 Distt.
Centre , Janak Puri, New Delhi -110058

Hind Protective Coating Ltd.

Pragati Concrete Udyog , A-1/B-6,
Local Shopping Centre, Janakpuri New
Delhi- 110058
Lal Chand Anand & Sons, 13/1,
Bulandshahr Rd. Industrial Area,
Ghaziabad -200001
Pragati Concrete Udyog , A-1/B-6,
Local Shopping Centre, Janakpuri New
Delhi- 110058

JSP

Jain Spun Pipe Co. , New Delhi

ANAND

Lal Chand Anand & Sons, 13/1,

Bulandshahr Rd. Industrial Area,
Ghaziabad -200001

KK

KK Manhole & Gratings Co. Pvt. Ltd.

12/16, Sarvapriya Vihar, New Delhi110016

CRESENT
FOUNDRY

Crescent Foundry Pvt. Ltd. , 406, 7/1

Lord Sinha Road Kolkata- 700071

Vol.II / 310

Sen & Lall

S.
No.

Material

Cast Iron, S/S

29.0 Pipes &
Fittings

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

Brand Name

1536

ELECTRO
STEEL

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer
Electro Steel Casting Ltd. , Calcutta

NECO
KESORAM
SKF
KALAHASTI
30.0

31.0

32.0

CI-LA / DI
Fitting

1538

Rain Water
Hopper Fitting

Galvanized Iron Pipe

Support (Clamp)

Water Treatment
Pumps / Booster
Pump / Sewage
33.0
& Drainage
Submersible
Pumps

Kesoram Spun Pipes & Foundries

Ltd. Calcutta
Kalahasti Castings Limited.

ELECTRO
STEEL

Electro Steel Casting Ltd. , Calcutta

KARTAR

Juneja Metal Works, D-154, Fateh

Nagar, Jail Road, New Delhi - 110018

NEER

Acutech Mfg Co. Pvt. Ltd

GMGR

GMGR Sanitary & Allied Pvt. Ltd. ,

3371, Hauz Qazi, Delhi- 110006,
Contract Person: Mr. Mallav
Khandelwal, Ph: 011-23263380,
23264483

NEER

Acutech Mfg Co. Pvt. Ltd

TOYOTO

WILO

DP

GRUNDFOS
Vol.II / 311

KGN International, 1742, Rodgran

Street, Lal Kuan (Near Chawri Bazar)
Delhi- 110006
Aqua Control Engineers
214, South Extn. Plaza-II, Masjid Modh,
South Extn., Part-II, New Delhi- 110049,
Contract Person: Mr. Bhagwan Singh,
Ph: 9310211147
GMGR Sanitary & Allied Pvt. Ltd. ,
3371, Hauz Qazi, Delhi- 110006,
Contract Person: Mr. Mallav
Khandelwal, Ph: 011-23263380,
23264483
Empire Tubewells (P.) Ltd.
663 (Basement), Street No 8,
Govindpuri Kalkaji, New Delhi- 110019

Sen & Lall

S.
No.

Material

34.0

Drain Channel
Grating

35.0

Solar Hot Water

Generator

Pressure Sand
Filter, Dual
Media Filter,
Activated
Carbon Filter
36.0
and Softner,
Suction Stainer
(Bucket Type),
Pressure
Vessel

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

Brand Name

FRP

SHRIRAM
GREEN TECH

WATCON

THARMAX
ION EXCHANGE

37.0 Chlorine Dozer

MILTON ROY
EWAKI

38.0 Air Blower

39.0 Solenoid Valve

PENTAIR
EVEREST
BETA
HONEY WELL
USA AVCON
Vol.II / 312

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer
Products Unlimited F-14, Unit No 7,
1st floor, Kalkaji, New Delhi- 110019,
Contract Person: Mr. Yogesh Chawla,
Ph: 9312290968, 01141675560/41675570/41675580
Shriram Green Tech, 5th Floor,
Akashdeep Building , 26A,Barakhamba
Road New Delhi- 110001, Contract
Person: Mr. Anil Azad, Ph: 9871032294,
011-23312267

Sen & Lall

S.
No.

Material

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

Brand Name

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer

ELEGANT
CONTROL
TECON
ADWANI
OERLIKON

40.0 Welding Rod

ESAB INDIA
VICTOR
41.0 Geo Textiles

MIRAFI (Z-TECH)
BAIDYANATH

42.0

Anchor
Fasteners

43.0

Air/Pressure
Relief Valve

HILTI
LEADER
SUKHAN
ARCO
CIM

44.0

Epoxy Paint /
Enamel Paint

BERGER (FIRST
QUALITY)
ICI

45.0 Water Meter

SAPPEL
ITRON
FORB MARSHAL
Vol.II / 313

S.
No.

Material

IS No.

Brand Name

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer

Sen & Lall

46.0

Knife Gate
Valve

46.0 FRP Filter

47.0

Liquid Level
Controllers

Spec/Tender doc.

JASH
ASHWATHI
(FLOES)
ASTRAL
IONEXCHANGE
ELEGANT
CONTROL /
TECON
End of Plumbing Approved makes

Vol.II / 314
List of Approved makes of materials for Fire Fighting works

Sen & Lall

S.No
.

Material

1.0

MS Pipes

2.0

a.) Forged Steel

Fittings
b.) Butt Welded
Fittings

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

Brand Name

1239 /
3589

TATA

DRP-M

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer

DRP Malleables Pvt. Ltd.

Alawalpur - 144304, (Distt.)
Jalandhar.
Deldi Office :
32, U.P. Block Pitam Pura, Delhi
-110088

VS FORGE
TRUE FORGE

3.0

Slim Seal Butterfly

Valve

SKS

KARTAR

SANT

4.0

CI Double Flanged
sluice valve & check
valves

780

SKS

Pipe Line Products, 3374, Hauz

Qazi, Delhi-110006, Contract
Person: Mr. Ashish Seth, Ph:
9891017454, 011-43211999 (20
Lines)
Juneja Metal Works, D-154,
Fateh Nagar, Jail Road, New Delhi
110018, Contract Person: Mr.
Aman Sethi, Ph: 8860146799, 01145606986
Sant Valves Pvt. Ltd. G.T. Road,
Bye Pass, Jalandhar-144012,
Contract Person: Mr. Vishal Kakar,
Ph: 9910156772, 011-23269840
Pipe Line Products, 3374, Hauz
Qazi, Delhi-110006, Contract
Person: Mr. Ashish Seth, Ph:
9891017454, 011-43211999 (20
Lines)

Vol.II / 315
S.No

Material

IS No.

Brand Name

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

.
KARTAR

4.0

5.0

Dual / Disk Type

Non Return Valves

Fire Hydrant Valves,

Branch Pipe & Fire
Man Axe

Dealer
Juneja Metal Works, D-154,
Fateh Nagar, Jail Road, New Delhi
110018, Contract Person: Mr.
Aman Sethi, Ph: 8860146799, 01145606986

SANT

Sant Valves Pvt. Ltd. G.T. Road,

Bye Pass, Jalandhar-144012,
Contract Person: Mr. Vishal Kakar,
Ph: 9910156772, 011-23269840

SKS

Pipe Line Products, 3374, Hauz

Qazi, Delhi-110006, Contract
Person: Mr. Ashish Seth, Ph:
9891017454, 011-43211999 (20
Lines)

KARTAR

Juneja Metal Works, D-154,

Fateh Nagar, Jail Road, New Delhi
110018, Contract Person: Mr.
Aman Sethi, Ph: 8860146799, 01145606986

SANT

Sant Valves Pvt. Ltd. G.T. Road,

Bye Pass, Jalandhar-144012,
Contract Person: Mr. Vishal Kakar,
Ph: 9910156772, 011-23269840

SAFE GUARD

Ashoka Engineering Company

(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot
No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial
Estate, New Delhi- 110034,
Contract Person: Mr. Rahul Gupta,
Ph: 9818272647

MINIMAX

Rapid Service Provider

95, Harlal market, Naparpur,
Sector-7, Rohni, New Delhi-110085

NEWAGE

Newage Fire Protection

Engineers (P.) Ltd., 12-F,25
Gopala Tower, Rajendra Palace,
New Delhi-110008

Vol. II /316

Sen & Lall

S.No
.

6.0

Material

First Aid Fire Hose

Reels

Spec/Tender doc.

IS No.

884

Brand Name

SAFE GUARD

MINIMAX

NEWAGE

7.0

8.0

CP / RRL Hose Pipe

Fire Brigade Inlet &

Withdrawl
Connection

8423

904

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer
Ashoka Engineering Company
(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot
No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial
Estate, New Delhi- 110034,
Contract Person: Mr. Rahul Gupta,
Ph: 9818272647
Rapid Service Provider
95, Harlal market, Naparpur,
Sector-7, Rohni, New Delhi-110085
Newage Fire Protection
Engineers (P.) Ltd., 12-F,25
Gopala Tower, Rajendra Palace,
New Delhi-110008

SAFE GUARD

Ashoka Engineering Company

(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot
No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial
Estate, New Delhi- 110034,
Contract Person: Mr. Rahul Gupta,
Ph: 9818272647

MINIMAX

Rapid Service Provider

95, Harlal market, Naparpur,
Sector-7, Rohni, New Delhi-110085

NEWAGE

Newage Fire Protection

Engineers (P.) Ltd., 12-F,25
Gopala Tower, Rajendra Palace,
New Delhi-110008

SAFE GUARD

Ashoka Engineering Company

(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot
No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial
Estate, New Delhi- 110034,
Contract Person: Mr. Rahul Gupta,
Ph: 9818272647

Vol. II /317
S.No
.

Material

IS No.

Brand Name

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

MINIMAX
NEWAGE

10.0

11.0

Rubber Hose Pipe

Hose Coupling
Branch

444

909

Rapid Service Provider

95, Harlal market, Naparpur,
Sector-7, Rohni, New Delhi-110085
Newage Fire Protection
Engineers (P.) Ltd., 12-F,25
Gopala Tower, Rajendra Palace,
New Delhi-110008

SAFE GUARD

Ashoka Engineering Company

(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot
No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial
Estate, New Delhi- 110034,
Contract Person: Mr. Rahul Gupta,
Ph: 9818272647

MINIMAX

Rapid Service Provider

95, Harlal market, Naparpur,
Sector-7, Rohni, New Delhi-110085

NEWAGE

Newage Fire Protection

Engineers (P.) Ltd., 12-F,25
Gopala Tower, Rajendra Palace,
New Delhi-110008

SAFE GUARD

Ashoka Engineering Company

(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot
No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial
Estate, New Delhi- 110034,
Contract Person: Mr. Rahul Gupta,
Ph: 9818272647

MINIMAX

Rapid Service Provider

95, Harlal market, Naparpur,
Sector-7, Rohni, New Delhi-110085

NEWAGE

Newage Fire Protection

Engineers (P.) Ltd., 12-F,25
Gopala Tower, Rajendra Palace,
New Delhi-110008

Vol.II / 318
S.No
.
12.0

Material
Fire Extinguisher

IS No.

Brand Name
SAFE GUARD

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer
Ashoka Engineering Company
(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

MINIMAX

13.0

Sprinkler Head

14.0

Sight Glass

15.0

Pressure Switches

TAC

No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial

Estate, New Delhi- 110034,
Contract Person: Mr. Rahul Gupta,
Ph: 9818272647
Rapid Service Provider
95, Harlal market, Naparpur,
Sector-7, Rohni, New Delhi-110085

VICTAULIC

Victaulic Piping Products India

Pvt. Ltd. Sagar Tech Plaza, A 202205, Andheri Kulra Road,
Sakinaka, Andheri (East), Mumbai
- 400072

SAFE GUARD

Ashoka Engineering Company

(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot
No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial
Estate, New Delhi- 110034,
Contract Person: Mr. Rahul Gupta,
Ph: 9818272647

VIKING

Rapid Service Provider

95, Harlal market, Naparpur,
Sector-7, Rohni, New Delhi-110085

SAFE GUARD

Ashoka Engineering Company

(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot
No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial
Estate, New Delhi- 110034,
Contract Person: Mr. Rahul Gupta,
Ph: 9818272647

INDFOSS SWITZER

Vol.II / 319
S.No
.

Material

15.0

Pressure Gauge

16.0

Battery

IS No.

Brand Name

3624
(CLI)

FIEBIG & H-GURU

EXIDE

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer

Sen & Lall

17.0

18.0

Fire Pumps

Motors

Spec/Tender doc.

1520

IS:325
/ TAC

MATHER+PLATT

Mather & Platt Pumps Ltd.

602, 604, 606, 608 Ansal Chamber
II, Bhikaji Cama Place, New Delhi 110066

GRUNDFOS

Grundfos Pumps India Pvt. Ltd.

B-1/D-5, Mohan Co-operative,
Industrial Estate, Mathura Road,
New Delhi - 110044

KIRLOSKAR

Kirloskar Brother Ltd.

Jeevan Tara Building, 5,
Parliament Street, New Delhi 110001

CROMPTON
GREAVES
SIEMENS

KIRLOSKAR

19.0

Electrical Switch
Gear

20.0

Cables

ABB

Kirloskar Brother Ltd.

Jeevan Tara Building, 5,
Parliament Street, New Delhi 110001
ABB Limited., 14, Mathura Road,
Faridabad, Haryana - 121003

HAVELLS
SKYTONE

21.0

Flow Meter

22.0

Suction Strainer

SAPPEL/ ITRON/
FORB MARSHAL
VAISHNOCLIMATIQUE
DASMESH
Vol.II / 320

S.No
.

Material

23.0

Vibration Eliminator
Connectors

IS No.

Brand Name
SURYA

KANWAL

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer
Surya Industries (Regd.), 32B,
Anand Industrial Estate, Mohan
Nagar, Ghaziabad 201007 (U.P.)

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
RESISTOFLEX

24.0

Single Phasing Preventor

SIEMENS

MINILEC
26.0

Flow Switch

POTTER
SYSTEM CENSOR
JOHNSON CONTROL

27.0

Diesel Engine

IS:1000
0

MAHINDRA

Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd.

2nd floor, 2-A, Mahindra Towers,
Bhikaji Cama Place, New Delhi 110066

KIRLOSKAR

Kirloskar Brother Ltd.

Jeevan Tara Building, 5,
Parliament Street, New Delhi 110001

ASHOK LEYLAND

28.0

Main Control
Panel

RS APPLICATION

CWS

RS Application Control Panels

Pvt. Ltd. 201-202, Suryadeep
Bldg., Second Floor, 37-Wazirpur
Commercial Centre, Ring Road,
New Delhi - 110052
CWS Electrotech Pvt. Ltd.
Nw-77, Vishnu Garden, Khyala
Industrial Area, New Delhi - 110018

Vol.II / 321
S.No
Material
.
29.0 Enarmel Paint

30.0

Annunciation
Panel

IS No.

Brand Name

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer

ASIAN
NEROLAC
2189

SAFE GUARD

Ashoka Engineering Company

(An ISO 9001 : 2008 Certified
Company)
Gali No.7, Plot
No. 7, Anand Parbat Industrial

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Estate, New Delhi- 110034

31.0

Alarm Valve

MINIMAX

Rapid Service Provider

95, Harlal market, Naparpur,
Sector-7, Rohni, New Delhi-110085

NEWAGE

Newage Fire Protection

Engineers (P.) Ltd., 12-F,25
Gopala Tower, Rajendra Palace,
New Delhi-11

MATTER & PLATT

Mather & Platt Pumps Ltd.

602, 604, 606, 608 Ansal Chamber
II, Bhikaji Cama Place, New Delhi 110066

TYCO/VIKING/HD

32.0

Tnimbles /
Ferrules Tinned
Copper

33.0

Cable Gland

DOWEL
COMMEX
POWER
GRIPWELL

34.0

Power Capacitor

CROMPTON
DUCATTI
L&T

Vol.II / 322
S.No
Material
.
35.0 Measuring Meter

36.0

MS Conduit

IS No.

Brand Name
L&T
SIEMENS
AKG
STEEL RAFT

Manufacturer Address /Approved

Dealer

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

BEC
37.0

Dash Fastener

HILTI
FISHER

38.0

Paint Primers

ASIAN
JONSON
NICHOLSON

39.0

Weld Electrodes

ADVANI
ESAB
VICTOR

40.0

Pressure
Reducing Valve
above 50 mm dia
for Fire Fighting
works

TYCO & VIKING

OCV CONTROL (USA)

41.0

Deluge
Valve/Alarm
Valve/Multiport
Valves/Window
Nozzles (K30)

42.0

Inspecting &
Testing Assembly

43.0

Gas Flooding
System

44.0

Supervisory
Switch

45.0

Pipe Hanger
(Clamp)

TYCO / VIKING / HD

GIACOMINI
(MODEL - A61 )
INERGEN (ANSUL
USA)
Vol.II / 323
ARGONITE OR FM 200
(DUPONT)
TYCO/VIKING

TOYOTO

KGN International
1742, Rodgran Street, Lal Kuan
(Near Chawri Bazar) Delhi- 110006

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

End of Fire Fighting Approved makes

Vol.II / 324

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

List of Approved Makes / Agencies

(Within Agreement items)

for
Internal / External Electrical Works

List of Approved Makes / Agencies

(Within Agreement items)
for
Internal / External Electrical Works
The BCD/Consultants reserves the right to select any of the brands indicated in the
list of approved makes.
1
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
- HPL

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
-L&T
- Havelles
- GE Power Control
- Scheider Electrical (Simpact)
- LegrandSSSS
- HPL
- Indotech
- Capital
- AE

Voltmeter & Ammeter

Selector Switch

Current Transformer

Indicating Lamp

PVC Insulated copper conductor - RR KABLE

single core stranded wires of - Polycab
650/ 1100 volt grade
- Havells
- Finolex

Telephone Wires

- AE
- Kaycee
-L&T
- GEC
- MECO
- Rishline (L & T)
- Kappa
-L&T
- Siemens
- Kaycee

-Delton
-RR KABLE
- Polycab
- Havells

Vol.II / 325
8

Telephone Tag Blocks

- Krone
- TVS R & M

Cable Gland & Lug

- Dowells
- Capital

10

PVC Conduit

11

PVC Conduit Accessories

- AKG
- CAP
- BEC
- AKG
- CAP

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
- BEC

12

13

Light & Power Accessories - Anchor

(Switches, Sockets, Ceiling rose, - Crabtree
etc.) Piano Type (ISI Marked)
- Cany
- Cona
Light Fixtures
(a) Fluorescent Light Fixture
- Philips
- Crompton Greaves
- Bajaj
-Havells
(b) Compact Fluorescent Light - Philips
Fixture
- Crompton Greaves
- Ankur
- Havells
(c) Metal Halide/ Halogen Light\ - Philips
Sodium Vapour Fixture
- Havells
- Crompton Greaves
- Bajaj

14

Ceiling Fan

- Khaitan
- Crompton Greaves
- Bajaj
-Usha
-Havells

15

Exhaust Fan

- Crompton Greaves
- Khaitan
- Bajaj

Vol.II / 326
16

Laminated Sheet

17

FDA System
(a) Manual call point, Response - Agni Suraksha
Indicator, Main FDA Panel
- Safe Zone
- Electroquip
(b) Smoke Detectors

- Hylem
- Formica
- Green

- Apollo
- Edwards

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
- System Sensor
- Nittan

(c) Heat Detectors

- Apollo
- Edwards
- System Sensor
- Nittan

(d) Amplifire, Hooter/ Speaker, - Philips

Microphone, P.A. Console, LMT
- Ahuja
(e) Batteries

- Exide/ Standard/Amco

Vol.II / 327
18

H.T. PANEL

CROMPTON GREAVES
SIEMENS
ABB
SCHNIEDER
UNIVERSAL

19

DG SET

C & S HIMOINSA PVT. LTD.

TIMKEN SERVICES PVT. LTD.
JACKSON

20

UNITISED SUBSTATION

MADHU ELECTRICALS
CONTROL AND SWITCHGEAR

Sen & Lall

21

FEEDER PILLARS

Spec/Tender doc.
-

SUDHIR GENSETS

MADHU ELECTRICALS
ADVANCE POWER CONTROLS PVT.
LTD.
SHIVAM INSTRUMENTS & CONTROLS
ADI
CATERPILLAR

L&T
ABB
SIEMENS
SCHNIEDER

22

MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT

BREAKER

23

MCB, ELCB & DB'S

LEGRAND
SIEMENS
L&T
HAGAR

24

DIGITAL METERS

SCHNIEDER
AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC
AL MEASURE
L&T

25

LED INDICATING LIGHTS

L&T
VAISHNO
SIEMENS

26.

ROTARY & TOGGLE SWITCHES

L&T
KAYCEE

BCH

27.

PUSH BUTTONS AND

INDICATING LAMPS

Vol.II /328
-

L&T
VAISHNO
SIEMENS

28.

CONTACTOR / TIMERS RELAY

L&T
ABB
SIEMENS
SCHNIEDER

29.

CT'S/PT'S CAST RESIN

AE
KAPPA
GILBERT
PRECISE
MATRIX

30.

TERMINAL BLOCK

ELMEX

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
-

CONNECTWELL
WAGO

31.

APFC RELAYS

DUCATI
EPCOS
L&T

32.

HRC FUSES

L&T
SIEMENS

33.

LUGS

DOWELL'S
JAINSONS

34.

PVC INSULATED COPPER

CONDUCTOR WIRES

FINOLEX
NATIONAL
SKYLINE
POLYCAB
HAVELLS

35.

HT & LT CABLES

KEI
POLYCAB
SKYTONE
UNIVERSAL
GLOSTER

36.

LIGHT FIXTURES / POLES

37

Lifts

PHILIPS
WIPRO
LEGERO
Ai-Nova
OTIS, Thyssen kurup

Note : The Client reserves the rights to adopt / use any one of the given brands / makes
manufacturers. The contractor shall get the samples approved before procurement / supply / use
works.
Vol.II /329

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

LIST
OF
MANDATORY TESTS

ANNEXURE - I
LIST OF MANDATORY TESTS
Sl.No.
1.

Materials
Fine Aggregate
(Sand)

2.

Coarse Aggregate
(Sand)

Test
a. Silt content
b. Bulking
c. Pertiole size
distribution
a. soft and
deleterious
materials
b. Particle size

Frequency
50 cm or part thereof
- do
Every 50 m3 or part thereof
required for RCC work
100 cum or part thereof
Every 45 cum or part thereof for
RCC work.

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.

Sl.No.

Materials

3.

Bricks

4.

5.

Test
distribution
1. Dimensions
2. Water absorption
3. Efflorescence
4. Compressive
Strength

Concrete

1. Slump
2. cube strengths

Timber

a. Moisture
absorption

Frequency
Every 50,000 or part thereof
Every 100,000 or part thereof
One test for source of manufacture.
1,00,000 or part thereof
Once a day or as desired for major
RCC work.
i. One set of six cubes for every 20
M3 or part in Beam/slab, foundation
concrete etc.
ii. One set of six cubes for every 5
M3 in columns, lintels etc.
One for value of every Rs.20,000/or more.

b. Mhors scale
hardness
6.

7.

8.

Terrazzo Tiles

Cement

Moisture
i. Transferees
strength

Every one cum or part thereof.

ii. Water absorption

2000 tiles or part

iii. Abrasion test

i. Initial & final
setting time

Every 50.00 M.T. or part thereof

ii. 3 days/ 7 days

strength
i. Yield stress

Steel

ii. Proof stress

iii. Percentage
elongation

Every 10.00 M.T. or part thereof dia

meter wise or 20 M.T.or part thereof
on the whole m, whichever is more.
No test for requirement of less then
5.00 M.T. diawise.

Vol.II /330
ANNEXURE - II
LIST OF REGISTERS TO SE MAINTAINED AT SITE
1.

Measurement Books

2.

Cement Register (Daily Record)

3.

Steel Register

4.

Steel Consumption Register -Billwise

5.

Drawings Register

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
6.

Materials at site register

7.

Hindrance Register.

8.

Concrete tube Test Register

9.

File rind Register for extra/variation items.

10.

Materials Tests Register and File

11.

Site Order Book (in triplicate)

12.

Lead Caulking Register.

13.

Labour Reports and Progress Reports Register

14.

Site Visit & Instructions Register.

15.

Certified true copies of the contracts.

Vol.II /331
ANNEXURE III
EQUIPMENTS AND APPARATUS FOR FIELD LAB AT SITE
1.

Concrete cube compressive strength testing machine of adequate capacity.

2.

Sleave Set (for aggregate 20 mm down)

40 mm

dia

45 cms

20 mm

45 cms

16 mm

45 cms

Sen & Lall

Spec/Tender doc.
12.5 mm

45 cms

10 mm

45 cms

4.75 mm

45 cms

600 micron

dia

20 cms

300 micron

20 cms

150 micron

20 cms

75 micron

20 cms

3.

Slump Cones 12 Nos.

4.

15 cms moulds 18 Nos.

5.

Vicat Apparatus with needles, test tubes, breakers, thick glass plate , etc.

6.

Sink

7.

Work benches, shelves, desks and any other furniture and lighting as
required by the Engineer-in-Charge.

8.

Weighing :
a.

Physical balance capacity 200 gms with weight box (accuracy 0.5 gm).

b.

Counter Scale capacity 20 gm.

c.

Weight :
i.

5 Kg. .

1 Nos.

500 gms .1 Nos.

ii.

2 Kg. .

2 Nos.

200 gms .2 Nos.

iii.

1 Kg. .

1 Nos.

100 gms .1 No.

9.

Vernier caliper 1 No.

10.

Any other equipment as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

Vol.II /332
ANNEXURE-IV
THEORETICAL WEIGHTS PER RUNNING METER FOR STEEL BARS
Sl.No.
1.
2.
3.

Nominal size of the bar in mm

6
8
10

Unit weight at Kg. Per meter run

0.222
0.395
0.617

Sen & Lall

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

Spec/Tender doc.
12
16
18
20
22
25
28
32
36
40
45
50

0.888
1.579
1.999
2.467
2.985
3.855
4.836
6.316
7.994
9.869
12.490
15.424

Vol.II /333